Maschine-/ Setting Data SINUMERIK 802D sl Maschine Data Setting Data Interface Signals PLC-Interface Signals Parameter SINAMICS Parameter Manual Index Valid for Control SINUMERIK 802D sl Drive SINAMICS S120 06/2007 Software -Version 1.4 1 2 3 4 5 6 I SINUMERIK(R)-Documentation Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" column. Status codes in the "Remarks" column. Status codes in the "Remarks" column. A .... New documentation. B .... Unrevised reprint with new Order No. C .... Revised edition with new status. Edition Order-No. Remarks 02/2006 6FC5397-5CP10-0BA0 C 06/2007 6FC5397-5CP10-1BA0 C Registered Trademarks All designations with the trademark symbol (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this documentation may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes may infringe the rights of the owner. Liability disclaimer We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition. Copyright (c) Siemens AG, 1995 - 2007 Order No. 6FC5397-5CP10-1BA0Siemens AG 2007 Subject to change without prior notice Preface Structure of the documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts: * General Documentation * User Documentation * Manufacturer/Service Documentation An overview of publications, which is updated monthly and also provides information about the language versions available, can be found on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol Select "Support" -> "Technical Documentation" ->"Overview of Publications" The Internet version of the DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at: http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) can be found in internet under: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu option "Support" . Target group This publication is intended for project engineers, commissioners, machine operators and service and maintenance personnel. Utility value The present Lists Manual provides knowledge in respect of parameters and their effects on the system. Standard Scope The present documentation describes the functionality of the standard scope. Any amendments made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer. Other functions not described in this documentation can possibly also be performed on thecontrol system. However, the customer is not entitled to demand these functions when the new equipment is supplied or servicing is carried out. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition iii Preface 06/2007 For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information on all types of the product and can thus not consider any conceivable case of installation, operationand maintenance. Technical Support If you have any questions, please contact the following hotline: Europa / Afrika Phone +49 180 5050 - 222 Fax +49 180 5050 - 223 Internet http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request Amerika Phone +1 423 262 2522 Fax +1 423 262 2200 E-Mail mailto:techsupport.sea@siemens.com Asien / Pazifik Phone +86 1064 719 990 Fax +86 1064 747 474 E-Mail mailto:adsupport.asia@siemens.com Note Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the following Internet address: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support. iv (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Preface Questions regarding documentation If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please fax or email us: Fax +49 9131 98 - 63315 E-mail mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com Fax form: See the reply form at the end of the document. SINUMERIK Internet address http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik EC Declaration of Conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found/obtained on the Internet: http://support.automation.siemen.com under the Product/Order No. 15257461 at the relevant branch office of the A&D MC group of Siemens AG Purpose of this manual The Lists Manual provides a complete overview of the functions, machine data, variables, interface signals and PLC blocks. Safety information This manual contains information which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. Notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol; notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. Danger Indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition v Preface 06/2007 t Warning means that there can be severe physical injury or even death if the corresponding safety measures are not followed. Caution means that there can be slight physical injury if the corresponding safety measures are not followed. Caution means that there can be damage to property if the corresponding safety measures are not followed. NOTICE indicates that an undesirable result or state may occur if the corresponding instruction is not followed. In the event of a number of levels of danger prevailing simultaneously, the warning corresponding to the highest level of danger is always used. A warning notice accompanied by a safety alert symbol indicating a risk of bodily injury can also indicate a risk of property damage. Qualified persons The associated device/system must only be set up and operated using this documentation. The device/system must be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel only. Qualified personnel as defined under the safety guidelines in this documentation are those who are authorized to start up, earth and label units, systems and circuits in accordance with the relevant safety standards. vi (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition Content 1 2 3 4 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 1.1 Specifications in the list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 1.2 Overview of machine and setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Machine Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 2.1 Display machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 2.2 Generale maschine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 2.3 2.3.1 Channel-specific machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101 Axis-specific machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212 Setting Data - Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-299 3.1 General setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-299 3.2 Channel-specific setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-314 Interface Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-343 4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-343 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 Signals from/to HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program-control signals from HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals from HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals from operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General selection/status signals from HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General selection/status signals to HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-351 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 NC signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-354 General signals to NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-354 General signals from NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-355 4.5 Mode signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-357 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 Channel-specific signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-363 Signals to channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-363 Signals from the channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-379 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 Axis-/spindle-specific signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferred axis-specific M and S functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals to axis/spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals from axis/spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Tool management functions from NC channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-419 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 4-344 4-344 4-346 4-347 4-348 4-350 4-389 4-389 4-390 4-407 vii Content 5 viii 06/2007 PLC User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-421 5.1 Adressranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-421 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 User data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals from MCP (connected to the MCPA module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals to MCP (connected to the MCPA module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading/writing NC data: Job [F20.6] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write NC data: Result [F20.6]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Retentive data area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-425 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 User alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User alarm: Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable for alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active alarm reaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-426 5-426 5-426 5-427 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.5.8 Signals from/to HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program control signals from HMI (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program selection from PLC (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkback signal Program selection from HMI (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . Signals from HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals from operator panel (retentive area). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General selection/status signals from HMI (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . . . . General selection/status signals to HMI (retentive area). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-427 5-427 5-427 5-428 5-428 5-428 5-429 5-429 5-430 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decoded M signals: (M0-M99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferred T functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferred M functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferred S functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferred D functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferred H functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-431 5-432 5-432 5-433 5-433 5-433 5-434 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 NCK signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General signals to NCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General signals from NCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals to fast inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal from fast inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating mode signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-434 5-434 5-435 5-436 5-437 5-438 5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 Channel Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-439 Signals to NC channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-439 Signals from NC channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-442 5.9 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 Axis/spindle signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferred M/S functions, axis-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals to axis/spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals from axis/spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-445 5-445 5-445 5-448 5.10 5.10.1 5.10.2 5.10.3 PLC machine data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT values (MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-452 5-452 5-452 5-452 5.11 Reading and writing PLC variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-453 5.12 Tool management functions from NC channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-454 5-423 5-423 5-423 5-423 5-424 5-424 5-424 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Content 6 SINAMICS Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-455 I Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-457 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition ix Content x 06/2007 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 1 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation 1.1 Specifications in the list The machine and setting data are listed in the form of tables. MD nummer MD identifier Cross reference Unit Brief description Activation Display filter System Dimension Default value Minimalvalue Attribute Data type Maximal value Protection The following information are specified: Number and identifier MD and SD are addressed via their numbers or their names (identifiers). The number and the name, as well as the activation type and the unit are displayed on the screen of the control system. In the field " identifier", you can see the name of the data. Cross reference For a detailed description of the appropriate data, please refer to the description of functions or manual/guide specified. Example: [F-S1] Description of Functions 802D sl, Chapter "Spindle (S1)" (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 1-11 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation 06/2007 Specifications in the list Unit/unit system Depending on MD 10240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC, the physical units of the machine data (MD) differ as follows: MD 10240 = 1 MD 10240 = 0 mm inch mm/min inch/min m/s2 inch/s2 m/s3 inch/s3 mm/rev. inch/rev If there are machine data with no physical unit assigned, a hyphen ("-") can be found in the relevant field. Hinweis: The default setting is MD 10240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC = 1 (metric) Activation In the "Activation" field, the following short designator specifies when the data takes effect after a change. po POWER ON cf NEW_CONF "RESET" key on the front plate of the NCU module - The "Activate MD" softkey on the HMI - "RESET" key on the control unit - It is possible to modify block limits during program operation re - at end of program M2/M30 or RESET - "RESET" key on the control unit so IMMEDIATELY After entry of value The levels of effectiveness have been listed above in order of priority. Display filter A short designator for the filter setting is listed in the "Display filter" field. With the aid of this filter setting, it is possible to selectively reduce the number of the displayed machine/setting data of a section. Display criteria: EXP Expert mode: * Active: the MD is assigned to the expert mode (display of MD) 1-12 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation Specifications in the list Depending on the machine data section, there are different display filters. These short designations return in the operator interface to activate the filters. The short designations of the display filter and their meanings are listed below for the individual machine data. General machine data N01 Configuration / Scaling N02 Memory configuration N03 PLC machine data N04 Drive control N05 Status data/Diagnostics N06 Monitors/Limitations N07 Auxiliary functions N08 Corrections/Compensations N09 Technological functions N10 Peripheral configuration N11 Standard machine N12 NC language ISO dialect Channelspecific machine data C01 Configuration C02 Memory configuration C03 Initial settings C04 Auxiliary functions C05 Velocities C06 Monitors/Limitations C07 Transformations C08 Corrections/Compensations C09 Technological functions C10 Standard machine C11 NC language ISO dialect (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 1-13 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation 06/2007 Specifications in the list Axis-specific machine data A01 Configuration (including memory) A02 Measuring system A03 Machine geometry A04 Speeds/Accelerations A05 Monitors/Limitations A06 Spindle A07 Controller data A08 Status data A09 Corrections/Compensations A10 Technological functions O11 Standard machine A12 NC language ISO dialect Data type In the "Data type" field, the short designators indicate the data types. The have the following meanings: BOOLEAN Boolean value: 1(TRUE) or 0 (FALSE) BYT E I8-bit value * as a INTEGER value. -128::: 127 * as a hexadecimal value: 00 ... FF * as a character as per ASCII character set, e.g. "a" STRING Sequence of characters (max. 16) WORD 16-bit value, * as an INTEGER value: -32768 ... 32767 * as a hexadecimal value: 0000 ... FFFF UNSIGNED WORD I16-bit value, * as an INTEGER value: 0 ... 65535, * as a hexadecimal value: 0000 ... FFFF INTEGER I16-bit value (here defined locally), * INTEGER value: -32768 ... 32767 1-14 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation Specifications in the list DWORD 32-bit value, * as an INTEGER value: -2147483648 ... 2147483647 * as a hexadecimal value: 0000 0000 ... FFFF UNSIGNED DWORD I32-bit value, * as an INTEGER value: 0 ... 4294967295, * as a hexadecimal value: 0000 0000 ... FFFF FFFF DOUBLE 64-bit value, * floating point value: 4.19 x 10-307 to 1.67 x 10308) FLOAT DWORD Realwerte (von 8,43 x 10-37 bis "3,37 x 1038) UBYTE Integerwerte (von 0 - 255) LONG Integerwerte (von 4294967296 - 4294967295) System Specifies the control system for which the data with the entered values applies. The following entries are possible: * default The entered values apply for all SINUMERIK 802D sl. Any deviations in the range of values must be entered in the following lines of the table. If no "default" entry exists, the data only applies for the control variants specified. 802d-cu3 Customised pro 802d-ng2 Nibbling/grinding plus 802d-ng3 Nibbling/grinding pro 802d-tm1 Turning/milling value 802d-tm2 Turning/milling plus 802d-tm3 Turning/milling pro Default values This value is used to specify a default value for the machine data. If the default values for the channels are different, this is marked by a " , ". Range of values (minimum/maximum value) Specifies the input limits. If no range of values is specified, the data type determines the input limits, and the field is marked with "***". If no range of values is specified, the value in the "Data type" field determines the input limits and the field is marked with "***". (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 1-15 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation 06/2007 Specifications in the list Protection The SINUMERIK 802D sl provides a concept of protection levels for enabling data areas.There are the protection levels 0 to 7 whereby 0 is the highest and 7 the lowest level.The protection levels can be set for certain function areas (e.g. program editor) using thedisplay machine data (USER_CLASS...).When the control system is delivered, certain default passwords are already set for the pro-tection levels 1 to 3. If necessary, the appropriate authorized person can change these pass-words. Tabelle 1-1 Protection level Locked by Area 0 Siemens, reserved 1 Password: SUNRISE (default) Expert mode (OEM HIGH) 2 Password: EVENING (default) Machine manufacturer (OEM LOW) 3 Password: CUSTOMER (default) Authorized operator, setter 4 to 7 No password anduser interface from PLC NCK Authorized operator, setter or appropriate graduations as desired Protection levels 1 ... 3 The protection levels 1 to 3 require a password. The passwords can be changed after activation. For example, if the passwords are no longer known, the control system must be reini-tialized (booting with default machine data). This will reset all passwords to their defaultsaccording to the software release you have acquired. The password remains set until it is reset by selecting the Delete password softkey. POWER ON will not reset the password. Protection levels 4 ... 7 Protection level 7 is set automatically if no password is set and no protection level interfacesignal is set. The protection levels 4 to 7 can be set from the PLC user program even wi-thout a password by setting the bits in the user interface. 1-16 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation Overview of machine and setting data 1.2 Overview of machine and setting data The machine data and setting data are divided into the following areas: Tabelle 1-2 Overview of the machine and setting data areas Area Designation from 200 to 400 Display machine data1 from 1 000 to 19 999 General machine data from 20 000 to 29 999 Channel-specific machine data from 30 000 to 39 999 Axis-specific machine data from 41 000 to 41 999 General setting data from 42 000 to 42 999 Channel-specific setting data from 43 000 to 43 999 Axis-specific setting data (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 1-17 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation 06/2007 Overview of machine and setting data 1-18 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2 Machine Data 2.1 Display machine data Number Identifier Display filters Reference Unit Name Data type Active Attributes System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value Protection Description: 202 FIRST_LANGUAGE - - - Foreground language BYTE POWER ON 2 3/2 - 0 2 1 Description: The language (1 or 2) which is to be automatically active after each system startup is set in the machine data. Two languages are available simultaneously in SINUMERIK 802D. Languages other than those included in the control ex works can be loaded. It is possible to temporarily switch to a second language using a softkey in the Diagnosis area. After power ON the predefined language set in MD is again active. 203 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION - - - Display resolution BYTE POWER ON 5 3/2 - 0 3 0 Description: This machine data defines the number of places after the decimal point in the position display for linear axes in metric systems as well as in general for rotary axes. Spindle positions are treated as rotary axis positions. The position is displayed with 10 symbols max. including the plus/minus sign and the decimal point. A plus sign is not displayed. All 3 positions after the decimal point are displayed per default. MD value=3: Display resolution = 10-3 [mm] or [degrees]. related to: MD 10200: INT_INCR_PER_MM or MD 10210: INT_INCR_PER_DEG (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-19 Machine Data 06/2007 Display machine data 204 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH - - - Display resolution for the INCH dimension system BYTE POWER ON 0 5 3/2 - 4 0 Description: This machine data specifies the number of places after the decimal point for linear axes for Inch dimension systems. The position is displayed with max. 10 characters including the plus/minus sign and the decimal point. A plus sign is not displayed. All 4 positions after the decimal point are displayed per default. MD value=4: Display resolution = 10 -4 [inch] The display is retained according to MD 203 for rotary axes and spindle positions related to: MD 10200: INT_INCR_PER_MM, MD 203: DISPLAY_RESOLUTION 205 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_SPINDLE - - - Display resolution for spindle values BYTE POWER ON 0 5 3/2 - 1 0 Description: This machine data specifies the number of places after the decimal point of the spindle speed display. The values are displayed with 10 symbols max. including the plus/minus sign and the decimal point. A plus sign is not displayed. 1 position after the decimal point is displayed per default. MD value=1: Display resolution = 10-1 289 CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS - - - Simulation updating rate of actual value INTEGER POWER ON 0 4000 4/3 - 100 0 Description: This MD must be machine Value = is set to specify the time intervals at which the simulation graphic updated in accordance with the current machining process on the tool. 0 means no update. 290 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM - - - Simulation of actual-value refresh rate BYTE POWER ON 0 7 4/3 - 2 0 Description: The position of the coordinate system can be altered as follows: 2-20 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Display machine data 291 CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON - - - Diameter display for active transverse axes BYTE POWER ON 0 1 4/3 - 1 0 Description: 0: Inputs for absolute values as radius value. Zero offsets always as radius, tool lengths always as radius, tool wear always as radius 1: Position display as diameter, distance to go as diameter absolute distances as diameter 292 CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON - - - Incremental infeed BYTE POWER ON 1 7/3 - 0 1 0 Description: 0: Input in radius 1: Input in diameter 361 MEAS_TOOL_CHANGE - - - Input enable for T/D no. for tool measuring BYTE POWER ON - 1 3/3 - 0 0 Description: 0: T/D number input blocked 1: T/D number input enabled 373 MEAS_SAVE_POS_LENGTH2 - Enable tool measuring SK "Save Pos" for all values. BYTE - POWER ON - - 2/2 - 0 0 1 Description: Controls "Save/Pos" softkey for "Manual tool measuring" function: 0: The SK "Save Pos" is only active when measuring length 1 1: SK "Save Pos" is generally active (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-21 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 2.2 Generale maschine data Number Identifier Display filters Reference Unit Name Data type Active Attributes System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value Protection Description: 10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB N01, N11 K2 - Machine axis name STRING POWER ON - 31 "X1","Y1","Z1","A1"," B1","C1","U1"... - 7/2 802d-cu3 6 "X1","Y1","Z1","SP"," A1","PLCX1"... - 2/2 802d-ng2 6 "X1","Z1","C1","A1"," B1","PLCX1"... - 2/2 802d-ng3 6 "X1","Z1","C1","A1"," B1","PLCX1"... - 2/2 802d-tm1 4 "X1","Y1","Z1","SP" - - 2/2 802d-tm2 6 "X1","Y1","Z1","SP"," A1","PLCX1"... - 2/2 802d-tm3 6 "X1","Y1","Z1","SP"," A1","PLCX1"... - 2/2 - Description: The name of the machine axis is entered in this MD - The preferred axis label (name) should be used comprising a valid address letter (A, B, C, Q, U, V, W, X, Y, Z), followed by an optional, numerical expansion (1-99). - The selected machine axis label (name) must differ from the label (name) of geometry axes (X, Y, Z) and additional channel axes (MD 20080: AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB if a transformation is planned (e.g.: TRANSMITT). Comment: Transformation for SINUMERIK 802D, SW release P1, transformations are not available. - A "free" entered machine axis label (axis name) may not be a name, address, keyword or predefined label or name that is already being used in the control or is reserved for other functions (e.g.: SPOS, DIAMON, ...). Note: Not all the SINUMERIK control system functions are documented for 802D. Use of a free axis identifier is therefore conditional. Special cases: We recommend the following for machine axis identifiers: X1, Y1, Z1, U1, V1, W1, Q1for linear axes, A1, B1, C1for rotary axes related to: MD 20060: AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB (geometry axis identifier) MD 20080 :AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB (channel axis identifier) 2-22 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 10063 POSCTRL_CYCLE_DIAGNOSIS N01, N05, EXP - s Active timing DOUBLE POWER ON -, READ - 3 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/- 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/- 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/- 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/- 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/- Description: Diagnostic data related to the PROFIBUS DP cycle. [0]: Latest date at which the actual values must be available (Tdx) [1]: Actually active position controller cycle offset (Tm) [2]: Latest date at which the setpoints were output by the position controller Diagnostic data are initialized with ZERO with each NCK power up 10074 PLC_IPO_TIME_RATIO N01, N05 - - PLC task factor for main run (IPO) DWORD POWER ON - - 1 1 50 0/0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Division ratio between IPO and PLC tasks. A value of 2 means, for example, that the PLC task is processed in every second IPO cycle only. The PLC cycle time therefore equals 2 IPO times. More runtime is therefore available for the other tasks. The PLC runtime must not exceed this PLC cycle time, or a PLC STOP alarm will be triggered. Anwendungsbeispiel: 10088 REBOOT_DELAY_TIME EXP - s Reboot delay DOUBLE SOFORT 1.0 2/2 - - 0.2 0.0 Description: The reboot following PI "_N_IBN_SS" is delayed by the time $MN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME. The suppressable NOREADY alarm 2900 is activated immediately with PI "_N_IBN_SS". (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-23 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data If $MN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME falls below the $MA_SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME value of an axis, the axis is decelerated during $MN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME. The servo enable is disabled afterwards, i.e. the full $MA_SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME is NOT waited. Alarm 2900 does not become active with $MN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME = 0.0 and there is no reboot delay. The NCK waits beyond the stated delay time until the PI has been able to be acknowledged to the HMI. The delay time may total up to 2 s. 10200 INT_INCR_PER_MM N01 G2 - Calculation resolution for linear positions DOUBLE POWER ON - 1.0e9 7/2 - 1000. 1.0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 100000. - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 100000. - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The number of internal increments per millimeter is defined in this MD. The precision of the linear position input is limited to the calculation resolution by rounding-off the product of the programmed value and the calculation resolution to an integer value. To make the rounding clear, powers of 10 should be used for the calculation resolution. Anwendungsbeispiel: The calculation resolution can be increased to u1000 incr./mm for linear axes operating to high accuracy requirements. 10210 INT_INCR_PER_DEG N01 G2 - Computational resolution for angular positions DOUBLE POWER ON - - 1000.0 1.0 1.0e9 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 100000. - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 100000. - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: The number of internal increments per degree is defined in this MD. The precision of the angular position input is limited to the calculation resolution by rounding-off the product of the programmed value and the calculation resolution to an integer value. To make the rounding clear, powers of 10 should be used for the calculation resolution. Anwendungsbeispiel: The calculation resolution can be changed to u1000 incr./degrees for a highresolution rotary axis. 2-24 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 10240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC N01 G2 - Basic system metric BOOLEAN POWER ON SCAL - - TRUE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The MD defines the basic system used by the control to scale length-dependent physical quantities during data input/output. All related data are stored internally in the basic units 1 mm, 1 degree and 1 sec. When accessing a part program via the operator panel or from an external device, scaling is in the following units: SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC = 1: normalized to: mm, mm/min, m/s2, m/s3mm/rev SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC = 0: normalized to: inch, inch/min, inch/s2inch/s3, inch/rev The selection of the basic system also specifies the interpretation of the programmed F value for linear axes: metricinch G94mm/mininch/min G95mm/revinch/rev A power-up is necessary after changing this machine data, as associated machine data that have physical units will otherwise be normalized incorrectly. Perform the following steps: - MD change by manual input First perform start-up and then enter the physical units in the related machine data. - MD change via machine data file First perform start-up and then reload the machine data file so that the new physical units are activated. If the machine data are altered, alarm 4070 "Scaling machine data altered" is output. Anwendungsbeispiel: Installation in the metric system and then conversion to inch system. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-25 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 10350 FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS N10 A4 - Number of active digital NCK input bytes BYTE POWER ON - - 1 0 5 7/2 802d-cu3 - 2 1 - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 2 1 - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 2 1 - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 2 1 - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 2 1 - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 2 1 - 2/2 - Description: The number of bytes of the digital NCK inputs that can be used on the control are defined in this machine data. These digital NCK inputs can be read directly by the part program. Moreover, the signal state at the HW inputs can also be changed by the PLC. If more digital NCK inputs are defined in the machine data than are available in the control hardware, a signal status of 0 is set in the control for the inputs that do not exist in the hardware. The NCK value can be altered by the PLC. Related to: IS "Disable the digital NCK inputs" (DB10, DBB0, DBB122 ...) IS "PLC setting for digital NCK inputs" (DB10, DBB1, DBB123 ...) IS "Actual value for digital NCK inputs" (DB10, DBB60, DBB186 ...) 10360 FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS N10 A4 - Number of active digital NCK output bytes BYTE POWER ON - 5 7/2 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - 2 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 2 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 2 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 2 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 2 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 2 - - 2/2 Description: The number of bytes for digital NCK outputs that can be used on the control are defined in this machine data. These digital NCK outputs can be set directly by the part program. The PLC is able to set the digital outputs to "0" in a defined way with IS "Disable the digital NCK outputs". alter the NCK value with IS "Overwrite mask for digital NCK outputs". specify a PLC value with IS "Setting mask for digital NCK outputs". 2-26 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data If more digital NCK outputs are defined in the machine data than are available in the control hardware, no alarm is triggered. The signal states specified by the part program can be read by the PLC. Special cases: Digital NCK outputs 5 to 8 can be processed only by the PLC (no hardware outputs). Related to: IS "Disable the digital NCK outputs" (DB10, DBB4, DBB130 ...) IS "Overwrite mask for digital NCK outputs" (DB10, DBB5, DBB131 ...) IS "PLC setting for digital NCK outputs" (DB10, DBB6, DBB132 ...) IS "Setting mask for digital NCK outputs" (DB10, DBB7, DBB133 ...) IS "Setpoint for digital NCK outputs" (DB10, DBB64, DBB190 ...) 10366 HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN - Hardware assignment of external digital NCK inputs DWORD N10 A4 POWER ON - 10 0x01000000 0x01000000 0x060003FF 7/2 802d-cu3 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 802d-ng2 1 0x00010101 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 - 802d-ng3 1 0x00010101 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 802d-tm1 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 802d-tm2 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 802d-tm3 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 Description: The following 4 bytes assign the external digital NCK I/Os to the hardware: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th byte: byte: byte: byte: I/O no. Submodule no. Module no. Segment no. As soon as value 0 is entered in byte 3 (module no.), the output byte concerned is not processed by the control. I/O no.: Number of the I/O byte on the DP compact module (range: 1 to 2; always 1 with analog inputs/outputs) Submodule no.: Submodule slot on the terminal block into which the DP compact module is inserted (range: 1 to 8) Module no.: Number of the logical slot into which the terminal block with the external I/Os is inserted. The logical slot is assigned to a physical slot by MD 13010: DRIVE_LOGIC_NR (logical drive number). Each module occupies a physical slot. The first 6 slots are permanently occupied on the 810D. Segment no.: Always 1 for 840D/810D (ID for 611D bus) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-27 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Example: HW_ASSIGN_DIGITAL_FASTIN[3] = 01 04 03 02 1st byte: 02 = 2nd input byte of a 16 bit input module 2nd byte: 03 = Input module inserted in slot 3 of the terminal block 3rd byte: 04 = Terminal block inserted at logical drive number 4 4th byte: 01 = ID for 611D bus PROFIBUS DP: Segment no.: 5 = PROFIBUS DP 6 = PROFIBUS DP link module Module no.: 1 ... MD_MAXNUM_SIMO611D_AXES: Number of the logical slot in which the terminal block with the external I/Os is inserted. The logical slot is assigned to a physical slot by $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR, it is activated by $MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE. 1st + 2nd bytes give the logical start address of the I/O slot on the PROFIBUS 1st byte = low byte 2nd byte = high byte Value 0000 means NO active slots Values 0001..007F are reserved for the PLC (NCK can also read the value for input slots without error, but output slots are forbidden in this range and lead to an alarm during startup) Values 0080..02FF are valid Values > 02FF are invalid Example: HW_ASSIGN_DIGITAL_FASTIN[3] = '05000302' 1st + 2nd byte: 0302 (hex) = logical start address 770 (decimal) 3rd byte: 00 = no significance 4th byte: 05 = ID for PROFIBUS DP Related to: MD 10368: HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT MD 10362: HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTIN MD 10364: HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTOUT 10368 HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT N10 A4 - Hardware assignment of external digital NCK outputs DWORD POWER ON - 4 0x01000000 0x01000000 0x060003FF 7/2 802d-cu3 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 802d-ng2 1 0x00010101 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 802d-ng3 1 0x00010101 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 802d-tm1 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 802d-tm2 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 802d-tm3 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2 - Description: The following 4 bytes assign the external digital NCK outputs to the hardware: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 2-28 byte: byte: byte: byte: I/O no. Submodule no. Module no. Segment no. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data As soon as value 0 is entered in byte 3 (module no.), the output byte concerned is not processed by the control. The hardware assignment is control specific and therefore different on the SINUMERIK 840D/810D and FM-NC. The individual bytes are explained under MD: HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN. [hw] = Index (0 to 3) for addressing the external digital output bytes Related to: MD 10366: HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN MD 10362: HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTIN MD 10364: HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTOUT 10400 CC_VDI_IN_DATA EXP, N02 OEM - Number of input bytes for compile cycles DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 1024 7/1 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: The compile cycle user can freely define data within a data block on the PLC user interface. As the user, he determines the size of the interface from PLC to NCK. This machine data describes the length of the area on the VDI interface in bytes which defines the NCK input interface. The sum of this MD and the machine data CC_VDI_OUT_DATA must not exceed 400 for software version 1. 10410 CC_VDI_OUT_DATA EXP, N02 OEM - Number of output bytes for compile cycles DWORD POWER ON - 1024 7/1 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The compile cycle user can freely define data within a data block on the PLC user interface. As the user, he determines the size of the interface from PLC to NCK. This machine data describes the length of the area on the VDI interface in bytes which defines the NCK output interface. The sum of this MD and the machine data CC_VDI_IN_DATA must not exceed 400. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-29 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 10420 CC_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_MASK EXP, N10 OEM - Reservation of external outputs for compile cycles DWORD POWER ON - - 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Reservation of high-speed hardware outputs for CC applications Bit 0(LSB)-14: Mask of the digital output bytes reserved for the CC application Bits 16-30: Mask of the analog outputs reserved for the CC application The hardware outputs reserved here are included in the multiple assignment monitoring routine when the system is powered up. It is recommended to register all the hardware outputs used by CC applications here. Bit 15: Suppresses power-up alarm 4275 (multiple assignment of digital output) Bit 31: Suppresses power-up alarm 4275 (multiple assignment of analog output) 10450 SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB N09 N3 - Assignment of software cams to machine axes BYTE POWER ON - 32 0 0 31 7/2 802d-cu3 8 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 8 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 8 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 1 - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 1 - - - 0/0 - Description: This machine data allows one machine axis to be assigned to each of the 16 possible cam pairs (each is comprised of one minus and one plus cam). If a "0" is entered, the corresponding cam is not processed. The cam signal output is activated via the axial IS "Cam activation" (DB31-48, DBX2.0). Index [n] of the machine data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 15 correspond to cam pairs 1, 2, ... , 16 Related to IS "Cam activation" (DB31-48, DBX2.0) 2-30 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Example: Cam pair 1 is to be assigned to machine axis 3 and cam pair 3 to machine axis 4. Cam pair 2 is not to be assigned to an axis. MD: SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB[0]= 3 MD: SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB[1]= 0 MD: SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB[2]= 4 10460 SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME N09 N3 s Lead or delay time at minus cams 1-16 DOUBLE POWER ON - 32 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 8 - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 8 - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 8 - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 1 - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 1 - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 1 - - - 0/0 - Description: A lead or delay time can be assigned in this machine data to each minus cam 116 to compensate for delay times. The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time value entered. Positive value: Negative value: --> --> Lead time Delay time Serves to compensate for the constant proportion of the internal delay time between actual value acquisition and signal output. Index [n] of the machine data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 15 correspond to cam pairs 1, 2, ... , 16 This machine data is added to the setting data SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1[n] and SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_2[n]. Related to: SD: SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 1 - 8) SD: SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_2[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 9 - 16) 10461 SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME N09 N3 s Lead or delay time at plus cams 1-16 DOUBLE POWER ON - 32 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 8 - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 8 - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 8 - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 1 - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 1 - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 1 - - - 0/0 - (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-31 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Description: A lead or delay time can be assigned in this machine data to each plus cam 116 to compensate for delay times. The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time value entered. Positive value: Negative value: --> --> Lead time Delay time Serves to compensate for the constant proportion of the internal delay time between actual value acquisition and signal output. Index [n] of the machine data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 15 correspond to cam pairs 1, 2, ... , 16 This machine data is added to the setting data SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1[n] and SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_2[n]. Related to: SD: SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 1 - 8) SD: SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_2[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 9 - 16) 10470 SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_1 N09 N3 - Hardware assignment for output of cams 1-8 to NCK DWORD I/Os POWER ON - - 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 - Description: The cam signal status can be output to the NCK I/Os as well as to the PLC. The hardware assignment of the minus and plus cam signals to the digital output bytes used for the NCK I/Os is made in this machine data for cam pairs 1 - 8. The assigned output signals can also be inverted with this machine data. The MD is coded as follows: Bits 0-7: No. of 1st HW byte Bits 8-15: No. of 2nd HW byte Bits 16-23: Inversion mask for Bits 24-31: Inversion mask for Bit=0: Bit=1: used with digital outputs used with digital outputs writing 1st HW byte used writing 2nd HW byte used Do not invert Invert If both HW bytes are specified, the 1st byte contains the minus cam signals and the 2nd byte the plus cam signals. 2-32 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data If the 2nd byte is not specified (= "0"), then the 8 cams are output as an AND operation of the minus and plus cam signals via the 1st HW byte using the 1st inversion mask. The status of the non-inverted output signal for linear axes and for rotary axes with "plus cam - minus cam < 180 degrees" is: "1" between minus and plus cams "0" outside this range The status of the non-inverted output signal for rotary axes with "plus cam minus cam >= 180 degrees" is: "0" between minus and plus cams "1" outside this range The following must be specified as the byte address for the digital outputs: 1: for on-board byte 2 - 5: for external bytes 10480 SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK N09 N3 - Mask for output of cam signals via timer interr. to NCU DWORD POWER ON - - 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 - Description: A timer-controlled output to the 4 on-board outputs of the NCK I/Os can be selected in this machine data for 4 cam pairs. In this case, the minus and plus signals of a cam pair are EXCLUSIVE OR'd for output as one signal. Meaning for set bit: Associated cam (minus and plus cam signals EXCLUSIVE OR'd) is output via a timer interrupt at one of the 4 on-board outputs of the NCU. The on-board outputs are assigned in order of increasing machine axis numbers (with assigned cam pairs). Example: Machine axis Machine axis Machine axis Machine axis 3 1 7 2 = = = = cam cam cam cam pair pair pair pair 1 2 3 4 --> --> --> --> on-board on-board on-board on-board output output output output 3 1 4 2 If a plurality of cam pairs are set for one machine axis, then this axis is assigned in ascending order of the cam pairs. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-33 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Example: Machine axis Machine axis Machine axis Machine axis 3 3 7 2 = = = = cam cam cam cam pair pair pair pair 1 2 3 4 --> --> --> --> on-board on-board on-board on-board output output output output 2 3 4 1 This function works independently of the assignment set in MD: SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_1 or MD: SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_2. Note: The on-board byte must not be used more than once. If there is more than one signal change in the IPO cycle for the cam pairs specified in the MD, then the cam pair with the lowest number determines the instant of output. The other signal changes take place at the same time. 10485 SW_CAM_MODE N09 N3 - Behavior of SW cams DWORD POWER ON - 7/2 - - 0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: Meaning of the individual bits: Bit 0(LSB) = 0: If more than 1 signal change per interpolation cycle is due for the cams specified in MD SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK, the cam having the lowest number will determine the output instant. The other signals change at the same instant. That is, a maximum of one interrupt-controlled output is effected per interpolation cycle. Bit 0(LSB) = 1: Each cam specified in MD SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK will be output precisely at the time of the interpolation cycle. There is no output priority of the cams. A maximum of 8 interrupt-controlled outputs can be performed per interpolation cycle. Bit 1 = 0: Inversion of signal behavior from plus cam where plus cam - minus cam >= 180 degr . Bit 1 = 1: No inversion of signal behavior from plus cam where plus cam - minus cam >= 2-34 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 180 degr. Signal behavior on-board output: Overtravelling: Minus cam plus cam Traversing direction: positive 0->1 1->0 negative 1->0 0->1 Bit 2 = 0: No path-time cam Bit 2 = 1: Path-time cam for cams where minus position = plus position. The lead/delay time applied is independent of: velocity of the axis position of the axis reversal of traversing direction The cam is only activated on overtravelling of the cam position. A lead/delay time applied to the minus cam is active and leads to a shift of the whole cam. Bit 3 = 0: No alignment signal in case of measurement area selection. Bit 3 = 1: Output of an alignment board output 8 is used On-board output 8 = 1: On-board output 8 = 0: signal for measurement area selection (FM only). Onpermanently. Measurement possible (active range enabled) Measurement not possible Bit 4 = 0: and following free 10500 DPIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_IN N10 - - Logical slot address of the PROFIBUS I/Os DWORD POWER ON MD_MAXNU 0 M_DPIO_RA NGE_IN 8191 7/2 - 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Logical slot address of the PROFIBUS I/Os usable by the NCK. The logical slot address is defined in STEP 7, hardware configuration. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-35 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 10501 DPIO_RANGE_LENGTH_IN N10 - - Length of the PROFIBUS I/O range DWORD POWER ON - MD_MAXNU 0 M_DPIO_RA NGE_IN 0 MD_MAXNUM_D 7/2 PIO_BYTES_RA NGE_IN 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Length of the PROFIBUS I/O range consistently usable for the NCK. This range must be defined in STEP 7, hardware configuration. 0: only the first data slot is used. x: length of the consistent PROFIBUS I/O range 10502 DPIO_RANGE_ATTRIBUTE_IN N10 - - Attributes of the PROFIBUS I/Os DWORD POWER ON - MD_MAXNU 0x01 M_DPIO_RA NGE_IN 0x00 0x0F 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Attributes of the PROFIBUS I/Os Bit 0: Little/Big Endian format of the system variable $A_DPx_IN[n,m] 0: Little Endian format 1: Big Endian format Bit 1: (reserved) Bit 2: Read input data 0: Read possible through system variable and CC binding (increased performance requirements) 1: Read only possible for CC binding (low performance requirements) Bit 3: Slot sign-of-life alarm 0: Slot sign-of-life alarms are output 1: Slot sign-of-life alarms are suppressed 2-36 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 10510 DPIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_OUT N10 - - Logical slot address of the PROFIBUS I/Os DWORD POWER ON MD_MAXNU 0 M_DPIO_RA NGE_OUT 8191 7/2 - 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Logical slot address of the PROFIBUS I/Os usable by the NCK. The logical slot address is defined in STEP 7, hardware configuration. 10511 DPIO_RANGE_LENGTH_OUT N10 - - Length of the PROFIBUS I/O range DWORD POWER ON - MD_MAXNU 0 M_DPIO_RA NGE_OUT 0 MD_MAXNUM_D 7/2 PIO_BYTES_RA NGE_OUT 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Length of the PROFIBUS I/O range consistently usable for the NCK. This range must be defined in STEP 7, hardware configuration. 0: only the first data slot is used. x: length of the consistent PROFIBUS I/O range 10512 DPIO_RANGE_ATTRIBUTE_OUT N10 - - Attributes of the PROFIBUS I/Os DWORD POWER ON - MD_MAXNU 0x01 M_DPIO_RA NGE_OUT 0x00 0x0F 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-37 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Description: Attributes of the PROFIBUS I/Os Bit 0: Little/Big Endian format of system variable $A_DPx_OUT[n,m] 0: Little Endian format 1: Big Endian format Bit 1: Write output data 0: Write only through system variable 1: Write only through CC binding Bit 2: (reserved) Bit 3: Slot sign-of-life alarm 0: Slot sign-of-life alarms are output 1: Slot sign-of-life alarms are suppressed 10618 PROTAREA_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE EXP, N01, N09 A3 - Protection range on change of geometry axes BYTE POWER ON - - 0 0 3 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data is used to define whether any active protection zones will remain active after a transformation change or geo axis replacement, or whether they will be deactivated. The machine data is bit-coded with the following meanings: Bit 0 = 0 Protection zones deactivated on transformation change. Bit 0 = 1 Active protection zones remain active after transformation change. Bit 1 = 0 Protection zones deactivated on geo axis replacement. Bit 1 = 1 Active protection zones remain active after geo axis replacement. 2-38 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 10710 PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB EXP, N01 K1 - Setting data to be updated DWORD POWER ON - 30 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Setting data to be backed up The values of the SDs listed in this table are stored in non-volatile memory, i.e. remain valid after power ON. The setting data whose HMI numbers were entered in the backup list are written into the (buffered) active file system after the description of the part program on RESET. Programmable setting data are: SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD 42000 42400 42800 43210 43220 43230 43300 43420 43430 43510 43520 43700 43710 43720 43730 43740 43750 43760 43770 43780 $SC_THREAD_START_ANGLE $SC_PUNCH_DWELLTIME $SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB $SA_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 $SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 $SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS $SA_FIXED_STOP_TORQUE $SA_FIXED_STOP_WINDOW $SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 $SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2 $SA_OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1 $SA_OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2 $SA_OSCILL_VELO $SA_OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES $SA_OSCILL_END_POS $SA_OSCILL_CTRL_MASK $SA_OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE (GCODE) SF PDELAYON SETMS G25 G26 LIMS FPRAON WALIMOF WALIMON FXST FXSW OSP1 OSP2 OST1 OST2 FA OSNSC OSE OSCTRL OS The values of SD 43420: WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS (working area limitation plus) and SD 43430: WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS (working area limitation minus) are to be stored in the buffered RAM after every RESET, M02, M30 or M17. --> PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB[0] = 43420 --> PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB[1] = 43430 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-39 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 10713 M_NO_FCT_STOPRE EXP, N12, N07 - - M function with preprocessing stop DWORD POWER ON - 15 -1 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The M functions defined by machine data $MN_M_NO_FCT_STOPRE perform an implicit preprocessing stop. That is, the interpretation of the next part program line will be stopped until the block with the M function defined in that way has been processed completely (PLC acknowledgement, motion, etc.). 10714 M_NO_FCT_EOP EXP, N07 S1 - M function for spindle active after reset DWORD POWER ON - - -1 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: For spindles where a '2' is configured in $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET, no spindle reset is enabled with this M function when the part program is terminated. The spindle therefore remains active after the end of the part program. Proposal: M32 Restrictions: see machine data 10715: $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE Related to: $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP, $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR, $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE 2-40 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data For external language mode: $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR For nibbling: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE 10715 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE EXP, N12, N07 FBFA,K1 - M function to be replaced by a subroutine DWORD POWER ON 10 - 7/2 - -1 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: M number with which a subprogram is called. The name of the subprogram is stated in $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n]. If the M function defined with $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] is programmed in a part program block, the subprogram defined in M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n] is started at the end of the block. If the M function is programmed again in the subprogram, substitution by a subprogram call is then not carried out. $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] acts both in Siemens mode G290 and in external language mode G291. The subprograms configured with $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n] and $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME must not be active simultaneously in one block (line of a part program). That means no more than one M/T function replacement can be active in any one block. Neither an M98 nor a modal subprogram call can be programmed in a block with the M function replacement. Subprogram return and end of part program are also not permitted. Alarm 14016 is output in the event of a conflict. Restrictions: M functions with a fixed meaning and configurable M functions are checked for conflicting settings. A conflict is reported with an alarm. The following M functions are checked: M0 to M5, M17,M30, M19, M40 to M45, M function for 'Spindle active after part program end' according to machine data $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP M function for subprogram calls according to machine data $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE M function for spindle/axis mode switchover according to machine data $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR Additional M function for program stop according to machine data $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-41 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data - Additional M function for conditional program stop according to machine data $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE For external language mode only: M function for 'Macro call via M function' according to machine data $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE M functions for interrupt programming according to configuration by $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT and $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT M functions for channel synchronisation according to configuration by $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN und $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX M function for spindle/axis mode switchover with external language applied according to machine data $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR Additionally M98 and M99 with external language applied ($MN_MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE). For nibbling: M functions for nibbling/punching $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE provided that $MC_PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION. according to configuration they have been activated by by Exception: The M function for the tool change defined by $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE must not be used in $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE. Related to: $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP, $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR, $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE, With external language mode: $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR With nibbling: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE 10716 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME EXP, N12, N07 FBFA,K1 - Subroutine name for M function replacement STRING POWER ON - 10 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - 2-42 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Description: The machine data contains the name of the cycle. This cycle is called if the M function has been programmed from machine data $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE. If the M function is programmed in a motion block, the cycle is executed after the motion. $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE is active in both Siemens mode G290 and in external language mode G291. If a T number is programmed in the call block, then the programmed T number can be polled in the cycle under the variable $P_TOOL. M and T function replacements must not be programmed simultaneously in one block. That means not more than one M or T function replacement may be active in any one block. Neither an M98 nor a modal subprogram call may be programmed in a block with M function replacement. Moreover, neither subprogram return nor part program end are allowed. Alarm 14016 is issued if there is a conflict. Related to: $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME 10717 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME EXP, N12, N07 FBFA,K1 - Name of tool-changing cycle for T function replacement STRING POWER ON - - 7/2 - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Cycle name for tool change routine on call-up with a T function. If a T function is programmed in a part program block, the subprogram defined in T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is called at the end of the block. The T number programmed can be polled in the cycle via system variables $C_T / $C_T_PROG as a decimal value and via $C_TS / $C_TS_PROG as a string (only with tool management). $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is active both in Siemens mode G290 and in external language mode G291. $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME and $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME must not be active in one block at the same time, i.e. no more than one M/T function replacement can be active per block. In the block with the T function replacement, neither an M98 nor a modal subprogram call can be programmed. Furthermore, neither subprogram return nor part program end are allowed. In the event of a conflict alarm 14016 is output. Related to: $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-43 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 10718 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR EXP, N12, N07 - - M function replacement with parameters DWORD POWER ON - - -1 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: If an M function replacement was configured with $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] / $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n], a parameter transfer via system variable can be specified for one of these M functions using $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR, in the same way as T function replacement. The parameters stored in the system variables always refer to the part program line where the M function to be replaced was programmed. The following system variables are available: $C_ME : Address extension of the replaced M function $C_T_PROG : TRUE if address T was programmed $C_T : Value of address T ( Integer ) $C_TE : Address extension of address T $C_TS_PROG : TRUE if address TS was programmed $C_TS : Value of address TS (string, only with tool management ) $C_D_PROG : TRUE if address D was programmed $C_D : Value of address D $C_DL_PROG : TRUE if address DL was programmed $C_DL : Value of address DL 10719 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE EXP, N12, N07 K1 - Setting of T function substitution DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 7 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This machine data parameterizes the execution of the replacement subprogram for the tool and tool offset selection. Bit 0 = 0: D or DL number is transferred to the replacement subprogram (default value) 2-44 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Bit 0 = 1: The D or DL number is not transferred to the replacement subprogram if the following conditions are fulfilled: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1 Programming D/DL with T or M function with which the tool change cycle is called, in a part program line. Bit 1 = 0 Execution of the replacement subprogram at end of block (default value) Bit 1 = 1 Execution of the replacement subprogram at block start Bit 2 = 0: Execution of the replacement subprogram according to the settin of bit 1 Bit 2 = 1: Execution of the replacement subprogram at block start and at end of block. 10735 JOG_MODE_MASK EXP, N01 - - Enable JOG in automatic DWORD POWER ON 0x1 7/2 - - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Bit 0: Enables JOG in automatic. JOG is enabled in automatic when all channels in the mode group are in the RESET state and no channel of the DRF mode group has been selected. The mode group changes internally to JOG with the +/- key and the handwheel, and the axis moves. After the JOG motion has ended, a change back to AUTO is also made internally. Bits 1-31: Currently unassigned. 10760 G53_TOOLCORR N12 FBFA - Method of operation of G53, G153 and SUPA BOOLEAN POWER ON - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-45 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Description: With this MD you define whether tool length offset and tool radius offset are also to be suppressed with language commands G53, G153 and SUPA 0: G53,G153 and SUPA cause block-by-block suppression of zero offsets. The active tool length offset and tool radius offset remain active. 1: G53,G153 and SUPA cause block-by-block suppression of zero offsets, active tool length offset and tool radius offset. 10804 EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT EXP, N12 FBFA - M function to activate ASUB DWORD POWER ON - 7/2 - - 96 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 Description: M function number used to activate an interrupt program (ASUB) in ISO2/3 mode. The interrupt program is always started by the 1st high-speed input of the numerical control. The M number defined in the machine data replaces M96 in external language mode. Restrictions: Refer to machine data 10715: $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE Related to: $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP, $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR, $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE For external language mode: $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR For nibbling: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE 2-46 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 10806 EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT EXP, N12 FBFA - M function to deactivate ASUB DWORD POWER ON - - 97 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 Description: M function number used to deactivate an interrupt program (ASUB) in ISO2/3 mode. The M number defined in the machine data replaces M97 in external language mode. Restrictions: refer to machine data 10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP, $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR, $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE For external language mode: $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR For nibbling: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE 10808 EXTERN_INTERRUPT_BITS_M96 EXP, N12 FBFA - Activate interrupt program (ASUB) DWORD POWER ON - 7/2 - - 0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 Description: Setting the various bits can influence the processing of the interrupt routine activated by M96 P... (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-47 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Bit 0 = 0, No interrupt program possible, M96/M97 are normal M functions Bit 0 = 1, Using M96/M97 to activate an interrupt program is allowed Bit 1 = 0, Continue processing part program at the final position of the next block after the interrupt block Bit 1 = 1, Continue processing part program from interrupt position Bit 2 = 0, The interrupt signal immediately interrupts the current block and starts the interrupt routine Bit 2 = 1, The interrupt routine will not be started until the end of the block Bit 3 = 0, Interrupt machining cycle at an interupt signal Bit 3 = 1, Do not start interrupt program until the end of a machining cycle. 10810 EXTERN_MEAS_G31_P_SIGNAL EXP, N12 FBFA - Config. of measuring inputs for G31 P.. BYTE POWER ON - 4 1 0 3 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: This machine data defines the assignment of measurement inputs 1 and 2 to the P numbers programmed with G31 P1 ( - P4). The machine data is bit-coded. Only bits 0 and 1 are evaluated. For example, if bit 0 = 1 in $MN_EXTERN_MEAS_G31_P_SIGNAL[1] the 1st measurement input is activated with G31 P2. If $MN_EXTERN_MEAS_G31_P_SIGNAL[3]=2, the 2nd measurement input is activated with G31 P4. Bit 0: = 0, Do not evaluate measurement input 1 with G31 P1 (- P4) Bit 0: = 1, Activate measurement input 1 with G31 P1 (- P4) Bit 1: = 0, Do not evaluate measurement input 2 with G31 P1 (- P4) Bit 1: = 1, Activate measurement input 2 with G31 P1 (- P4) 10812 EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_ON EXP, N12 FBFA - Double turret with G68 BOOLEAN POWER ON - 7/2 - - FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 2-48 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Description: This machine data is used to determine whether double-slide machining (channel synchronization for 1st and 2nd channel) is to be started using G68 or whether the second tool of a double turret (= two closely-linked tools at a distance defined in the setting data $SC_EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_DIST) is to be activated. FALSE: Channel synchronization for double-slide machining TRUE: Load 2nd tool of a double turret (that is, activate $SC_EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_DISTANCE as additive zero offset and mirroring around Z axis) 10814 EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE EXP, N12 FBFA - Macro call via M function DWORD POWER ON - 10 -1 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: A macro is called with this M number. The name of the subprogram is stated in $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n]. If the M function specified with $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n] is programmed in a part program block, the subprogram defined in EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n] is started. All addresses programmed in the block are written into the corresponding variables. If the M function is programmed again in the subprogram, the replacement by a subprogram call does not take place any more. $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n] is only active in the external language mode G291. The subprograms configured with $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n] must not be active simultaneously in a block (part program line), i.e. maximally one M function replacement can become active in a block. Neither an M98 nor a modal subprogram call may be programmed in the block with the M function replacement. Subprogram return and the part program end arealso not permitted. Alarm 14016 is issued in case of a conflict. Restrictions: see machine data 10715: $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-49 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Related to: $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP, $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR, $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE For external language mode: $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR For nibbling: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE 10815 EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME EXP, N12 FBFA - Name of subroutine for M function macro call STRING POWER ON 10 - 7/2 - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Name of the subprogram started by a call via the M function defined by $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n]. 10816 EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE EXP, N12 FBFA - Macro call via G function DOUBLE POWER ON - 50 -1. - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: G number for calling a macro. The name of the subprogram is stated in $MN_EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n]. If the G function specified with $MN_EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n] is programmed in a part program block, the subprogram defined in EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n] is started. All addresses programmed in the block are written in the corresponding $C_xx variables. 2-50 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data No subprogram call is executed if a subprogram call is already active via an M/G macro or an M replacement. If a standard G function is programmed in this case, this code is executed. Otherwise, alarm 12470 is issued. $MN_EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n] is only active in the external language mode G291. Only a single subprogram call may be included in a block. This means that only a single M/G function replacement may be programmed in a block and no additional subprogram (M98) or cycle call may be included in the block. Furthermore, a subprogram return and a part program end are not permitted in the same block. Alarm 14016 is issued in case of a conflict. 10817 EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME EXP, N12 FBFA - Name of subroutine for G function macro call STRING POWER ON - 50 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Name of the subprogram started by call via the G function defined by $MN_EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n]. 10818 EXTERN_INTERRUPT_NUM_ASUP EXP, N12 FBFA - Interrupt number for ASUP start (M96) BYTE POWER ON - 8 7/2 - 1 1 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 Description: Number of the interrupt input starting an asynchronous subprogram activated in ISO mode. (M96 <program number>) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-51 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 10820 EXTERN_INTERRUPT_NUM_RETRAC EXP, N12 FBFA - Interrupt number for rapid retraction (G10.6) BYTE POWER ON - - 2 1 8 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Number of the interrupt input triggering rapid retraction to the position programmed with G10.6 in ISO mode. 10880 MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM N01, N12 FBFA - Definition of the control system to be adapted DWORD POWER ON - 3 7/2 - 1 1 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Definition of the external CNC system whose part programs are to be executed on the SINUMERIK control in addition to SINUMERIK code (ISO_1): 1: ISO_2: System Fanuc0 milling (from software version 5.1) 2: ISO_3: System Fanuc0 turning (from P5.2) 3: External language via OEM application (from software version 6.2) 10881 MM_EXTERN_GCODE_SYSTEM N01, N12 FBFA - ISO_3 Mode: GCodeSystem DWORD POWER ON 2 7/2 - - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 2-52 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Description: Definition of the GCodeSystem to be actively executed in ISO_3 Mod (turning): Value = 0 : Value = 1 : Value = 2 : ISO_3: Code system B ISO_3: Code system A ISO_3: Code system C 10882 NC_USER_EXTERN_GCODES_TAB - List of user-specific G commands of an external NC STRING language N12 POWER ON FBFA - 60 802d-ng2 - 802d-ng3 - - - 2/2 - - - -1/- - - - -1/- Description: List of G commands of external NC languages which have been reconfigured by the user. The implemented G commands are to be taken from the current Siemens documentation for this programming language. The list is structured as follows: Even address: G command to be changed Subsequent odd address: New G command Only G codes can be reconfigured, e.g.: G20, G71. 10884 EXTERN_FLOATINGPOINT_PROG N12 FBFA - Evaluation of programmed values without decimal point BOOLEAN POWER ON - - 7/2 - TRUE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This MD defines how programmed values without a decimal point are evaluated: 0: Values without a decimal point are interpreted in internal units. For example, X1000 = 1 mm (for 0.001 mm input resolution) X1000.0 = 1000 mm 1: Values without decimal point are interpreted as mm, inch or degrees. For example, X1000 = 1000 mm X1000.0 = 1000 mm Related to: EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-53 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 10886 EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM N12 FBFA - Incremental system in external language mode BOOLEAN POWER ON - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: This machine data is active for external programming languages, that is if MD 18800: MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE = 1. This machine data specifies which incremental system is active: 0: Incremental system IS-B = 0.001 mm/degree = 0.0001 inch 1: Incremental system IS-C = 0.0001 mm/degree = 0.00001 inch Related to: EXTERN_FLOATINGPOINT_PROG 10888 EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO N12 FBFA - Digits for T number in ISO mode BYTE POWER ON 8 7/2 - - 2 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This machine data is only active when $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM = 2. Number of digits of the tool number in the programmed T word. From the programmed T word, the number of leading digits specified in $MN_EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO are interpreted as the tool number. The following digits address the offset memory. 2-54 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 10890 EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE N12 FBFA - Tool change programming for external language DWORD POWER ON - - 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Configuration for programming the tool change in an external programming language: Bit0=0: Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: The tool number and offset number are programmed in the T word. $MN_DIGITS_TOOLNO defines the number of leading digits that the tool number generates. Example: $MN_DIGITS_TOOLNO = 2 T=1234 ; Tool number 12, ; Offset number 34 Bit0=1: Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: Only the tool number is programmed in the T word. Offset number = Tool number. $MN_DIGITS_TOOLNO is irrelevant. Example: T=12 ; Tool number 12 ; Offset number 12 Bit1=0: Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: A leading 0 is added if the number of digits programmed in the T word is the same as that in $MN_EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO. Bit1=1: Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: If the number of digits programmed in the T word is equal to the number of digits defined in $MN_EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO, the programmed number is both the offset number and the tool number Bit2=0: Only with Bit2=1: Only with active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_LANGUAGE =2: ISO T offset selection only D (Siemens cutting edge number) active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_LANGUAGE =2: ISO T offset selection only H ($TC_DPH[t,d]) Bit3=0: Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: Each H number is only allowed once in each TOA, except H=0. If bit3 1 -> 0 is set, no H number may occur more than once in a TO unit. Otherwise an alarm will be issued at the next restart. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-55 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Bit3=1: Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: Each H number is only allowed more than once in each TOA. Bit6=0: Only active if MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =1: Tool length cannot be selected under address H Bit6=1: Only active if MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =1: Tool length selected under address H Bit7=0: Only active if MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =1: Tool length cannot be selected under address D Bit7=1: Only active if MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =1: Tool length selected under address D. Selection under address D or H is possible if bits 6 and 7 have been set. 10900 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1 N09 T1 - Number of positions for indexing axis table 1 DWORD RESET - 60 7/2 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The indexing position table is used to assign the axis positions in the valid unit of measurement (mm, inches or degrees) to the indexing positions [n] on the indexing axis. The number of indexing positions used in table 1 is defined by the MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1. These indexing positions must contain valid values in table 1. Any indexing positions in the table above the number specified in the machine data are ignored. Up to 60 indexing positions (0 to 59) can be entered in the table. Table length = 0 means that the table is not evaluated. If the length is not equal to 0, then the table must be assigned to an axis with the MD: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB. If the indexing axis is defined as a rotary axis (MD: IS_ROT_AX = "1") with modulo 360 (MD: ROT_IS_MODULO = "1"), the machine data defines the last indexing position after which, with a further traversing movement in the positive direction, the indexing positions begin again at 1 . Special cases: Alarm 17090 "Value violates upper limit" if values over 60 are entered in the MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1. 2-56 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Related MD: MD: MD: MD: to: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB (axis is an indexing axis) INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1 (indexing position table 1) IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis) ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis) 10910 INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1 N09 T1 mm/inch, degrees Indexing position table 1 DOUBLE RESET - 60 0. - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The indexing position table is used to assign the axis positions in the valid unit of measurement (mm, inches or degrees) to the indexing positions [n] on the indexing axis. [n] = indexing for the entry of the indexing positions in the indexing position table. Range: 0 y n x 59, where 0 is the 1st indexing position and 59 corresponds to the 60th indexing position. Note. Programming with the absolute indexing position (e.g. CAC) starts with indexing position 1. This corresponds to the indexing position with indexing n = 0 in the indexing position table. The following should be noted when entering the indexing positions: Up to 60 different indexing positions can be stored in the table. The 1st entry in the table corresponds to indexing position 1; the nth entry corresponds to indexing position n. The indexing positions must be entered in the table in ascending order (starting with the negative to the positive traversing range) with no gaps between the entries. Consecutive position values must not be identical. If the indexing axis is defined as a rotary axis (MD: IS_ROT_AX = "1") with modulo 360 (MD: ROT_IS_MODULO = "1"), then the position values are limited to a range of 0 x pos. < 360. The number of indexing positions used in the table is defined by the MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1. Entering the value 1 in the axial machine data: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB assigns indexing position table 1 to the current axis. Special cases: Alarm 17020 "illegal array index" if over 60 positions are entered in the table. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-57 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Related MD: MD: MD: MD: to: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB (axis is an indexing axis) INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1 (no. of indexing positions used in table 1) IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis) ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis) 10920 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2 N09 T1 - Number of positions for indexing axis table 2 DWORD RESET - - 0 0 60 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: The indexing position table is used to assign the axis positions in the valid unit of measurement (mm, inches or degrees) to the indexing positions [n] on the indexing axis. The number of indexing positions used in table 2 is defined by the MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2. These indexing positions in table 2 must contain valid values. Any indexing positions in the table above the number specified in the machine data are ignored. Up to 60 indexing positions (0 to 59) can be entered in the table. Table length = 0 means that the table is not evaluated. If the length is not equal to 0, the table must be assigned to an axis with the MD: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB. If the indexing axis is defined as a rotary axis (MD: IS_ROT_AX = "1") with modulo 360 (MD: ROT_IS_MODULO = "1"), the machine data defines the last indexing position after which, with a further traversing movement in the positive direction, the indexing positions begin again at 1. Not relevant for tool magazines (revolvers, chain magazines) Special cases: Alarm 17090 "Value violates upper limit" if a value over 60 is entered in the MD:INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2. Related MD: MD: MD: MD: 2-58 to: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB (axis is an indexing axis) INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2 (indexing position table 2) IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis) ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 10930 INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2 N09 T1 mm/inch, degrees Indexing position table 2 DOUBLE RESET - 60 0. - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The indexing position table is used to assign the axis positions in the valid unit of measurement (mm, inches or degrees) to the indexing positions [n] on the indexing axis. [n] = indexing for the entry of the indexing positions in the indexing position table. Range: 0 y n x 59, where 0 is the 1st indexing position and 59 corresponds to the 60th indexing position. Note: Programming with the absolute indexing position (e.g. CAC) starts with indexing position 1. This corresponds to the indexing position with indexing n = 0 in the table. The following should be noted when entering the indexing positions: Up to 60 different indexing positions can be stored in the table. The 1st entry in the table corresponds to indexing position 1; the nth entry corresponds to indexing position n. The indexing positions should be entered in the table in ascending order (starting with the negative to the positive traversing range) with no gaps between the entries. Consecutive position values must not be identical. If the indexing axis is defined as a rotary axis (MD: IS_ROT_AX = "1") with modulo 360 (MD: ROT_IS_MODULO = "1"), then the position values are limited to a range of 0 x pos. < 360. The number of indexing positions used in the table is defined by the MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2. Entering the value 1 in the axial machine data: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB assigns indexing position table 1 to the current axis. Special cases: Alarm 17020 "illegal array index" if over 60 positions are entered in the table. Related MD: MD: MD: MD: to: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB (axis is an indexing axis) INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2 (no. of indexing positions used in table 2) IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis) ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-59 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 11100 AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN N01, N07, N02 H2 - Number of auxiliary functions distributed among the DWORD AUXFU groups POWER ON - - 1 1 255 7/2 802d-cu3 - 1 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 1 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 1 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 1 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 1 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 1 - - 2/2 - Description: The number of the auxiliary functions that have been distributed to the groups must be entered in the MD. This number only includes the customer-specific auxiliary functions, not the predefined auxiliary functions. Anwendungsbeispiel: related to: MD 22010: AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [n] (auxiliary function type) 11160 ACCESS_EXEC_CST N01 - - Execution right for /_N_CST_DIR BYTE POWER ON - 7/2 - - 7 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Execution right assigned to the program stored in directory /_N_CST_DIR : Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service Value 3: End user password Value 4: Keyswitch position 3 Value 5: Keyswitch position 2 Value 6: Keyswitch position 1 Value 7: Keyswitch position 0 Machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the corresponding password also active. 2-60 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 11161 ACCESS_EXEC_CMA N01 - - Execution right for /_N_CMA_DIR BYTE POWER ON - - 7 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Execution right assigned to the programs stored in directory /_N_CMA_DIR : Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service Value 3: End user password Value 4: Keyswitch position 3 Value 5: Keyswitch position 2 Value 6: Keyswitch position 1 Value 7: Keyswitch position 0 Machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the corresponding password also active. 11162 ACCESS_EXEC_CUS N01 - - Execution right for /_N_CUS_DIR BYTE POWER ON - 7/3 - - 7 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: Execution right assigned to the programs stored in directory /_N_CUS_DIR : Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service Value 3: End user password Value 4: Keyswitch position 3 Value 5: Keyswitch position 2 Value 6: Keyswitch position 1 Value 7: Keyswitch position 0 Machine data can only be written with values 0, 1 and 2, and with the corresponding password also active. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-61 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 11165 ACCESS_WRITE_CST N01 - - Write protection for directory /_N_CST_DIR DWORD POWER ON - - -1 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Set write protection for cycle directory /_N_CST_DIR: Assigned to the programs: Value -1: Keep the value currently set Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service Value 3: End user password Value 4: Keyswitch position 3 Value 5: Keyswitch position 2 Value 6: Keyswitch position 1 Value 7: Keyswitch position 0 The machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the corresponding password also active. 11166 ACCESS_WRITE_CMA N01 - - Write protection for directory /_N_CMA_DIR DWORD POWER ON - - -1 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Set write protection for cycle directory /_N_CMA_DIR: Assigned to the programs: Value -1: Keep the value currently set Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service Value 3: End user password Value 4: Keyswitch position 3 Value 5: Keyswitch position 2 Value 6: Keyswitch position 1 Value 7: Keyswitch position 0 The machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the corresponding password also active. 2-62 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 11167 ACCESS_WRITE_CUS N01 - - Write protection for directory /_N_CUS_DIR DWORD POWER ON - - -1 - - 7/3 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 - Description: Set write protection for cycle directory /_N_CUS_DIR: Assigned to the programs: Value -1: Keep the value currently set Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service Value 3: End user password Value 4: Keyswitch position 3 Value 5: Keyswitch position 2 Value 6: Keyswitch position 1 Value 7: Keyswitch position 0 The machine data can only be written with values 0, 1 and 2, and with the corresponding password also active. 11170 ACCESS_WRITE_SACCESS N01 - - Write protection for _N_SACCESS_DEF BYTE POWER ON - - 7 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Set write protection for definition file /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_SACCESS_DEF: Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service Value 3: End user password Value 4: Keyswitch position 3 Value 5: Keyswitch position 2 Value 6: Keyswitch position 1 Value 7: Keyswitch position 0 The machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the corresponding password also active. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-63 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 11171 ACCESS_WRITE_MACCESS N01 - - Write protection for _N_MACCESS_DEF BYTE POWER ON - - 7 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Set write protection for definition file /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_SACCESS_DEF: Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service Value 3: End user password Value 4: Keyswitch position 3 Value 5: Keyswitch position 2 Value 6: Keyswitch position 1 Value 7: Keyswitch position 0 The machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the corresponding password also active. 11172 ACCESS_WRITE_UACCESS N01 - - Write protection for _N_UACCESS_DEF BYTE POWER ON - - 7/3 - 7 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: Set write protection for definition file /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_UACCESS_DEF: Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service Value 3: End user password Value 4: Keyswitch position 3 Value 5: Keyswitch position 2 Value 6: Keyswitch position 1 Value 7: Keyswitch position 0 The machine data can only be written with values 0, 1 and 2, and with the corresponding password also active. 2-64 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 11210 UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY N01, N05 IAD - MD backup of changed MD only BYTE SOFORT - - 0xFF - - 7/3 802d-cu3 - 0x0F - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 0x0F - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 0x0F - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 0x0F - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 0x0F - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 0x0F - - 2/2 Description: Selection of differential MD upload: Bit0(LSB)Effectiveness of the differential upload for TEA files (machine data files) 0: All data are output 1: only the values changed as compared to the compiled MD are output Bit1 Effectiveness of the differential upload for INI files 0: All data are output 1: only the values changed as compared to the compiled MD are output Bit2 change of a field element 0: complete arrays are output 1: only changed field elements of an array are output Bit3 R parameter (for INI files only) 0: All R parameters are output 1: only R parameters unequal to '0' are output Bit4 frames (for INI files only) 0: All frames are output 1: only frames are output which are not zero frames. Bit5 tool data (cutting edge parameter) (for INI files only) 0: All tool data are output 1: only tool data unequal to '0' are output. 11240 PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER N01, N05 K4,FBU - SDB1000 number DWORD POWER ON - 4 -1 -1 7 2/2 802d-cu3 - 0,-1,0 - - -/- 802d-ng2 - 0,-1,0 - - -/- 802d-ng3 - 0,-1,0 - - -/- 802d-tm1 - 0,-1,0 - - -/- 802d-tm2 - 0,-1,0 - - -/- 802d-tm3 - 0,-1,0 - - -/- Description: BUS_SDB_NUMBER Digital inputs The assignment 9, 8 and 7 are [0] = 0 and outputs via I/O modules (PP modules) is provided via DIL switches. Max. 3 modules with the addresses possible. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-65 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER [2] = X Number of the system module you are using for configuring the hardware I/Os. SINUMERIK 802D sl offers the following options to choose from: 0: 1: 2: 3: 2 3 4 5 SINAMICS SINAMICS SINAMICS SINAMICS drives drives drives drives with with with with SLM SLM SLM SLM 4: 3 SINAMICS drives with ALM 5: 4 SINAMICS drives with ALM 6: 5 SINAMICS drives with ALM Note: With the SDB reloaded from the toolbox, PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER[2] = 0 must be set. This activates the module. The machine data PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER[1] and PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER[3] are reserved internally for Siemens. 11241 PROFIBUS_SDB_SELECT N01, N05 - - SDB source selection DWORD POWER ON 3 2/2 - - 0 0 Description: With MD11240 > 0, SDBs are loaded directly from the directory: MD11241=0: /siemens/sinumerik/sdb/... MD11241=1: /addon/sinumerik/sdb/... MD11241=2: /oem/sinumerik/sdb/... MD11241=3: /user/sinumerik/sdb/... 11250 PROFIBUS_SHUTDOWN_TYPE EXP, N01 G3,FBU - Profibus shutdown handling BYTE POWER ON 2 7/2 - - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Handling of PROFIBUS when shutting down NCK (NCK reset) Value 0: The bus is shut down directly from cyclic operation, without 'prewarning' Value 1: When shutting down NCK, the PROFIBUS is changed to the CLEAR state for at least 20 cycles. Then, it is shut down. If this is not possible on the hardware side, the procedure described for value 2 is used instead. 2-66 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Value 2: When shutting down NCK, the PROFIBUS is changed to a state where all drives are sent a zero word as control word1 and control word2 (pseudoclear) for at least 20 cycles. The bus itself remains in the Operate status. 11270 DEFAULT_VALUES_MEM_MASK N01 PGA - Activation of default values for NC language elementsDWORD POWER ON - 7/2 - 0 - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - 1 - - -/- 802d-ng3 - 1 - - -/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 Description: Activation of the function 'Memory for initialization values of NC language elements' Bit Hex. Meaning value ------------------------------0: (LSB) 0x1 default values GUD Meaning of the individual bits: Bit 0 = 0: The default values stated for the definition are not stored Bit 0 = 1: The default values stated for the definition are stored persistently. The memory reserved via MD $MN_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM is used for this purpose. The memory reserved via $MN_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM should be increased by the size required for default values. If this size cannot be determined, the memory should be doubled and adaptations should be made later if required. The stored default values can be restored, provided that the corresponding programming (REDEF) has been performed. 11310 HANDWH_REVERSE N09 H1 - Threshold for change in handwheel direction BYTE POWER ON - - 7/2 - 2 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-67 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Description: 0:No immediate movement in the opposite direction > 0:Immediate movement in the opposite direction if the handwheel is turned in the opposite direction by at least the number of pulses indicated 11320 HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH N09 H1 - Handwheel pulses per detent position [handwheel index]: DOUBLE POWER ON - 6 1. - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This adapts the connected handwheels to the control system. The number of pulses generated by the handwheel for each handwheel detent position is entered. The handwheel pulse weighting may be defined for each connected handwheel (1 to 2) separately. When adapted to the control, each handwheel detent position has the same effect as one press of the traverse key in incremental jogging mode. If a negative value is entered, the handwheel is active in the reverse direction. related to: MD: JOG_INCR_WEIGHT (weighting of an increment of a machine axis for INC/manual). 11346 HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE N01 FBMA - Handwheel path or velocity values BYTE POWER ON 7/2 - - 1 0 3 802d-cu3 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 0 - - 2/2 Description: 0: The settings from the handwheel are velocity settings. When the handwheel is stationary, braking is realized along the shortest path. 1: The settings from the handwheel are distance settings. No pulses are lost. Limiting the velocity to the maximum permissible value can cause the axes to overtravel. 2: Effect as for value=0, however, with a longer braking travel when the handwheel is stationary. 3: Effect as for value=1, however, with a longer braking travel when the 2-68 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data handwheel is stationary. related to: 11717 D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME EXP, N12, N07 - - Subroutine name for D function replacement STRING POWER ON - - - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Cycle name for replacement routine of the T function. If a D function is programmed in a part program block, then, depending on machine data $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME, $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE and $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR, the subprogram defined in D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is called. The programmed D number can be polled in the cycle via system variable $C_D / $C_D_PROG. $MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is only active in Siemens mode (G290). No more than one M/T/D function replacement can be active per part program line. A modal subprogram call must not be programmed in the block with the D function replacement. Furthermore, neither subprogram return nor part program end are allowed. In the event of a conflict alarm 14016 is output. 13060 DRIVE_TELEGRAM_TYPE - Default message frame type for drives connected to DWORD PROFIBUS DP N04, N10 POWER ON G2 - 31 102 7/2 802d-cu3 - 116,102 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 116,102 - - 2/2 - - 802d-ng3 - 116,102 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 116,102 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 116,102 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 116,102 - - 2/2 Description: The message frame type: 102: must be specified for each drive. Standard message frame for SINAMICS actual-value assignment (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-69 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 103: SINAMICS- Spindle with second direct measuring system Index [n] of the machine data has the following code: [drive index]: n=0: Drive number 1 n=1: Drive number 2, etc. 13070 DRIVE_FUNCTION_MASK N04, N10 G2 - DP functions used DWORD POWER ON - 7/2 - 31 0 - 802d-cu3 - 2,0 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 2,0 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 2,0 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 2,0 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 2,0 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 2,0 - - 2/2 Description: Bit-coded mask for skipping the scope of available functions for PROFIBUS axes expected from NCK. Significance of set bits: Bit 0:Deactivation of axial drive alarm display Bit 1:Deactivation of 611U description file intermediate storage in the NCK Bit 2:Deactivation of axial encoder driver parameter accesses Bit 3:Deactivation of axial output driver parameter accesses Bit 4:reserved (previously activation of DSC bits) Bit 5:Deactivation of the 611U-specific drive parking (STW2.7/STA2.7) Bit 6:Deactivation of the 611U-specific travel to fixed stop (STW2.8/STA2.8) Bit 7:Deactivation of the 611U-specific motor switching int. (STW2.9 to 2.11) Bit 8:Deactivation of the 611U-specific ramp block (STW1.11+13) Bit 9:Deactivation of the 611U-specific function generator bits (STW1.8/STA1.13) Bit 10:Deactivation of the control of the holding brake (STW1.12 / STA2.5) Bit 11:Deactivation of the effect of OFF2/OFF3 on "driveReady" (DB31, ... DBX93.5) Bit 14:Selection of non-cyclical communication 0 = DPT 1 = DPV1 Bit 15: Deactivation of the consistency check of the PROFIBUS telegram configuration The configuration of bits 4-8 which are new for SW 6.3 and higher allows an adaptation of certain PROFIdrive profiles of non-standardized PROFIBUS control or status bits of SIMODRIVE 611 universal. Bits 4 to 8 may have a different significance in the default setting of external drives. 2-70 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 13080 DRIVE_TYPE_DP EXP G2 - Drive type Profibus BYTE POWER ON - 31 0 0 4 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: MD is relevant for drives at the PROFIBUS: Drive type: 0: No drive or drive type unknown (default), software-internally treated as: 1:FDD drive (SRM: Synchronous rotary drive) 2:MSD drive (ARM: Asynchronous rotary drive) 3:Linear drive 4:Analog drive (no automatic entry) Note: In general, the drive type is entered automatically with Siemens drives as soon as the drives start operating. With non-Siemens drives (at least with linear drives) the value must be entered manually if automatic drive recognition is not possible. 13120 CONTROL_UNIT_LOGIC_ADDRESS N04, N10 - - Logical address of SINAMICS CU DWORD POWER ON - 7 0 0 8191 7/2 802d-cu3 - 6500,0 - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - 6500,0 - - 1/1 - 802d-ng3 - 6500,0 802d-tm1 - 6500,0 802d-tm2 - 6500,0 802d-tm3 - 6500,0 - 1/1 - 1/1 - - 1/1 - - 1/1 Description: Logical I/O address of a SINAMICS-CU (Control Unit) on the PROFIBUS-DP. The cyclic DP communication with SINAMICS-CU is activated by taking over the associated slot address from the STEP7 project. The onboard I/Os cannot be accessed until after configuration. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-71 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 13150 SINAMICS_ALARM_MASK N04, N05 - - Activate fault and warning buffer output for Sinamics DWORD SOFORT - - 0x0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 - Description: Relevant to SINAMICS diagnostics: Mask for displaying the SINAMICS DOS fault and warning buffers Bit set:Alarms in this DO group are output Bit not set:Alarms in this DO group are not output BitHex. Meaning value ============================================================================== ====== 0: 0x1 Output faults of the Control Units 1: 0x2 Reserved 2: 0x4 Output faults of the Drive Controls 3: 0x8 Output faults of the Line Modules 4: 0x10 Output faults of the Terminal Boards 5: 0x20 Output faults of the Terminal Modules 8: 0x100 Output warnings of the Control Units 9: 0x200 Output warnings of the Communication Objects 10:0x400 Output warnings of the Drive Controls 11:0x800 Output warnings of the Line Modules 12:0x1000 Ouptut warnings of the Terminal Boards 13:0x2000 Output warnings of the Terminal Modules 13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE N10, N09 M5 - Switching characteristics of probe BOOLEAN POWER ON - 2 FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: 0: non-deflected status 0 Vdeflected status24 V 1: non-deflected status24 Vdeflected status 0 V 2-72 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 13220 MEAS_PROBE_DELAY_TIME N10, N09 FBA/IAD s Delay time between probe deflection and recognition DOUBLE POWER ON - 2 0.0 0 0.1 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 - Description: For probes with e.g. radio transmission, the probe deflection can be detected in the NC only with delay. With this MD, the transmission link delay between the probe deflection and its detection is set in the control. The measured value is corrected internally by the control by the distance that corresponds to the traversing motion during this time before measuring (modeling). It is practicable to set values only up to a maximum of 15 position controller cycles. Anyhow, the modeling could not work with the expected accuracy with values greater than that. In this case, the input value is therefore limited internally by the software to 15 position controller cycles (without any further feedback). 14510 USER_DATA_INT N03 A2,P3 - User data (INT) DWORD POWER ON 32767 7/2 - 256 0 -32768 802d-cu3 32 - - - 7/3 802d-ng2 32 - - - 7/3 802d-ng3 32 - - - 7/3 802d-tm1 32 - - - 7/3 802d-tm2 32 - - - 7/3 802d-tm3 32 - - - 7/3 Description: User machine data, evaluation in PLC (displayed as whole number, decimal) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-73 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 14512 USER_DATA_HEX N03 A2,P3 - User data (HEX) DWORD POWER ON - 256 0 0 0x0FF 7/2 802d-cu3 32 - - - 7/3 802d-ng2 32 - - - 7/3 802d-ng3 32 - - - 7/3 802d-tm1 32 - - - 7/3 802d-tm2 32 - - - 7/3 802d-tm3 32 - - - 7/3 Description: User machine data, evaluation in PLC (display in HEX format) 1) 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT N03 A2,P3 - User data (FLOAT) DOUBLE POWER ON - 32 0.0 -3.40e38 3.40e38 7/2 802d-cu3 8 - - - 7/3 802d-ng2 8 - - - 7/3 802d-ng3 8 - - - 7/3 802d-tm1 8 - - - 7/3 802d-tm2 8 - - - 7/3 802d-tm3 8 - - - 7/3 Description: User machine data, evaluation in PLC (floating point format, restricted to 32Bit IEEE format in PLC) 14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM N03 A2,P3 - User data (HEX) BYTE POWER ON - 0/0 - 64 0 - 802d-cu3 64 - - - 7/3 802d-ng2 64 - - - 7/3 802d-ng3 64 - - - 7/3 802d-tm1 64 - - - 7/3 802d-tm2 64 - - - 7/3 802d-tm3 64 - - - 7/3 Description: User data is stored in the NCK-PLC interface and can be evaluated by the PLC basic system (currently for software PLC 2xx). 2-74 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 15700 LANG_SUB_NAME N01 - - Name for substitution subroutine STRING POWER ON - - - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Name of the user program called on the basis of a substitution configured by $MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK. The user program is called with the path configured by $MN_LANG_SUB_PATH. 15702 LANG_SUB_PATH N01 - - Call path for substitution subroutine BYTE POWER ON 2 7/2 - - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Path with which the user program set by $MN_LANG_SUB_NAME is called on the basis of a substitution configured by $MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK: 0: /_N_CMA_DIR (default) 1: /_N_CUS_DIR 2: /_N_CST_DIR 17400 OEM_GLOBAL_INFO A01, A11 - - OEM version information STRING POWER ON - 5 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: A version information freely available to the user (is indicated in the version screen) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-75 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 17530 TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER EXP, N01 FBW - Mark tool data change for HMI DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 0xF 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: HMI display support. This data enables individual data to be explicitly taken into account or not taken into account in the OPI variables (block C/S) toolCounter, toolCounterC, toolCounterM. Bit no. Bit value HEX Meaning -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 0 Changes to the value of the tool status ($TC_TP8) are not taken into account in toolCounterC 1 'H1' Changes to the value of the tool status ($TC_TP8) are taken into account in toolCounterC 1 0 Changes to the remaining number of tools ($TC_MOP4) are not taken into account in toolCounterC 1 'H2' Changes to the remaining number of tools ($TC_MOP4) are taken into account in toolCounterC 2 0 Changes to the value of the tool data are not taken into account in the tool data update service 1 'H4' Changes to the value of the tool data are taken into account in the tool data update service 3 0 Changes to the value of the magazine data are not taken into account in the tool data update service 1 'H8' Changes to the value of the magazine data are taken into account in the tool data update service. 18030 HW_SERIAL_NUMBER N05 - - Hardware series number STRING POWER ON - 7/2 READ - 1 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/- 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/- 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/- 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/- 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/- 2-76 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Description: During power on of the control, a unique hardware serial number is stored in this MD: For Powerline series modules this is the serial number of the NCU module For Solutionline series modules this is the serial number of the CF card, or the unique number of the MCI module in the case of PC-based systems This data cannot be written. 18040 VERSION_INFO N05 IAD - Version and possibly data of the PCMCIA card, not FM-NC STRING POWER ON READ Description: Version identifiers of the system software The identifiers of the PCMCIA card (assigned by the configuration management) and the 'system_date_time' from the NCK are stored in this MD during control power on. A unique assignment can always be made with this data from the MD block (startup file or INITIAL_INI) to a software release. 18070 INFO_FREE_MEM_DPR EXP, N01, N02, S7 N05 - Display data of free memory in DUAL PORT RAM DWORD POWER ON - - 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- READ Description: Output of the available memory in the Dual Port RAM (Bytes). The data cannot be written. 18074 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ N02, N09 /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" - Max. size of the tool management diagnostic ring buffers DWORD POWER ON 2 500 7/2 - 25 4 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-77 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Description: The number of entries in the tool management diagnostic ring buffers. Index 0 = IPO trace buffer size. Index 1 = Prep trace buffer size. There are separate IPO trace buffers in each channel, and a Prep trace buffer in channel 1 only. The buffers are allocated only if bit 0 (0x0001) is ON at warm start, in both MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and per-channel MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK. Trace data is written to the buffers when bit 13 (0x2000) is ON in per-channel MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK. 18075 MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS N02, N09 /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" - Max. number of tool holders per TOA DWORD POWER ON - SLMDMAXMAGL 7/2 OCATIONSWITH DISTANCE - 32 1 802d-cu3 - 6 - 6 -1/- 802d-ng2 - 6 - 6 -1/- 802d-ng3 - 6 - 6 -1/- 802d-tm1 - 4 - 4 -1/- 802d-tm2 - 6 - 6 -1/- 802d-tm3 - 6 - 6 -1/- Description: Max. number of definable tool holders per TO range. The address extension e of commands Te=t, Me=6 (*) is the number of the tool holder. t=T number/tool name - depending on the function activated in the NCK. (*) if: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1 and $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE=6 applies Normally the tool holder of milling machines is a spindle. Also see $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND. For turning machines the tool holder normally is not a spindle axis. Also see $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. In this case it should reasonably apply that $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS is larger or equal to $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND/$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. If bit 0 = 1 in $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK is set (=magazine management (TOOLMAN)) it will apply for reasonable values that $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS is smaller or equal to $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE. A maximum of $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS intermediate memory locations of the type 2-78 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data spindle ($TC_MPP1[9998,x]=2) can then be defined. Example: TOOLMAN inactive $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND shall be =3, $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS shall be =3. Then T1=t, T2=t, T3=t, T=t can be programmed. Example: TOOLMAN active, milling machine with Me=6 as tool change command $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS shall be = 14, $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE=20, 10 channels shall be active, all channels have TOOLMAN active and have the same tool and magazine data (=one TO range for all channels). $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND=1,.....10 for the channels. Then up to 14 locations of the kind 'tool holder'/'spindle' can be defined in the intermediate magazine memory. Additional 6 grippers or others can be defined. These 20 locations max. can be linked to magazines. In the channels T1=t, .... T14=t and Tt, or M1=6,....M14=6 and M6 can be programmed. 18076 MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE N02, N09 /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" - Max. number of magazine locations per TOA with remote connection DWORD POWER ON - - 32 1 SLMDMAXMAGL 7/2 OCATIONSWITH DISTANCE 802d-cu3 - 1 - 1 -1/- 802d-ng2 - 1 - 1 -1/- 802d-ng3 - 1 - 1 -1/- 802d-tm1 - 1 - 1 -1/- 802d-tm2 - 1 - 1 -1/- 802d-tm3 - 1 - 1 -1/- - Description: This machine data is reasonable, if the magazine management function, TOOLMAN, is active - See $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK; for each bit 0 = 1. Max. number of magazine locations (spindles, load locations,...) per TOA, that can have a remote connection to a magazine, defined by $TC_MDPx[n,m]. Example: TOOLMAN shall be active: $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE shall be = 5 and $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC = 2. Two TO units shall be defined with three tool holders/spindles and two load locations each. Furthermore, two grippers each shall be defined in each TO unit. This means that a total of 14 locations shall be defined in the intermediate memory magazine/load magazine for the distances and assignments. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-79 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 4 magazines shall be defined for TO unit 1, 6 magazines for TO unit 2. With the value set to $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE = 5 each tool holder and each load location of the two TO units with up to two magazines ($MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC = 2) per remote relationship can be connected; (see $TC_MDP1 and $TC_MDP2) and for each tool holder max. two more grippers ($MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC = 2) can be assigned; (see $TC_MLSR). One tool holder / one spindle location can subsequently have two tables - one distance table for magazines and one assignment table for grippers and similar locations. 18077 MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC N02, N09 /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" - Max. no. of magazines in the distance table of a magazine loc. DWORD POWER ON - SLMDMAXLINKE 7/2 DMAGAZINES - SLMDMAXLINKEDM 0 AGAZINES 802d-cu3 - 0 - 0 -1/- 802d-ng2 - 0 - 0 -1/- 802d-ng3 - 0 - 0 -1/- 802d-tm1 - 0 - 0 -1/- 802d-tm2 - 0 - 0 -1/- 802d-tm3 - 0 - 0 -1/- Description: This machine data will only be active, if the magazine management, TOOLMAN function is active. See $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK. Two sizes are defined with this magazine data: 1.) Max. number of magazines in the distance table of a magazine location (spindle, load location, ...) 2.) Max. number of locations (gripper, ...) in the connection table of a spindle/tool holder location. Example: $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC shall be = 3. Two TO units shall be defined with two tool holder/spindles each and one load location each. Furthermore four grippers shall be defined in each TO unit. 4 magazines shall be defined for TO unit 1; 6 magazines shall be defined for TO unit 2. Then, each tool holder can define max. three distances for the magazines (see $TC_MDP2) and additionally a max. of three relationships to the grippers ($TC_MLSR). 2-80 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 18078 MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES N02, N09 /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" - The maximum number of hierarchies for magazine location types DWORD POWER ON - 32 7/2 - 8 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The machine data only has effect if the function 'tool magazine management', TMMG, is activated - see $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK. The maximum number of hierarchies for magazine location types. In variable $TC_MPTH[n,m], the allowed range of n is from 0 to ($MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES - 1). (The maximum of index m is given by $MN_MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES.) Value = 0 means that the function 'magazine location type hierchies' is not available. 18079 MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES N02, N09 /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" - The max. number of entries in a mag. location type hierarchy. DWORD POWER ON - - 8 1 32 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: The machine data only has effect if the function 'tool magazine management', TMMG, is activated - see $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK - and if $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES is greater than zero. The maximum number of entries in a magazine location type hierarchy. In variable $TC_MPTH[n,m], the allowed range of m is from 0 to ($MN_MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES - 1). (The maximum of index n is given by $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES.) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-81 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK N02, N09 FBW - Step-by-step memory reservation for tool management (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - - 0x0 0 0xFFFF 7/1 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Step-by-step memory reservation for the tool management (TOOLMAN) Bit-coded activation data. That is the memory for the TOOLMAN can be activated in various versions. The data is evaluated only during startup of the software. The TOOLMAN data are battery-backed. The TOOLMAN-specific memory reservation that is defined in detail by the machine data MD 18086: $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION MD 18084: $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE MD 18096: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM MD 18094: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM MD 18098: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM MD 18092: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM MD 18090: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM is made as a function of this data. (Further TOOLMAN-specific memory is determined by other machine data, see below.) Value = 0 ->None of the above memory is reserved: That is TOOLMAN is not available, only the basic functionality can be programmed. Bit no.HexaMeaning when bit set value -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 (LSB)0x1Tool management data (TMMG) are made available; the memory-reserving MDs must be set correspondingly ($MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION, $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE). The machine data $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL, $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA, which make the memory available for the basic functionality with and without TOOLMAN, must be set correspondingly. The TOOLMAN-specific memory is added to the memory determined by $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL. 1 0x2 Monitoring data (TMMO) are made available; the memory-reserving MDs must be set correspondingly ($MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION, $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE). The memory for the monitoring data is added to the cutting edges (-> $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA ). 2 0x4 OEM, CC data (individually determined by $MN_MM_NUM_CC_...) are made available, the memory-reserving MDs must be set correspondingly. 2-82 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 3 0x8 Memory reserved for consider adjacent location 4 0x10 Memory and function release for the PI service _N_TSEARC = 'Complex search for tools in magazines'. Depending on the function characteristic, the function requires memory of the order of 10KB. 5 0x20 Reserve memory and function release for wear monitoring 6 0x40 The classification of the magazine in wear groups is released 7 0x80 Reserve memory for the adapter of the magazine locations according to the information in MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER 8 0x100 Reserve memory for sum offsets and/or setup offsets according to the information in MM_NUM_SUMCORR, MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR 9 0x200 Value 1 = Tools in a revolver are handled in OPI variable blocks so that they are not 'shown' on toolholder locations, but always in the revolver location. That means that, in particular, tools in a revolver no longer leave their revolver locations when there is a tool change (as far as the display is concerned). Value 0 = Default behavior; Tools in a revolver are 'displayed' on the OPI according to their actual location (as far as the data is concerned). Example 1: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = data 1 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 2 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 3 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 4 9 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 17 -> Memory is made available for tool management (TMMG). -> Memory is made available for monitoring data (TMMO). -> Memory is made available for TMMG and TMMO. -> Memory available for OEM/CC data -> Memory available for TMMG and consider adjacent location -> Memory is made available for TMMG data and the PI service _N_TSEARC can be used (decimal 17 = 0x11 = bits 0 and 4) Example 2: The complete TOA area has 20 tools and 60 cutting edges. All other abovementioned memory-reserving MDs =0. The TOOLMAN is not active. Bit 0 (LSB) is now assigned. The battery-backed memory is deleted after a renewed start of the software because now additional memory has been reserved for the TOOLMAN. Additional memory is reserved for each of the 20 tools. References: /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-83 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE N02, N09 - Number of magazines the NCK can manage (SRAM) DWORD FBW POWER ON - - 3 0 32 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Number of magazines which the NCK can manage. Buffered user memory is used. The MDs for TOOLMAN MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and the optional TOOLMAN $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK must be set. Irrelevant: MD is irrelevant if TOOLMAN is not in use. Special cases: Only tool management version 2: Value = 0 -> TOOLMAN version 2 cannot be activated because no memory area has been set up for the data. The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered! Related to: MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (Mask for reserving memory for TOOLMAN) MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (Activation of different versions of tool management) $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK References: /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" 18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION N02, N09 FBW - Number of magazine locations the NCK can manage DWORD (SRAM) POWER ON - 7/2 - 30 0 600 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- 2-84 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Description: Number of magazine locations which the NCK can manage. Buffered user memory is used. The MDs for TOOLMAN MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and the optional TOOLMAN $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK must be set. Irrelevant: MD is irrelevant if TOOLMAN is not in use. Special cases: Only tool management version 2: Value = 0 -> tool management version 2 cannot be activated because no memory area has been set up for the data. The battey-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered! Related to: MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (Mask for reserving memory for TOOLMAN) MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (Activation of different versions of tool management) $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK References: /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" 18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM - Number of magazine data generated and evaluated DWORD by the CC (SRAM) N02, N09 POWER ON FBW - 2/2 - 0 0 10 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Only if MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 (0x1) and bit 2=1 (0x4), is set for TMMG (and option is set): Number of magazine data (format IN_Int.) which are created and can be evaluated by compile cycles. See also: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-85 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Buffered user memory is used. Warning: The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered! Related to: MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (Mask for reserving memory for TOOLMAN) MD 18084: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE (Number of magazines managed by the NC) References: /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" 18091 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM N02, N09 - - Type of OEM magazine data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - 10 3 1 6 2/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 (0x1) and bit2=1 (0x4), is set for TMMG (and option is set): Type of magazine-specific user data configured by MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM. Each parameter can be assigned its own type. Permissible types are: Type Value of machine data (See types of the NC language) ---------------------------------------------------------------BOOL 1 CHAR 2 INT 3 REAL 4 STRING 5 (identifier may be up to 31 characters long) AXIS 6 FRAME not defined See also: MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM, MM_NUM_MAGAZINE Buffered user memory is used. 2-86 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 18092 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM N02, N09 FBW - Number of OEM magazine location data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 10 2/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Only if MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 (0x1) and bit 2=1 (0x4), is set for TMMG (and option is set): Number of magazine location data (format IN_int.) which are created for the memory area and can be evaluated by compile cycles. Buffered user memory is used. Irrelevant: MD is irrelevant if TOOLMAN is not activated Warning: The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered! Related to: MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (Mask for reserving memory for TOOLMAN) MD 18086: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION References: /FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management" 18093 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM N02, N09 - - Type of OEM magazine location data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - 10 3 1 6 2/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 (0x1) and bit 2=1 (0x4), is set for TMMG (and option is set): (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-87 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Individual types can be assigned to the parameters in this way. The array index n can accept values from 0 to the value of MD 18090: MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM. The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 represent the NC language types 1 BOOL, 2 CHAR, 3 INT, 4 REAL and 6 AXIS The value 5, type STRING, is here explicitly not possible. The value 5 is treated like 2. The type FRAME cannot be defined here. Example: MD 18090: MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM=1 MD 18091: MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM=2 "A" can then be programmed for the parameter $TC_MPPC1. Battery-backed working memory is used. A value change can - but need not lead to reconfiguration of the battery-backed memory. 18095 MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM N02, N09 - - Type of OEM tool data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - 10 4 1 6 2/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 2=1 (0x4), is set: User or OEM data in the tool management. Individual types can be assigned to the parameters in this way. The array index n can accept values from 0 to the value of MD 18094: MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM. The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 represent the NC language types 1 BOOL, 2 CHAR, 3 INT, 4 REAL, 5 STRING and 6 AXIS. The type FRAME cannot be defined here. The type STRING can be up to 31 characters long. Example: MD 18094: MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM=1 MD 18095: MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM=5 "UserCuttingEdge" can then be programmed for parameter $TC_TPC1. Battery-backed working memory is used. A value change can - need not - lead to reconfiguration of the battery-backed memory. 2-88 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 18097 MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM N02, N09 - - Type of OEM data per cutting edge (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - 10 4 1 6 2/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 2=1 (0x4), is set: User or OEM data in the tools. Type of the cutting-edge-specific user data configured via MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM. Only the default setting may be used. Individual types can be assigned to the parameters in this way. The array index n can accept values from 0 to the value of MD 18096: MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM. The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 represent the NC language types 1 BOOL, 2 CHAR, 3 INT, 4 REAL and 6 AXIS. The type FRAME cannot be defined here. (5 STRING is not explicitly possible here; the value 5 is treated like value 2). Example: MD 18096: MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM=1 MD 18097: MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM=2 "A" can then be programmed for parameter $TC_DPC1 Battery-backed working memory is used. A value change can - but need not lead to reconfiguration of the battery-backed memory. 18099 MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM N02, N09 FBW - Type of OEM monitor data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON 2/2 - 10 3 1 6 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-89 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Description: Individual types can be assigned to the parameters in this way. The array index n can accept values from 0 to the value of MD 18098: MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM Possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 represent the NC language types 1 BOOL, 2 CHAR, 3 INT, 4 REAL and 6 AXIS. The FRAME type cannot be defined here. (5 STRING is not possible explicitly here; the value 5 is treated like value 2). Example: MD 18098: MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM=1 MD 18099: MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM=2 "A" can then be programmed for the parameter $TC_MOPC1 A battery-backed working memory is used. A value change can - but need not lead to reconfiguration of the battery-backed memory. 18102 MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE N02, N09 W1 - Type of D No. programming (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - 1 7/2 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This MD activates the 'flat D number management'. The type of D programming can be determined by individual values: direct or indirect programming. The default value is zero. This means that the NCK manages the T and D numbers. The NCK only accepts a value > 0 if bit 0 is not set in MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK. That means the tool managment function cannot be active simultaneously. Value: Meaning ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------0: No 'flat D number management' active 1: D numbers are programmed directly and absolutely 2: D numbers are programmed indirectly and relatively. That means the programmed D number is the index to a table in the VDI. The PLC writes the absolute D number in this table. The NCK reads this number and selects the corresponding offset. 2-90 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data The NCK and PLC are synchronized while doing so. The NCK may have to wait until the PLC has made the D number(s) available. The PLC receives the trigger for this by evaluating the T no. The NC block containing the change command triggers the synchronization and the waiting for the D numbers. 3 As 2, with simulation of the D numbers by the PLC. Only for testing the NCK functionality. In this case, the D numbers are placed by the NCK itself. They can be assigned via the R parameters R1,...R9. In which case the value of R1 is mapped onto D1 etc. Activation (value changed from 0 to > 0) and deactivation (value changed from > 0 to 0) reconfigure the battery-backed memory, that is delete the data! 18120 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK N02 S7 - Number of global user variable names (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - - 50 0 32000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Defines the number of user variables for NCK global user data (GUD). Approximately 80 bytes of memory per variable are reserved in the SRAM for the names of the variables. The additional memory required for the value of the variable depends on the data type of the variable. The number of available NCK global user data is exhausted on reaching the limit value set in MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK or MD 18150: MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM (memory space for user variables). Buffered user memory is used. Special cases: The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered. Related to: MD 18150: MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM (Memory space for user variables) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-91 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 18130 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN N02 S7 - Number of channel-specific user variable names (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - - 150 0 32000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Defines the number of user variable names for channel-specific global user data (GUD). Approximately 80 bytes of memory are reserved in the SRAM for each variable name. The additional memory required for the value of the variable is equal to the size of the data type of the variable multiplied by the number of channels. This means that each channel has its own memory available for the variable values. The number of available channel-specific global user data is exhausted on reaching the limit value set in MD 18130: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN or MD 18150: MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM (memory space for user variables). The name created with the DEF statement is valid for all channels. The memory requirement for the variable value is equal to the size of the data type multiplied by the number of channels. Buffered user memory is used. Special cases: The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered. Related to: MD 18150: MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM (Memory space for user variables) 18150 MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM N02 S7 - Memory location for global user variable values (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - - 32 32000 7/2 802d-cu3 - 48 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 48 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 48 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 0 Description: The specified value reserves memory space for the variable values of the global user data (GUD). The dimensioning of the memory depends to a large extent on the data types used for the variables. 2-92 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Overview of the memory requirements of the data types: Data type REAL INT BOOL CHAR STRING AXIS FRAME Memory requirement 8 bytes 4 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte per character, 100 characters permitted per string 4 bytes up to 1KB depending on control model The total memory required by a channel or axis-specific global user variable is the memory requirement of the variables multiplied by the number of channels or axes. The number of global user variables available is given when the limit defined in the MD: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_xxxx or MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM is reached. Buffered user memory is used. Special cases: The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered! Relating to: MD 18118: MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES: (Number of GUD blocks) MD 18120: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK (Number of global user variables) MD 18130: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN (Number of channel-specific user variables) 18190 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK N12, N02, N06, S7 N09 - Number of files for machine-related protection zones DWORD (SRAM) POWER ON - - 0 0 10 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data defines how many blocks are created for the protection zones available in the NCK. Buffered memory is used. Special cases: The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered. References: /FB/, A3, "Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones" (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-93 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 18200 MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM N02, N09 FBW - Number of Siemens OEM magazine data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 10 2/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 ('H1') and bit 2=1 ('H4'), is set for TMMG (and option is set): User or OEM data in the tool management (TMMG). Number of Siemens OEM magazine data (standard format IN_Int). See also: MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM, MM_NUM_MAGAZINE Buffered user memory is used 18201 MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM N02, N09 FBW - Type of Siemens OEM magazine data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - 10 3 1 6 2/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 ('H1') and bit 2=1 ('H4'), is set for TMMG (and option is set): User or OEM data in the tool management. Type of magazine-specific Siemens user data configured by MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM. 2-94 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data Each parameter can be assigned its own type. The permissible types are: Type Value of the machine data (See types of the NC language) ---------------------------------------------------------------BOOL 1 CHAR 2 INT 3 REAL 4 STRING 5 (permits identifier up to 31 characters long) AXIS 6 FRAME not defined See also: MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM, MM_NUM_MAGAZINE Buffered user memory is used 18202 MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM - No. of Siemens OEM magazine location data (SRAM)DWORD N02, N09 POWER ON FBW - 2/2 - 0 0 10 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 ('H1') and bit 2=1 ('H4'), is set for TMMG (and option is set): User or OEM data in the tool management. Number of Siemens OEM magazine location data (standard format IN_Int). See also: MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM, MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION Buffered user memory is used 18203 MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM N02, N09 FBW - Type of Siemens OEM magazine location data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - 10 3 1 6 2/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 ('H1') and bit 2=1 ('H4'), is set for TMMG (and option is set) User or OEM data in the tool management. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-95 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data Type of magazine-specific Siemens user data configured by MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM. Each parameter can be assigned its own type. The permissible types are: Type Value of the machine data (See types of the NC language) ---------------------------------------------------------------BOOL 1 CHAR 2 INT 3 REAL 4 (STRING is explicitly impossible here; value 5 is treated like value 2) AXIS 6 FRAME not defined See also: MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM, MM_NUM_MAGLOC Buffered user memory is used 18209 MM_TYPE_CCS_MON_PARAM N02, N09 FBW - Type of Siemens OEM monitor data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON 10 6 2/2 - 3 1 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Only when $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0 = 1 or bit 1 = 1 and bit 2=1 ('H4'), is set: User or OEM data in the tool management. Type of monitoring-specific Siemens user data configured by MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM. Each parameter can be assigned its own type. The permissible types are Type Value of the machine data (See types of the NC language) ---------------------------------------------------------------BOOL 1 CHAR 2 INT 3 REAL 4 (STRING is explicitly impossible here; value 5 is treated like value 2) AXIS 6 FRAME not defined See also: MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM, MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA Buffered user memory is used 2-96 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 18237 MM_CYC_DATA_MEM_SIZE EXP, N02 - - Cycle/display setting data in SRAM [kB] DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 32000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 READ Description: Size of the buffered memory for 'Setting data for cycles and display' [kB] 18238 MM_CC_MD_MEM_SIZE N02 - - Compile cycle machine data in SRAM [kB] DWORD POWER ON - - 1 1 32000 7/1 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Battery-backed user memory for compile cycles (in kbyte) 18800 MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE N01, N12 FBFA - Activation of external NC languages DWORD POWER ON - 0x0001 7/2 - 0x0000 0x0000 802d-cu3 - 1 - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - 1 - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - 1 - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - 1 - - 1/1 Description: The corresponding NC language must be activated to execute part programs of other control manufacturers. Only one external NC language can be selected. The range of instructions which is made available in each case is to be taken from the current documentation. Bit 0 (LSB): Execution of part programs ISO_2 or ISO_3. See $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM for coding. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-97 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 18890 MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS EXP, N01 - - Maximum number of elements in 3D protection areas DWORD POWER ON - - 0 - 200 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Maximum number of elements in protection zones. If this MD has the value 0 (default value) then no protection zones are possible. 18892 MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM EXP, N01 - - Max. number of protection zone elements DWORD POWER ON - 1000 7/2 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Maximum number of protection zone elements. If this MD is 0 (default value), no protection zones are possible. 18894 MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_GROUPS EXP, N01 - - Max. number of protection zone groups DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 100 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Maximum number of protection zone groups in the system 2-98 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Generale maschine data 18896 MM_MAXNUM_3D_COLLISION EXP, N01 - - Max. number of temp. memories for collision check DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 MAX_SIZE_3D_ 7/2 S_MATRIX_MD 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Maximum size of a temporary memory area, which is required for the collision check of two protection zones. If the two protection zones have m or n elements and a number of machine axes k, a memory space of 4 * n * m * k elements is required. Each memory space requires 4 bytes (FLOAT). If this machine data is 0, the size of the required memory is automatically derived from machine data $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM and $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS. If this memory size is not sufficient, it can explicitly be defined via this machine data. 18897 MM_MAXNUM_3D_INTRERFACE_IN - Max. no. of interf. bits for pre-activation of protection DWORD zones EXP, N01 POWER ON - - 16 0 MAXNUM_3D_IN 7/1 TERFACEBITS_I N_MD 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Defines how many input bits are available on the VDI interface for preactivation of 3D protection zones. It will influence the size of the memory space required for each NC block. If this machine data has value n, a memory size of approximately n * (n + 1) / 16 bytes will be required per block. This machine data will be evaluated and will cause reservation of memory space, only if machine data $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS is inequal to 0. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-99 Machine Data 06/2007 Generale maschine data 18898 PROT_AREA_3D_TYPE_NAME_TAB EXP, N12, N07 - - Table of names for protection zone types STRING POWER ON - 10 "BOX","SPHERE","C YLINDER","CONE"... - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Contains the names for the protection zone types. The meaning of the entry is determined by the postition in the list. A change of name does therefore not cause a change of function. Meaning of entries: 1. Empty (no protection zone defined) 2. Cuboid 3. Sphere 4. Cylinder 5. Cone 6. Truncated cone 7. Square pyramid 8. Rectangular pyramid 9. Square truncated pyramid 10.Rectangular truncated pyramid Example: If the third entry "SPHERE" is changed into "CUBOID", this new keyword "CUBOID" still designates a sphere. A meaningful change would be, for example "SP". 2-100 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 2.3 Channel-specific machine data Number Identifier Display filters Reference Unit Name Data type Active Attributes System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value Protection Description: 20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB C01, C10 K2 - Assignment between geometry axis and channel axisBYTE POWER ON - 3 1, 2, 3,0 0 20 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 1, 0, 2 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 1, 0, 2 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: This MD assigns a geometry axis to a channel axis. The assignment must be made for all 3 geometry axes (X,Y,Z). If a geometry axis is not assigned, the value 0 should be entered. The geometry axis is therefore not available and cannot be programmed, e.g. if the second geometry axis is not required for the "turning" technology Y -> entry: value 0 (see default setting for turning). Special cases: It is advisable to assign the first channel axes to the geometry axes. 20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED C01, C10 K2 - Machine axis number valid in channel BYTE POWER ON - 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 0 31 7/2 802d-cu3 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 4 1, 2, 3, 4 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 - - 2/2 0 Description: This MD assigns a machine axis to a channel axis. SINUMERIK 802D has 5 channel axes. Channel axis identifiers for the axes activated in the channel must be specified in MD 20080: AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB. The axes can be programmed. A machine axis that has not been assigned to a channel axis is not active i.e. no axis control, no display on the screen. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-101 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Anwendungsbeispiel: Example of assigning the machine axis (MA) to the channel axes: AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [0] = 3;3rd MA is 1st axis in the channel AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [1] = 1;1st MA is 2nd axis in the channel AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [2] = 5;5th MA is 3rd axis in the channel AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [3] = 0; no assignment Note: Leave no spaces!, Example of programming error: AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [0] = 1;1st MA is 1st axis in the channel AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [1] = 2;2nd MA is 2nd axis in the channel AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [2] = 0;space in list ... AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [3] = 3;... of the channel axes Special cases: A channel axis and therefore indirectly a machine axis must be assigned to each geometry axis to be programmed. The remaining axes (besides the geometry axes) in the channel are additional axes - also programmable. related to: MD 20080: AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[0]...[4] (channel axis identifier) 20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB C01, C11, C10 K2 - Channel axis name STRING POWER ON - 20 "X", "Y", "Z", "A", "B", "C", "U", "V", "X11", "Y11" - - 7/2 802d-cu3 6 "X", "Y", "Z", "SP", "A", "PLCX" - - 2/2 802d-ng2 6 "X", "Z", "C", "A", "B", "PLCX" - 2/2 802d-ng3 6 "X", "Z", "C", "A", "B", "PLCX" - 2/2 802d-tm1 4 "X", "Y", "Z", "SP" - - 2/2 802d-tm2 6 "X", "Y", "Z", "SP", "A", "PLCX" - - 2/2 802d-tm3 6 "X", "Y", "Z", "SP", "A", "PLCX" - - 2/2 Description: In this MD you can set the name of the channel axis. The channel axis is displayed with this identifier in the WCS. This is also written in the program. Generally, the first two or three channel axes are used as geometry also MD 20050: AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB). The remaining channel axes defined as special axes. SINUMERIK 802D has 5 channel axes. Special cases: We recommend the following for the channel axis identifiers: X, Y, Z, U, V, W, Qfor linear axes, A, B, C for rotary axes If you decide to use names other than those recommended, follow the creating axis identifiers (see MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB). 2-102 identifier axes (see are rules for (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND C01, C03 S1 - Initial setting of master spindle in channel BYTE POWER ON - - 1 1 20 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - 2 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - 2 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - 2 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - 1 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - 2 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - 2 2/2 - Description: Definition of the master spindle default setting (in channel). The spindle number is entered. A series of functions are linked to the master spindle which are not possible for a different spindle. Note: The SETMS(n) language command can be used to declare the spindle number n as master spindle. The spindle defined as master spindle in this MD is declared as master spindle again with SETMS. At the program end or program termination, the spindle defined in this MD is also declared as master spindle. 20094 SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR C01, C03, C10 FBFA - M function for switching into controlled axis mode DWORD POWER ON - - 7/2 - 70 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This machine data defines the M auxiliary function number with which the spindle is switched over to the axis mode. The M number defined in the machine data replaces M70 in the Siemens language mode. Note: On the VDI interface, M70 with the corresponding address extension is always output as an identifier for the switchover to the axis mode. Restrictions: Refer to machine data 10715: $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-103 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Related to: $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP, $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR, $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE For external language mode: $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR For nibbling: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE 20095 EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR C01, C11, C03, FBFA C10 - M function for switching to controlled axis mode(external mode) DWORD POWER ON - - 29 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: This machine data defines the M function number, with which switchover to controlled spindle/axis mode is to be carried out. The M number defined in the machine data replaces M29 in external language mode. Pre-defined M numbers such as M00,M1,M2,M3, etc. are not allowed as M number. Restrictions: See machine data 10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE Related to: $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP, $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR, $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE For external language mode: $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR For nibbling: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE 2-104 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 20106 PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK N01 - - Prog-Events ignore single block DWORD POWER ON - - 0x0 0 0x1F 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Event-controlled programm calls (Prog-Events) can be set regarding their single block behavior. Bit 0 = 1 : Prog-Event Bit 1 = 1 : Prog-Event Bit 2 = 1 : Prog-Event Bit 3 = 1 : Prog-Event Bit 4 = 1 : Prog-Event restart after part program start causes block change without restart after part program end causes block change without restart after OP reset causes block change without restart after runup causes block change without restart after 1st start after search run causes block change without 20107 PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT N01 - - Prog-Events ignore read-in disable DWORD POWER ON 7/2 - - 0x0 0 0x1F 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Event-controlled programm calls (Prog-Events) can be set regarding their readin disable behavior. Bit 0 = 1 : Prog-Event after part program start causes block change despite read-in disable Bit 1 = 1 : Prog-Event after part program end causes block change despite read-in disable (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-105 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Bit 2 = 1 : Prog-Event after OP reset causes block change despite read-in disable Bit 3 = 1 : Prog-Event after runup causes block change despite read-in disable Bit 4 = 1 : Prog-Event after 1st start after search run causes block change despite read-in disable 20108 PROG_EVENT_MASK N01, - K1 - Setting of event-driven programm calls DWORD POWER ON - 0xF 7/2 - 0x0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Parameterization of the events, at which the user program set with $MN_PROG_EVENT_NAME (default: _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF) is called implicitly: Bit 0 = 1 : Part program start Bit 1 = 1 : Part program end Bit 2 = 1 : Operator panel reset Bit 3 = 1 : Runup The user program is called via the following search path: 1. /_N_CUS_DIR/_N_PROG_EVENT_SPF 2. /_N_CMA_DIR/_N_PROG_EVENT_SPF 3. /_N_CST_DIR/_N_PROG_EVENT_SPF 20140 TRAFO_RESET_VALUE C03 K1 - Active transformation following RESET BYTE RESET - - 0 0 10 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Definition of the transformation data set selected during booting and for a reset or an end of the part program. (In conjunction with machine data $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and for a part program start in conjunction with machine data $MC_START_MODE_MASK) 2-106 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 20144 TRAFO_MODE_MASK C07 M1 - Function selection of kinematic transformation BYTE RESET - - 0x0 0 0x01 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 - Description: Selects certain functionality of kinematic transformation by setting the following bits: Bit 0 = 0: Default behavior. Bit 0 = 1: Transformation as defined in $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE is persistent, i. e. it is also selected with TRAFOOF and not shown in the display. It requires that transformation as defined in $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE is selected automatically after RESET and START via $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and $MC_START_MODE_MASK, i. e.: $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK bit 0 = 1 and bit 7 = 0, $MC_START_MODE_MASK bit 7 = 1 $MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET = TRUE 20154 EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES C11, C03 FBFA - Initial setting of G groups in ISO mode BYTE RESET - 31 1, 2, 3, 4, 0 - - 2/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 - Description: When an external NC programming language is used, definition of G codes which become active on runup and reset or at part program end depending on machine data $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and at part program start depending on machine data $MC_START_MODE_MASK. The following external programming languages are possible: ISO2 dialect Milling ISO3 dialect Turning The G group division to be used is indicated in the current SINUMERIK documentations. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-107 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data The following groups within the MD EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES are writable: ISO2 dialect M: G group 2: G17/G18/G19 G group 3: G90/G91 G group 5: G94/G95 G group 6: G20/G21 G group 13: G96/G97 G group 14: G54-G59 ISO3 dialect T: G group 2: G group 3: G group 5: G group 6: G group 16: G96/G97 G90/G91 G94/G95 G20/G21 G17/G18/G19 20156 EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_MODE C03 K1 - Reset response of external G groups BYTE RESET 31 1 7/2 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 Description: This MD is evaluated only if bit0 in $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK (see there) is set! This MD is used to define for each entry in MD $MN_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES (i.e. for each G group), whether the setting as per $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES is adopted again after a reset / part program end ( MD = 0 ) or if the current setting is retained ( MD = 1 ). Example for ISO dialect M: Here, the basic setting for the 14th G group (settable zero offset) is read out of machine data $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES after each reset / part program end: $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13]=1 ;reset value of the 14th G group ;is G54 $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_MODE[13]=0 ;basic setting for the 14th G group is ;defined by ;$MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13] ;after reset / part program end However, if the current setting for the 14th G group is to be retained beyond reset / part program end, this results in the following setting: $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13]=1 ;reset value of the 14th G group ;is G54 $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_MODE[13]=1 ;current setting for the 14th ;G group is retained even after ;reset / part program end 2-108 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 20172 COMPRESS_VELO_TOL C09 V1,PGA mm/min Max. permissible deviation of path feedrate with compression DOUBLE POWER ON - - 60000.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: The value indicates the maximum permissible deviation for the compression for the path feedrate. The larger the value, the more short blocks can be compressed into a long block. The maximum number of compressible blocks is limited by the size of the spline buffer. Related to: $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL[AXn] $MC_COMPRESS_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT References: /PGA/, Programming Guide, Advanced 20204 WAB_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE C06 W1 mm Change of direction with SAR DOUBLE POWER ON - - 0.01 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: In the case of smooth approach and retraction, the point defined with DISCL, from which, in the case of infeed from the initial plane, traversing is carried out at lower speed (G341) or the point in which the actual approach movement begins (G 340), must lie between the initial plane and the approach plane. If this point lies outside this interval and the deviation is less than or equal to this machine data, it is assumed that the point lies in the approach or retraction plane. If the deviation is greater, then alarm 10741 is output. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-109 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Example: An approach is made from position Z = 20. The SAR plane is at Z = 0. The point defined by DISCL must therefore lie between these two values. If it lies between 20.000 and 20.010 or between 0 and -0.010, it is assumed that the value 20.0 or 0.0 was programmed (under the condition that the MD has the value 0.010). The alarm is output if the position is greater than 20.010 or less than -0.010. 20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK C09 FBW - Activation of tool management functions DWORD POWER ON - 0xFFFFFFF 7/2 - 0x0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Activation of tool or magazine management (TM) (only if option TM is set). Bit-coded activation data. That is, the TM can be activated in various versions. Comment: The entire tool change process is essentially composed of two commands to the PLC --> tool change preparation and tool change ON.These terms must be known if one wants to use the following setting options. (Tool change preparation and ON-T combine both steps from the NCK into one if no M6 is used for programming). Transport acknowledgement means that the PLC has received the tool change preparation or tool change ON command from the NCK. That is, the tool management command number output from the NCK is acknowledged by the PLC with the value zero (see PLC description). Comment: Bits 5, 6, 7, 8 slow down the block processing sequence. Bits 7, 8 have a greater slowing effect than bits 5, 6. Comment: Bit 18 lengthens the search procedure for a suitable tool, above all if there are many disabled replacement tools present. Comment: Bit 19 in conjunction with set bits 5,6,7,8 slows down block processing. Notice: Bits 5 and 7, or 6 and 8 can only be set alternatively. That is either bit 5 or bit 7; or bit 6 or bit 8. If bits 5 and 7 or 6 and 8 are set simultaneously then bit 5 or bit 6 will become active with priority over bit 7 or 8. (Simply formulated: The transport acknowledgement is given priority over the end acknowledgement.) 2-110 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Bit no.Hexadec.Meaning of set bit Value 0 (LSB)0x00001Tool or magazine management active (only possible with option release). 1 0x00002TM monitoring functions active (only possible with option release. If the magazine management is activated then that option is sufficient for this function.) 2 0x00004OEM functions, compile cycles functions can become active. 3 0x00008Adjacent location is treated. 4 0x00010The PLC has the option of requesting a tool change preparation again (PLC command numbers = 2,4,5) with changed parameters. Rejected by acknowledging with status = 2, or status = 7. That is, if the PLC uses this option the tool selection is recalculated in NCK and a corresponding new command output to the PLC. If acknowledged with status=2, the tool proposed by the NCK is also disabled. If these two status numbers 2 and 7 are used although the bit has the value=0, an alarm is generated. The PLC must not reject the tool defined by after the first start of "block search with generated if this is done nevertheless. The selection is refused within the scope of an the NCK for tool selection calculation". An alarm is same applies if a tool init block. Programming which needs the selected T number (e.g. GETSELT) must wait until the end acknowledgement = 1 is received (or one of the acknowledgements 103, 105 that show that the T no. is defined). 5 0x00020The main run PLC synchronization with tool change ON command for the main spindle/main tool holder takes place at the same time as the transport acknowledgement to NCK (see PLC description). If bit 19 (0x80000) = 0 -> synchronization with respect to the tool command output (tool change). This means that the command is not regarded as output until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is present in the NCK. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 1 -> Synchronization with respect to the IPO block. That is, the main run block remains active at least until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is present in the NCK. Example: Value = 1 M6 ; the next block is processed if the transport acknowledgement ; has been made for the tool change ON command. X5 D2 ; latest possible time for synchronization. ; That is, at the time D2 is processed, the PLC must have ; acknowledged the two commands tool preparation, ; tool change ON as ended. 6 0x00040In the case of a tool change ON command for a secondary spindle resp. a secondary tool holder, the main run PLC synchronization takes place at the same time as the transport acknowledgement. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 0 -> Synchronization with respect to the tool command output (tool change). That is, the command is not regarded as output until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is present in the NCK. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 1 -> Synchronization with respect to the IPO block. That is the main run block remains active at least until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is received in the NCK. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-111 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 7 0x00080The main run PLC synchronization with tool change ON command for the main spindle resp. a main tool holder does not take place until receipt of the PLC acknowledgement that the tool change ON command has finished. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 0 -> Synchronization with respect to the tool command output (tool change). This means that the command is not regarded as output until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is present in the NCK. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 1 -> Synchronization with respect to the IPO block. That is the main run block remains active at least until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is received in the NCK. Example: Value=1 M6 ; the next block is processed if the end acknowledgement X5 D2 ; latest possible time for synchronization. ; That is, at the time D2 is processed, the PLC must have ; acknowledged the two commands tool preparation, ; tool change as ended. 8 0x00100The main run PLC synchronization with tool change ON command for an auxiliary spindle resp. an auxiliary tool holder does not take place until receipt of the PLC acknowledgement that the tool change ON command has finished. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 0 -> Synchronization with respect to the tool command output (tool change). This means that the command is not regarded as output until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is present in the NCK. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 1 -> Synchronization with respect to the IPO block. That is the main run block remains active at least until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is received in the NCK. 9 0x00200This bit is only used for test purposes. Simulation of the PLC acknowledgements for tool motion and change active. It is used for testing the data transport to NCK and HMI - without the otherwise necessary PLC program. NCK gives itself the necessary acknowledgements from the PLC. 100x00400The tool change ON command (PLC command number= 3) is not output until a PLC preparation acknowledgement is received. 110x00800The tool preparation command (PLC command numbers=2,4,5) is also executed if the same tool preparation command has already been made. (Commands 4,5 contain the tool preparation) Example: (Tool change made with M6 (PLC command no.= 3): T="Tool1" ; tool preparation M6 ; Tool change T="Tool2" ; 1st tool preparation after M6 (for same tool holder) is always output to PLC T="Tool2" ; 2nd tool preparation is only output as command to the PLC; if bit 11 = 1. ; This tool preparation counts as the first if the state of the tool has changed since the previous tool preparation such that it would no longer be serviceable. That can, for example, be an asynchronous unloading of the tool. This tool preparation then attempts to select a replacement tool. 120x01000The tool preparation command (PLC command numbers=2,4,5) is also executed if the tool is already in the spindle/tool holder. T="Tool1" ; tool preparation M6 ; Tool change T="Tool1" ;Tool is already in the tool holder ; 1st tool preparation after M6 (for the same tool holder) is only output to the PLC if; bit 12 = 1. 2-112 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data ; An unserviceable tool (e.g. disabled because of tool monitoring.) on the tool holder does not count as being on the tool holder. This tool preparation then attempts to select a replacement tool. T="Tool1" ; 2. Tool preparation - the rules of bit 11 apply to the output. 130x02000This bit is only used for test purposes. Recording of the tool sequences in a diagnosis buffer. On reset, the commands are retrieved from the diagnosis buffer and stored in a file in the part program memory. The diagnosis file can be used to investigate problems in the set up of the NCKPLC communication (of the PLC program). 140x04000Automatic tool change on Reset and Start as per the machine data: $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME,$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER . 150x08000No return transport of the tool from any defined buffers if there are multiple preparation commands (Tx->Tx) during the power on process. 160x10000Programming T 'location number' is active, otherwise T=''identifier'. 170x20000Value 1 = Control of the time monitoring via the PLC. That is the PLC starts/stops the time monitoring counter. Value = 0 standard. That is, traversing blocks unequal to G00 let the counter run. 180x40000Message to the PLC if the last replacement tool is loaded from a tool group. 190x80000Value 0 = The synchronizations defined by bits 5,6,7,8 (0x20,...0x100) refer to the TM command output. Value 1 = The synchronizations defined by bits 5,6,7,8 (0x20,...0x100) refer to the main run block. 200x100000Value 0 = Standard setting: If the PLC signal 'program test active' is present, then the commands generated are not output to the PLC! NCK acknowledges the commands itself. No magazine data is changed. Tool data are not changed. Exception: The tool status of the tool activated in test mode can assume the status 'active'. Value 1 = If the PLC signal 'program test active' is present, then the commands generated are output to the PLC. Depending upon the type of acknowledgement by the PLC, tool/magazine data can be changed in the NCK. If the acknowledgement parameters for the 'target magazine' are given the values of the 'source magazine', then there is no tool transport and thus also no data change in the NCK. Exception: The tool status of the tool activated in test mode can assume the status 'active'. 210x200000Value 0 = Standard setting: Ignore the tool state 'W' during tool selection (0x20 = tool is being changed). Value 1 = Tools in the state 'W' cannot be selected by another tool change/tool preparation command. 220x400000Value 0 = Standard setting Value 1 = If the function T='location number' (bit16) is active then the tool groups are divided into subgroups. $TC_TP11 is the grouping parameter.During the transition to the replacement tool, only those tools of the group are recognized as replacement tools that have set at least one (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-113 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data bit of the tool on the programmed location in the $TC_TP11 value. 230x800000Value 0 = Standard setting: TMMG selects the tool in the main run optimally and safely. That is, in a serious case of offset selection, the interpreter must wait for the end of the tool selection. Value 1 = For simple applications. Interpreter selects the tool itself. That is there is no synchronization with the main run is required for offset selection. (However, an 'uncorrectable' alarm may be issued if the tool becomes unserviceable after selection but before being loaded.) 24 0x1000000Value 0 = Standard setting: If the PLC commands 8 and 9 want to move a tool to a location reserved for another tool, then this is rejected with an alarm. Value 1 = If the PLC commands 8 and 9 want to move a tool to a location reserved for another tool with 'reserved for tool from buffer' (bit value= 'H4'), then this is possible. This location reservation is removed before the execution of the motion ('reserved for new tool to be loaded' (bit value= 'H8') remains effective). With the default setting - Bit6-9 = 0 - the synchronization is related to a tool change for main spindle/main tool holder in the block in which a cutting edge of the new tool has been selected for the first time. The synchronization can either be made via the transport acknowledgement or via the end acknowledgement. If the option for the tool management or magazine management is missing, bit no. 0 cannot be set. If the option for the tool monitoring is missing, bit no. 1 cannot be set. (However, if bit no. 0 can be set, then that also gives the right to set bit no. 1.) All functions as from bit no. 3 only become effective if bit no. 0 is set. Examples: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x1 -> tool and/or magazine management active TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x3 -> TM + tool monitoring function active TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x20003 -> TM + tool monitoring function active; PLC controls time monitoring TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x2 -> tool monitoring function active without TM 20320 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK C06, C09 FBW - Time monitoring for tool in tool holder DWORD POWER ON - - 0x0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - 0x1 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 0x1 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 0x1 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 0x0 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 0x1 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 0x1 - - 2/2 - 2-114 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: Activation of the tool time monitoring for the tool holders / spindles 1..x. As soon as the path axes are traversed (not with G00, always with G63), the tool time monitoring data of the active D compensation for the tool that is present in the selected tool holder, which is also the master tool holder, are updated. Notice: The time monitoring can be switched off through the PLC. Notice: With test mode activated, the time monitoring is switched off automatically. Bit No. Meaning when bit is set -------------------------------------------------------------------------0...x-1 Monitoring of tool in tool holder 1...x Example: $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK = 'H5' or = 'B101'. The two tool holders with numbers 1 and 3 are generally time-monitored. If tools are present on tool holders 1, 2, 3 and if the active tool is on master tool holder 1, then exactly this tool is monitored, and the actual time value of the active D compensation reduced. If the active tool is later on tool holder 2, then it is not time-monitored, as bit 1 (for tool holder=2) of $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK is not set. Note: If you are working with setting $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=-2, then there can be programming situations, where the active tool does not equal the tool changed in. In this situation, the tool of the master tool holder is monitored (instead of the active tool). And this only, if the active D compensation number is also known to the tool on the tool holder. Otherwise, there will be no time monitoring. 20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK C09 W1 - Definition of tool parameters DWORD POWER ON - - 0x0 0 0xFFFF 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Bit 0 = 0:For turning tools the wear parameter of the transverse axis X is applied as a radius value. Bit 0 = 1:For turning tools the wear parameter of the transverse axis X is applied as a diameter value. Special cases: (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-115 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 20380 TOOL_CORR_MODE_G43G44 C01, C08, C11 FBFA - Treatment of tool length compensation with G43 / G44 BYTE RESET - - 0 0 2 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: This machine data determines in ISO dialect M (G43 / G44) the way in which length compensations programmed with H are processed. 0: Mode A Tool length H always acts on the third geometry axis (usually Z) 1: Mode B Tool length H acts, depending on the active plane, on one of the three geometry axes. This means with G17 on the 3rd geometry axis (usually Z) G18 on the 2nd geometry axis (usually Y) G19 on the 1st geometry axis (usually X) In this mode, compensations in all three geometry axes can be configured through multiple programming, i.e. through the activation of one component, the length compensation possibly active in another axis is not deleted. 2: Mode C The tool length acts, independent of the active plane, on the axis that has simultaneously been programmed with H. Otherwise, the response is the same as with mode B. 20384 TOOL_CORR_MULTIPLE_AXES C01, C08, C11 FBFA - Tool length compensation in several axes simultaneously BOOLEAN RESET - - 7/2 - TRUE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 Description: This machine data determines for tool length compensation in ISO dialect M (ISO2) (G43 / G44), whether the compensation shall be allowed in mode C (selection of the axis on which the compensation is acting by specifying the corresponding axis letter) to act on several axes simultaneously. If this machine data is 1, this type of programming is allowed; otherwise it is rejected with an alarm. 2-116 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 20396 TOOL_OFFSET_DRF_ON C01, C08 W1 - Handwheel override in tool direction BOOLEAN RESET - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data activates the handwheel override in tool direction. When this machine data is set, a handwheel override is active in the axis that is assigned to length L1 of the active tool, in the direction defined by tool orientation. Example: G17 is active; the tool is a milling tool; tool length L1 is therefore assigned to the Z axis (the 3rd geometry axis). When the tool (e.g. with active 5-axis transformation) is turned around the Y axis by 90 degrees, so that it shows in X direction, a handwheel override becomes active in the 3rd axis in the X axis. 20450 LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE EXP, C05 B1 - Relief factor for block cycle time DOUBLE POWER ON - 7/2 - - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Block cycle problems occur for the following reason: The traversing length of the NC blocks to be processed is so short that the Look Ahead function must reduce the machine velocity to provide enough time for block preparation. In this situation, constant deceleration and acceleration of the path motion can occur. This machine data defines the extent to which such velocity fluctuations are to be smoothed. Special cases: Values up to approx. 1.0 are appropriate. The value 0.0 means that the function is deactivated. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-117 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 20460 LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR EXP, C05 B1 % Smoothing factor for Look Ahead DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 0. 500.0 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: A smoothing factor can be defined to give a more stable path velocity control. It defines the maximum permitted productivity loss. Acceleration procedures which contribute less than this factor to a shorter program run time are then not executed. In this case, only those acceleration procedures whose frequency lies above the frequency parameterized in MD $MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY are taken into account. The entry of 0.0 deactivates the function. 20500 CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME EXP, C05 B2 s Minimum time with constant velocity DOUBLE POWER ON - 0.1 7/2 - 0.0 0.0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Defines the minimum time for constant velocity during transition from acceleration to deceleration in short blocks in which the set velocity cannot be reached. Entering a time of at least several IPO cycles prevents a direct transition from the acceleration to the deceleration phase and thus reduces the acceleration jump to half. This acceleration limitation is only active with the acceleration profile BRISK. MD irrelevant for: Look Ahead does not take account of this function. 2-118 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 20550 EXACT_POS_MODE EXP B1 - Exact stop conditions on G00/G01. BYTE NEW CONF - - 0 0 33 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Configuration of the exact stop conditions for G00 and other G codes of the 1st G code group. The MD is decimal-coded. The units digits define the behavior at G00 (infeed motion) and the tens digits the behavior of all the other G codes of the 1st group ("machining G codes"). x0:At G00, x1:At G00, programmed x2:At G00, programmed x3:At G00, programmed the relevant programmed exact stop conditions become active. G601 (fine positioning window) becomes active independent of the exact stop condition. G602 (coarse positioning window) becomes active independent of the exact stop condition. G603 (setpoint value reached) becomes active independent of the exact stop condition. 0x:At the machining G codes, the relevant programmed exact stop conditions become active. 1x:At the machining G codes, G601 (fine positioning window) becomes active independent of the programmed exact stop condition. 2x:At the machining G codes, G602 (coarse positioning window) becomes active independent of the programmed exact stop condition. 3x:At the machining G codes, G603 (setpoint value reached) becomes active independent of the programmed exact stop condition. The values of the units digits and tens digits are added. For example, the value of EXACT_POS_MODE = 2 means that the exact stop condition G602 is always activated automatically at G00, independently of which exact stop condition was programmed. At all other G codes of group 1, the programmed exact stop condition becomes active. 20552 EXACT_POS_MODE_G0_TO_G1 EXP PG - Exact stop condition at G00-G01 transition BYTE NEW CONF - 5 7/2 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-119 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: Configuration of a stop at transition from G00 to a different G code of the 1st G code group, and also vice versa, at transition from non-G00 to G00 in continuous-path mode. In exact-stop mode, the positioning window programmed or set in $MC_EXACT_POS_MODE is used. The following applies: 0: No additional stop, no control of exact stop 1: Behavior active as with G601 (positioning window, fine). 2: Behavior active as with G602 (positioning window, coarse). 3: Behavior active as with G603 (setpoint reached). 4: As 0, in addition, the override of the subsequent non-G00 block is taken into account in the G00 block via LookAhead in the case of a change from G00 to non-G00. 5: As 0, in addition, the override of the subsequent block is taken into account via LookAhead in the case of a change from G00 to non-G00 and non-G00 to G00. 20610 ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE C05 K1,B1,B2 - Acceleration margin for overlaid movements DOUBLE POWER ON - 0.9 7/2 - .2 0. 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: This machine data contains the factor which defines the acceleration margin which is not used by a path movement in order to provide sufficient acceleration reserves for an overlaid movement for the velocity control. A factor of 0.2 means that the path axes utilize 80% of the path acceleration in normal operation. Only when a request for overlaid movement is made, can 100% of the path acceleration be utilized. MD irrelevant for: Error states that lead to a rapid stop. In addition, the limitation is also ineffective for positioning axes. Special cases: At the moment the machine data is only taken into account if the function "Fast retraction" is first activated. Related to: MD 32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL (axis acceleration) 2-120 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 20624 HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND EXP, C09 H1 - Definition of response of handwheel travel, channel- DWORD specific POWER ON - - 0x13FF 0 0xFFFF 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 - Description: Definition of the behavior for handwheel travel to channel-specific VDI interface signals (bit 0 to bit 7): Bit = 0: Interruption or gathering of the displacements entered via the handwheel Bit = 1: Stop of traversing and no gathering Bit assignment Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 0: Mode group stop 1: Mode group stop, axes plus spindle 2: NC stop 3: NC stop, axes plus spindles 4: Feed disable (exceptions for $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK bit 6) For bit 4 feed disable it must be considered that a PLC-controlled axis, for which $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK bit 6 = 1, is not stopped by the feed disable and that no interruption and no abort is triggered here. Bit 5: Feedrate override Bit 6: Rapid traverse override Bit 7: Feed stop, geometry axis Bit 8 = 0: The maximum JOG_AX_VELO Bit 8 == 1: The maximum MAX_AX_VELO feedrate for handwheel travel is that specified in machine data of the corresponding machine axis/axes. feedrate for handwheel travel is that specified in machine data of the corresponding machine axis/axes. Bit 9 == 0: The override is active during handwheel travel Bit 9 == 1: During handwheel travel, the override is assumed to be 100% independent of the position of the override switch. Exception: override 0, which is always active. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-121 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Bit 10 = 0: Machine data $MN_HANDWH_REVERSE is not active for DRF, i.e. handwheel travel with DRF is carried out as if $MN_HANDWH_REVERSE == 0. Bit 10 == 1: Machine data $MN_HANDWH_REVERSE is active for DRF. Bit 11 = 0: When the contour handwheel is deselected, program processing is continued automatically. Bit 11 = 1: When the contour handwheel is deselected, an NCSTOP is triggered automatically. Program processing is not continued until NCSTART is entered. Bit 12 = 0 NC start has no effect on handwheel travel Bit 12 = 1: After NC start the paths collected so far will be rejected. Bit 13 = 0: For DRF, bits 0 - 3 and bit 12: bit == 0 / bit == 1 are active, Bit 13 = 1: For DRF, bits 0 - 3 and bit 12 are NOT active: the DRF motion is not interrupted by a stop, and even in the 'Automatic interrupted' state (achieved by NC Stop), a DRF motion can be carried out. Note: If an alarm leads to an axis stop and if such an alarm is pending, no DRF motion can take place. Bit 14 == 0: The maximum feedrate for handwheel travel is that specified in setting data $SN_JOG_REV_SET_VELO or in machine data $MA_JOG_REV_VELO (for revolutional feedrate) or in $MA_JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID (for rapid traverse) of the corresponding machine axis, allowing for the spindle or rotary axis feedrate. Bit 14 == 1: The maximum feedrate for handwheel travel in the case of rotational feedrate is that specified in machine data $MA_MAX_AX_VELO of the corresponding machine axis (see also bit 6). Bit 15 == 0: If the geometry axis is traversed in the channel as a transverse axis, only half of the distance of the specified increment is traveled during handwheel travel (HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE == 1). Bit 15 == 1: If the geometry axis is traversed in the channel as a transverse axis, the specified increment is fully traveled during handwheel travel (HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE == 1). 2-122 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 20700 REFP_NC_START_LOCK C01, C03 R1 - NC start disable without reference point BOOLEAN RESET - - TRUE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: 0: The "NC start" interface signal (V3200 0007.1) for starting part programs or part program blocks (MDA) is also possible if none or not all channel axes are referenced. To ensure that the axes move to the correct position after NC Start, the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) must be set to a correct value by other methods (scratching method). 1: The NC only starts if all of the axes have been referenced. 20730 G0_LINEAR_MODE C09 P2 - G0 interpolation mode BOOLEAN POWER ON 7/2 - - TRUE - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This machine data defines the interpolation behavior of G0: 0: Non-linear interpolation: Every path axis interpolates as individual axis (positioning axis) independently of the other axes at rapid traverse of the axis ($MA_MAX_AX_VELO). 1: Linear interpolation: The path axes are interpolated jointly. With the part program command G0LINOF, the non-linear interpolation can be selected; with G0LINON it can be deselected. Related to: $MC_EXTERN_G0_LINEAR_MODE (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-123 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 20732 EXTERN_G0_LINEAR_MODE N12 P2 - G00 interpolation mode BOOLEAN POWER ON - - TRUE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This machine data defines the interpolation behavior of G00: 0: Axes are traversed as positioning axes 1: Axes interpolate with each other Related to: EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM 20734 EXTERN_FUNCTION_MASK N12 FBFA - Function mask for external language DWORD RESET - 0xFFFF 7/2 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This machine data is used to influence functions in ISO mode. Bit0: 0: ISO mode T: "A" and "C" been programmed, "A" or 1: "A" and "C" in the part definition. An axis "A" 2-124 are interpreted as axes. If contour definition has "C" must be preceded by a comma. program are always interpreted as a contour or "C" is not allowed. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Bit1: 0: ISO mode T: G10 P P 1: G10 P P < 100 tool geometry > 100 tool wear < 10000 tool geometry > 10000 tool wear Bit2: 0: G04 dwell time: always [s] or [ms] 1: If G95 is active, in spindle revolutions Bit3: 0: Errors in ISO scanner lead to an alarm 1: Errors in ISO scannner are not output, the block is transferred to the Siemenstranslator. Bit4: 0: G00 is traversed with the current exact stop - continuous-path mode G code 1: G00 is always traversed with G09 Bit5: 0: Modulo rotary axis is positioned at the shortest possible distance 1: Direction of rotation of modulo rotary axis depends on sign Bit6: 0: Only 4-digit program number allowed. 1: 8-digit program number allowed. If the program number has less than 4 digits, it is expanded to 4 digits with 0. Bit7: 0: Axis programming for geometry axis exchange/parallel axes is ISO modecompatible. 1: Axis programming for geometry axis exchange/parallel axes is compatible in ISO mode with Siemensmode. Bit8: 0: With cycles, the F value transferred is always interpreted as a feedrate. 1: With threading cycles, the F value transferred is interpreted as pitch. Bit9: 0: Multiplication with 0.01mm / 0.0001inch is carried out in ISO mode T for G84, G88 and in standard mode F for G95. 1: Multiplication with 0.001mm / 0.00001inch is carried out in ISO mode T for G84, G88 and in standard mode F for G95. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-125 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Bit10: 0: With M96 Pxx, the program programmed with Pxx is always called in the case of an interrupt 1: With M96 Pxx, CYCLE396.spf is always called in the case of an interrupt Bit11: 0: With G54 Pxx, only G54.1 is displayed 1: With G54 Pxx, the programmed program is displayed after the point, e.g. G54.48 Bit12: 0: When the subroutine defined with M96 Pxx is called, $P_ISO_STACK is not modified 1: When the subroutine defined with M96 Pxx is called, $P_ISO_STACK is incremented 21000 CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST C06 K1 mm Circle end point monitoring constant DOUBLE POWER ON - - 0.01 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: This machine data identifies the permissible absolute circle difference. In circle programming, the radii from the programmed center point to the starting point and to the end point are usually not equal (the circle is "overdefined"). The maximum permissible difference between these two radii which is accepted without an alarm being triggered is defined by the larger value in the following data: MD: CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST Start radius multiplied by 0.001 I.e. for small circles the tolerance is a fixed value (MD: CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST) and for large circles it is proportional to the start radius. Anwendungsbeispiel: MD 21000: CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST = 0.01 mm With these MD and a radius ? 10mm, the constant has an effect, with > 10mm, the proportional factor has an effect. 2-126 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 21010 CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR C06 K1 - Circle end point monitoring factor DOUBLE POWER ON - - 0.001 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Factor for permissible radius difference. Defines the factor for large circles by which the starting radius and end radius may deviate from each other (see also MD 21000: CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST (circle end point monitoring constant). 21020 WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS C03, C06 A3 - Allowance for tool radius with working area limiting BOOLEAN RESET - - 7/2 - FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 0: The tool radius is not taken into account. 1: The tool radius is taken into account with respect to the working area limit. 21120 ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1 C07 F2 - Definition of reference axes for orientation axes BYTE NEW CONF 3 3 7/2 - 1, 2, 3 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-127 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: Defines the assignment of the rotations of the orientation axes around the reference axes for each channel (definition 1). This orientation description is activated with the G code ORIVIRT1 0: 1: 2: 3: No rotation Rotation around reference axis X Rotation around reference axis Y Rotation around reference axis Z Example : $MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 0 ] = 3 $MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 1 ] = 2 $MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 2 ] = 1 ; 1st ORI axis rotates around reference axis Z ; 2nd ORI axis rotates around reference axis Y ; 3rd ORI axis rotates around reference axis X 21130 ORIAX_TURN_TAB_2 C07 F2 - Definition of reference axes for orientation axes BYTE NEW CONF 3 3 7/2 - 1, 2, 3 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Defines the assignment of the rotations of the orientation axes around the reference axes for each channel (definition 2). This orientation description is activated with the G code ORIVIRT2 0: 1: 2: 3: No rotation Rotation around reference axis X Rotation around reference axis Y Rotation around reference axis Z Example : $MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 0 ] = 3 $MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 1 ] = 2 $MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 2 ] = 1 2-128 ; 1st ORI axis rotates around reference axis Z ; 2nd ORI axis rotates around reference axis Y ; 3rd ORI axis rotates around reference axis X (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 21150 JOG_VELO_RAPID_ORI C07 - rev/min JOG rapid traverse for orientation axes DOUBLE RESET - 3 10.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Velocity in JOG mode with rapid traverse override for orientation axes in the channel [degrees/min] 21155 JOG_VELO_ORI C07 - rev/min Jog feedrate for orientation axes DOUBLE RESET - 7/2 - 3 2.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Velocity in JOG mode for orientation axes in the channel 21170 ACCEL_ORI C07 - rev/s Acceleration for ORI axes DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/2 - 3 .05 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Acceleration for orientation axes in the channel (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-129 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 21190 TOFF_MODE C08 F2 - Mode of correction in tool direction BYTE RESET - - 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: This machine data specifies the online correction mode in tool direction via $AA_TOFF[ ]. Bit 0: Behavior of $AA_TOFF in case of a RESET 0: $AA_TOFF is deseclected in case of a RESET 1: $AA_TOFF is maintained also after RESET Bit 1: Effect of the value assignment on the 1st component of $AA_TOFF[ ] 0: absolute value 1: incremental value (integrator) Bit 2: Effect of the value assignment on the 0: absolute value 1: incremental value (integrator) 2nd component of $AA_TOFF[ ] Bit 3: Effect of the value assignment on the 3rd component of $AA_TOFF[ ] 0: absolute value 1: incremental value (integrator) 21194 TOFF_VELO C08 F2 mm/min Feedrate for online correction in tool direction DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0. - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Feedrate for online correction in tool direction [ mm/min ] via $AA_TOFF[ ] 2-130 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 21196 TOFF_ACCEL C08 F2 m/s Acceleration for online correction in tool direction DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 100. 1.0e-3 - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Acceleration for online correction in tool direction [ m/s**2 ] via $AA_TOFF[ ] 22000 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP - Auxiliary function group [aux. func. no. in channel]: 0 BYTE ... 63 C04 H2 POWER ON - 255 1 1 64 7/2 802d-cu3 64 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 64 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 64 - - - 2/2 - Description: see MD 22010: AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [n] (auxiliary function type) Anwendungsbeispiel: 22010 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE - Auxiliary function type [aux. func. no. in channel]: 0 ... STRING 63 C04 H2 POWER ON 255 7/2 - "" - - 802d-cu3 64 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 64 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 64 - - - 2/2 Description: Special cases: If the auxiliary function value of an auxiliary function is less than 0, then (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-131 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data all auxiliary functions of this type and extension are assigned to a group. related to: MD 11100: AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN 22020 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION C04 H2 - Auxiliary function extension [aux. func. no. in channel]: 0 ... 63 BYTE POWER ON - 255 0 0 99 7/2 802d-cu3 64 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 64 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 64 - - - 2/2 - Description: see MD 22010: AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [n] (auxiliary function type) Anwendungsbeispiel: 22030 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE C04 H2 - Auxiliary function value [aux. func. no. in channel]: 0 DWORD ... 63 POWER ON - 255 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 64 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 64 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 64 - - - 2/2 - Description: If the value in this MD is smaller than 0 all auxiliary functions of this type and this address extension are assigned to this group. See MD 22010: AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [n] (auxiliary function type) 2-132 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 22035 AUXFU_ASSIGN_SPEC C04 H2 - Output specification DWORD POWER ON - 255 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 64 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 64 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 64 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 64 - - - 2/2 Description: Specification of the output behavior of the user-defined auxiliary functions. Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 0 (LSB) = 1 -> Acknowledgement "normal" after an OB1 cycle 1 = 1 -> Acknowledgement "quick" with OB40 2 = 1 -> No predefined auxiliary function 3 = 1 -> No output to VDI (may only be set as a single bit) 4 = 1 -> Spindle reaction after acknowledgement by the PLC 5 = 1 -> Output before the motion 6 = 1 -> Output during the motion 7 = 1 -> Output at block end 8 = 1 -> No output after block search 22040 AUXFU_PREDEF_GROUP C04 H2 - Predefined auxiliary function groups BYTE POWER ON 33 64 7/2 - 1, 2, 4, 3 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Group assignment of predefined auxiliary functions The predefined groups cannot be changed for indices 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 22, 23, 24. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-133 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 22050 AUXFU_PREDEF_TYPE C04 H2 - Predefined auxiliary function type STRING POWER ON - 33 "M" - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The address codes of the predefined auxiliary functions are fix. This setting cannot be changed! 22060 AUXFU_PREDEF_EXTENSION C04 H2 - Predefined auxiliary function extension BYTE POWER ON 33 99 7/2 - 0, 1 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Address extension for predefined auxiliary functions: This setting can be changed only for indices 6 to 17! 22070 AUXFU_PREDEF_VALUE C04 H2 - Predefined auxiliary function value DWORD POWER ON 33 - 7/2 - 0, 1, 2, 17, 30, 6, 3, 4, 5, 19, 70, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, -1 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Value of predefined auxiliary functions: This setting cannot be changed! 2-134 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 22254 AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE C01, C03, C10 H2 - Additional M function to stop a program DWORD POWER ON - - -1 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: This machine data defines an additional, predefined M function behaving in the same way as M0. The value of the machine data corresponds to the number of the auxiliary M function. Predefined M numbers such as M0, M1, M2, M3, etc. are not allowed. Restriction: See MD 10715: M_NO_FCT_CYCLE Related to: $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP, $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR, $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE For external language mode: $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR For nibbling: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE 22256 AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE C01, C03, C10 H2 - Additional M function for conditional stop DWORD POWER ON - - -1 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-135 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: This machine data defines an additional, predefined M function behaving the same way as M1. The value of the machine data corresponds to the number of the auxiliary M function. Predefined M numbers such as M0, M1, M2, M3, etc. are not allowed. Restriction: See MD 10715: M_NO_FCT_CYCLE Related to: $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP, $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR, $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE For external language mode: $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN, $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR For nibbling: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE 22400 S_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET C04, C03, C05 S1 - S function active beyond RESET BOOLEAN POWER ON - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 1: The last S values set in the main run are still active after a RESET. 0: The various S values are equal to 0 after a RESET and must therefore be reprogrammed. 2-136 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 22410 F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET C04, C03, C05 V1 - F function active beyond RESET BOOLEAN POWER ON - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 1: The last programmed F, FA, OVR and OVRA values are still active after RESET. 0: The various values are set to their default values after reset. Related to: MD 22240: AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE Output time of the F functions 22534 TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE C04 M1 - M code for transformation changeover DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 99999999 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Number of M code that is output at the VDI interface in the case of a transformation changeover on the geometry axes. No M code is output if this MD is set to one of the values 0 to 6, 17 or 30. It is not monitored whether an M code created in this way will conflict with other functions. 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE C01, C11, C04, W1 C09 - New tool offset for M function BYTE POWER ON 1 7/2 - - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-137 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: The T function is used to select a tool in a program. The setting in this machine data determines whether the new tool is loaded immediately on execution of the T function: 1: The new tool is prepared for changing with the T function. This setting is used mainly on milling machines with a tool magazine, in order to bring the new tool into the tool change position without interrupting the machining process. The old tool is removed from the spindle with an M function and the new tool is loaded into the spindle. According to DIN 66025, this tool change is programmed using the M function M6. related to: 22910 WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE EXP, C01, C11 FBFA - Input resolution for scaling factor BOOLEAN POWER ON - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Definition of the unit for the scaling factor P and for the axial scaling factors I, J, K Meaning: 0 Scale factor in 0.001 1 Scale factor in 0.00001 Related to: DEFAULT_SCALEFACTOR_AXIS, DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_P 22914 AXES_SCALE_ENABLE EXP, C01, C11 FBFA - Activation for axial scaling factor ( G51 ) BOOLEAN POWER ON - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - 2-138 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: Axial scaling is enabled with this MD. Meaning: 0: axial scaling not possible 1: axial scaling possible -> MD DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS is active Related to: DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS 22920 EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_ON EXP, C01, C11 FBFA - Activation of fixed feedrates F1 - F9 BOOLEAN POWER ON - - 7/2 - FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This MD is used to activate the fixed feedrates from the setting data $SC_EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9[]. Meaning: 0: no fixed feedrates with F1 - F9 1: the feedrates set in setting data $SC_EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9[] will become active when programming F1 - F9 22930 EXTERN_PARALLEL_GEOAX - Assignment of a parallel channel axis to the geometry BYTE axis EXP, C01, C11 POWER ON FBFA 3 7/2 - 0 0 20 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Assignment table of the axes positioned parallel to the geometry axes. This table can be used to assign channel axes positioned parallel to the geometry axes. The parallel axes can then be activated as geometry axes in ISO mode using the G functions of plane selection (G17 - G19) and the axis name of the parallel axis. The axis is then replaced by the axis defined via $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[]. Prerequisite: The channel axes used must be active. ( list position assigned in AXCONF_MACHAX_USED ). Entering zero deactivates the corresponding parallel geometry axis: (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-139 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24020 FRAME_SUPPRESS_MODE C03 K2 - Positions for frame suppression DWORD POWER ON - - 0x0 0 0x0000003 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Bit mask for configuring the positions for frame suppressions (SUPA, G153, G53). The following rule applies: Bit 0: Positions for display (OPI) without frame suppression Bit 1: Position variables without frame suppression 24100 TRAFO_TYPE_1 C07 F2 - Type of 1st transformation DWORD NEW CONF - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 0 no transformation 256TRANSMIT transformation 512TRACYL transformation 513TRACYL transformation with X-Y-Z-C kinematics further transformations are not available with SINUMERIK 802D. Transformation type of 1st transformation: Irrelevant for: No transformations related to: TRAFO_TYPE_2 2-140 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 C07 F2 - Axis assignment for transformation 1 [axis index]: 0 BYTE ... 4 NEW CONF - 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 6 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 6 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 6 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 4 - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 6 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 6 - - - 2/2 - Description: Axis assignment at input of 1st transformation Example for Transmit: Index i assumes the values 0,1, 2 with TRANSMIT. $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[0]= channel axis number of axis perpendicular to rotary axis $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[1]=channel axis number of rotary axis $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[2]=channel axis number of axis parallel to rotary axis Example for TRACYL: see TRACYL section Irrelevant for: No transformation related to: TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 C07 F2 - Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes with transformation 1 [geometry axis number]: 0 ... 2 BYTE NEW CONF 3 20 7/7 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This MD specifies the channel axes on which the axes of the Cartesian coordinate system are mapped when transformation 1 is active. Index i assumes the values 0, 1, 2 with TRANSMIT. It refers to the first, second and third geometry axis. Irrelevant for: No transformation Anwendungsbeispiel: $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[0]= 2 ; 2nd channel axis related to: $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB, if no transformation is active. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-141 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24130 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_1 C07 M1,F2 - Tool handling with 1st active transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during the 1st transformation or externally. This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations. It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the transformation. In standard transformations, only the "inclined-axis transformation" fulfills this condition. If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP). The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations varies correspondingly. 24200 TRAFO_TYPE_2 C07 F2 - Definition of the 2nd transformation in the channel DWORD NEW CONF - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: This MD states the second available transformation in each channel. Same as TRAFO_TYPE_1, but for the second available transformation in the channel. References: /FB/, F2, "5-Axis Transformation" 2-142 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24210 TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 C07 F2 - Axis assignment for transformation 2 BYTE NEW CONF - 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 6 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 6 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 6 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 4 - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 6 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 6 - - - 2/2 - Description: TRAFO_AXES_IN_2(n) Axis assignment at input of 2nd to 8th transformation. Same meaning as for TRAFO_AXES_IN_1. 24220 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 C07 F2 - Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 2 BYTE NEW CONF - 3 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate system are mapped for active transformation 2. Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1. 24230 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_2 C07 M1,F2 - Tool handling with active 2nd transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - 7/7 - TRUE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during the 2nd transformation or externally. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-143 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations. It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis transformation" fulfills this condition. If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP). The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations varies correspondingly. 24300 TRAFO_TYPE_3 C07 F2 - Definition of the 3rd transformation in the channel DWORD NEW CONF - - 7/7 - 0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This MD states the third available transformation in each channel. Same as TRAFO_TYPE_1, but for the third available transformation in the channel. References: /FB/, F2, "5-Axis Transformation" 24310 TRAFO_AXES_IN_3 C07 F2 - Axis assignment for transformation 3 BYTE NEW CONF - 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Axis assignment at the input point of the 3rd transformation in the channel. Meaning is the same as TRAFO_AXES_IN_1, but for the third available transformation in the channel. 2-144 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24320 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_3 C07 F2 - Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 3 BYTE NEW CONF - 3 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate system are mapped for active transformation 3. Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1. 24330 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_3 C07 M1,F2 - Tool handling with active 3rd transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during the 3rd transformation or externally. This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations. It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with reference to to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis transformation" fulfills this condition. If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP). The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations varies correspondingly. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-145 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24400 TRAFO_TYPE_4 C07 F2 - Definition of the 4th transformation in the channel DWORD NEW CONF - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This MD states the fourth available transformation in each channel. Same as TRAFO_TYPE_1, but for the fourth available transformation in the channel. References: /FB/, F2, "5-Axis Transformation" 24410 TRAFO_AXES_IN_4 C07 F2 - Axis assignment for the 4th transformation in the channel BYTE NEW CONF - 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/- - Description: Axis assignment at the input point of the 4th transformation in the channel. Meaning is the same as TRAFO_AXES_IN_1, but for the fourth available transformation in the channel. 24420 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_4 C07 F2 - Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 4 BYTE NEW CONF - 3 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- - 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- 2-146 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate system are mapped for active transformation 4. Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1. 24426 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_4 C07 M1,F2 - Tool handling with active 4th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during the 4th transformation or externally. This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations. It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with reference to to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis transformation" fulfills this condition. If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP). The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations varies correspondingly. 24430 TRAFO_TYPE_5 C07 F2,M1 - Type of transformation 5 in the channel DWORD NEW CONF - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Type of transformation available as the fifth in the channel. See $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 for explanation. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-147 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24432 TRAFO_AXES_IN_5 C07 F2,M1 - Axis assignment for transformation 5 BYTE NEW CONF - 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/- - Description: Axis assignment at the input point of the 5th transformation. See TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation. 24434 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_5 C07 F2,M1 - Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 5 BYTE NEW CONF 3 20 7/7 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate system are mapped for active transformation 5. Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1. 24436 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_5 C07 M1,F2 - Tool handling with active 5th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- - 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during the 5th transformation or externally. This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations. 2-148 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis transformation" fulfills this condition. If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP). The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations varies correspondingly. 24440 TRAFO_TYPE_6 C07 F2,M1 - Type of transformation 6 in the channel DWORD NEW CONF - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Type of transformation available as the sixth in the channel. See $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 for explanation. 24442 TRAFO_AXES_IN_6 C07 F2,M1 - Axis assignment for transformation 6 BYTE NEW CONF 20 20 7/7 - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/- Description: Axis assignment at the input point of the 6th transformation. See TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-149 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24444 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_6 C07 F2,M1 - Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 6 BYTE NEW CONF - 3 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate system are mapped for active transformation 6. Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1. 24446 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_6 C07 M1,F2 - Tool handling with active 6th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during the 6th transformation or externally. This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations. It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis transformation" fulfills this condition. If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP). The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations varies correspondingly. 2-150 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24450 TRAFO_TYPE_7 C07 F2,M1 - Type of transformation 7 in the channel DWORD NEW CONF - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Type of transformation available as the seventh in the channel. See $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 for explanation. 24452 TRAFO_AXES_IN_7 C07 F2,M1 - Axis assignment for transformation 7 BYTE NEW CONF 20 20 7/7 - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/- Description: Axis assignment at the input point of the 7th transformation. See TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation. 24454 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_7 C07 F2,M1 - Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 7 BYTE NEW CONF - 3 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate system are mapped for active transformation 7. Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-151 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24456 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_7 C07 M1,F2 - Tool handling with active 7th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during the 7th transformation or externally. This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations. It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis transformation" fulfills this condition. If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP). The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations varies correspondingly. 24460 TRAFO_TYPE_8 C07 F2,M1 - Type of transformation 8 in the channel DWORD NEW CONF - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Type of transformation available as the eighth in the channel. See $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 for explanation. 2-152 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24462 TRAFO_AXES_IN_8 C07 F2,M1 - Axis assignment for transformation 8 BYTE NEW CONF - 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/- - Description: Axis assignment at the input point of the 8th transformation. See TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation. 24464 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_8 C07 F2,M1 - Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 8 BYTE NEW CONF 3 20 7/7 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate system are mapped for active transformation 8. Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1. 24466 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_8 C07 M1,F2 - Tool handling with 8th active transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- - 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during the 8th transformation or externally. This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-153 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis transformation" fulfills this condition. If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP). The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations varies correspondingly. 24470 TRAFO_TYPE_9 C07 M1 - Type of transformation 9 in the channel DWORD NEW CONF - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Type of transformation available as the ninth in the channel. See $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 for explanation. 24472 TRAFO_AXES_IN_9 C07 M1 - Axis assignment for transformation 9 BYTE NEW CONF 20 20 7/7 - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/- Description: Axis assignment at the input point of the 9th transformation. See TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation. 2-154 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24474 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_9 C07 M1 - Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 9 BYTE NEW CONF - 3 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate system are mapped for active transformation 9. 24476 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_9 C07 M1 - Treatment of tool with active 9th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - 7/7 - TRUE - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Same as TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_1, but for the 9th transformation. 24480 TRAFO_TYPE_10 C07 M1 - Transformation 10 in channel DWORD NEW CONF - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Same as TRAFO_TYPE_1, but for the tenth available transformation in the channel. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-155 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24482 TRAFO_AXES_IN_10 C07 M1 - Axis assignment for transformation 10 BYTE NEW CONF - 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7 802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/- - Description: Axis assignment at the input of the 10th transformation. See TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation. 24484 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_10 C07 M1 - Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes f. transformation 10 BYTE NEW CONF 3 20 7/7 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Assignment table of geometry axes with transformation 10 Same as AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB, but only effective when transformation 10 is active. 24486 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_10 C07 M1 - Treatment of tool with active 10th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- - 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Same as TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_1, but for the 10th transformation. 2-156 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24500 TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1 C07 F2 mm Offset vector of 5-axis transformation 1 DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data designates an offset of the workpiece carrier for the first (MD: TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1) or second (MD: TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2) 5-axis transformation of a channel and has a specific meaning for the different machine types: Machine type 1 (two-axis swivel head for tool): Vector from machine reference point to zero point of workpiece table. This will generally be a zero vector if both coincide. Machine type 2 (two-axis rotary table for workpiece): Vector from the second rotary joint of workpiece rotary table to zero point of table. Machine type 3 (single-axis rotary table for workpiece and single-axis swivel head for tool): Vector from rotary joint of workpiece table to zero point of table. MD irrelevant: if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. 24510 TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 C07 F2 degrees Position offset of rotary axes 1/2/3 for 5-axis transformation 1 DOUBLE NEW CONF 3 - 7/7 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This machine data designates the angular offset of the first or second rotary axis in degrees for the first 5-axis transformation of a channel. MD irrelevant: if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-157 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24520 TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 C07 F2 - Sign of rotary axis 1/2/3 for 5-axis transformation 1 BOOLEAN NEW CONF - 3 TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data designates the sign with which the two rotary axes are included in the first (MD: TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1) or the second (MD: TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2) 5-axis transformation of a channel. MD = 0 (FALSE): Sign is reversed. MD = 1 (TRUE) : Sign is not reversed and the traversing direction is defined according to AX_MOTION_DIR. This machine data does not mean that the rotational direction of the rotary axis concerned is to be reversed, but specifies whether its motion is in the mathematically positive or negative direction when the axis is moving in the positive direction. The result of a change to this machine data is not therefore a change in the rotational direction, but a change in the compensatory motion of the linear axes. However, if a directional vector and thus, implicitly, a compensatory motion is specified, the result is a change in the rotational direction of the rotary axis concerned. On a real machine, therefore, the machine data may be set to FALSE (or zero) only if the rotary axis is turning in an anti-clockwise direction when moving in a positive direction. MD irrelevant: if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. 24530 TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1 C07 F2 degrees Definition of pole range for 5-axis transformation 1 DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 7/7 - 2.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- 2-158 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: This MD designates a limit angle for the fifth axis of the first 5-axis transformation with the following properties: if the path runs below this angle past the pole, the traverse will pass through the pole. For the 5-axis transformation, the two orientation axes of the tool form a coordinate system of length and width circles on a spherical surface. If orientation programming (that is the orientation vector lies in a plane) leads the path so close past the pole that the angle defined by the MD is undershot then there is a deviation from the defined interpolation such that the interpolation runs through the pole. Alarm 14112 is output if this modification of the path gives a deviation greater than a tolerance defined by MD 24540: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1. MD irrelevant: If the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. Also irrelevant with programming in the machine coordinate system ORIMKS. Related to: MD: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT _2 24540 TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1 C07 F2 degrees End angle toler. with interpol. through pole for 5-axis DOUBLE transf. NEW CONF - - 2.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This MD designates an end angle tolerance for the fifth axis of the first (MD: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1) or the second (MD: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2) 5-axis transformation with the following properties: With the interpolation through the pole point, only the fifth axis moves, the fourth axis retains its starting position. If a motion is programmed that does not run exactly through the pole point but is to run near the pole within the area given by MD: TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT then there is a deviation from the defined path as the interpolation runs exactly through the pole point. This results in a deviation in the position of the end point of the fourth axis (the polar axis) from the programmed value. This MD defines the angle by which the polar axis may deviate from the programmed value with 5-axis transformation when switching from the programmed interpolation to the interpolation through the pole point. Alarm 14112 is output if there is a greater deviation and the interpolation is not executed. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-159 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data MD irrelevant: If the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. Also irrelevant with programming in the machine coordinate system ORIMKS. Related to: MD: TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1 and _2 24542 TRAFO5_POLE_TOL_1 C07 - degrees End angle tolerance for pole interpolation DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 0 - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: End angle tolerance for interpolation through the pole for the 1st 5/6-axis transformation. This MD is evaluated only by the generic 5/6-axis transformation. If the end orientation lies within the pole cone and within the tolerance cone specified by means of this MD, the pole axis does not move and retains it start position. The other rotary axis, however, moves to the programmed angle. This results in a deviation of the end orientation from the programmed orientation. The maximum active value of this MD is the value of MD TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1, which is used to define the pole cone. 24550 TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1 C07 F2 mm Vector of base tool on activation of 5-axis transformation 1 DOUBLE NEW CONF 3 - 7/7 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This MD specifies the vector of the base tool which takes effect when the first transformation (MD: TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1) or the second (MD: TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_2) is activated without a length compensation being selected. Programmed length compensations have an additive effect with respect to the base tool. 2-160 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data MD irrelevant: if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. 24558 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_1 C07 F2 mm Vector of kinematic table offset DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/7 - 3 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This machine data is only evaluated for generic 5-axis transformations with rotatable workpiece and rotatable tool (TRAFO_TYPE = 56, mixed kinematics). It indicates the part of the vector between table and turning head assigned to the table. Only the sum of this MD and MD TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET is entered in the transformation equations. A difference results only when reading the whole tool length using the function GETTCOR. In this case, only the MD TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET is considered. On a machine with mixed kinematics, this machine data can be used to assign the machine data of the 5-axis transformation and the parameters of the orientable tool holder uniquely to one another as follows: Orientable tool holder 1 2 3 4 5-axis transformation (1st transformation) TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1 TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_1 TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1 24560 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1 C07 F2 mm Vector of the kinem.offset of the 1st 5-axis transf. in DOUBLE channel NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- - 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-161 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: This machine data designates the vector from the first to the second joint for the first (MD: TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1) or second (MD: TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2) transformation of a channel and has a specific meaning for the various machine types: Machine type 1 (two-axis swivel head for tool) and: Machine type 2 (two-axis rotary table for workpiece): Vector from first to second joint of tool rotary head or workpiece rotary table. Machine type 3 (single-axis rotary table for workpiece and single-axis swivel head for tool): Vector from machine reference point to joint of workpiece table. MD irrelevant: if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. The same applies for 3-axis and 4-axis transformations. 24561 TRAFO6_JOINT_OFFSET_2_3_1 C07 - mm Vector of kinematic offset DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/7 - 3 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: In the case of 6-axis transformations, defines the offset between the 2nd and third rotary axes for the 1st transformation of each channel. 24562 TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 C07 F2 mm Offset of swivel point of 1st rotary axis on 5-axis transform. 1 DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: In the case of 5-axis transformation with swiveling linear axis, the value indicates the offset of the rotary axis which swivels the linear axis with reference to machine zero for the 1st transformation. 2-162 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data MD irrelevant for: other 5-axis transformations Related to: MD 24662 24564 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_1 C07 F2 degrees Nutating head angle in 5-axis transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 45.0 -89. 89. 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Angle between the second rotary axis and the axis corresponding to it in the rectangular coordinate system MD irrelevant for: Transformation type other than "universal milling head". Related to: TRAFO_TYPE_n 24566 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_1 C07 - - Virtual orientation axes BOOLEAN NEW CONF - 7/7 - - FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The MD has the following values: 0: The axis angles of the orientation axes are machine axis angles. 1: Virtual orientation axes are defined that form a rectangular coordinate system and the axis angles are rotations around these virtual axes. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-163 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24570 TRAFO5_AXIS1_1 C07 F2 - Direction of 1st rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The MD indicates the vector that describes the direction of the first rotary axis in the general 5-axis transformation (TRAFO_TYPE_* = 24). The vector can have any magnitude. Example: Both with (0, 1, 0) and with (0, 7.21, 0), the same axis is described (in the direction of the 2nd geometry axis, i.e. usually Y). Valid for the first transformation of a channel. 24572 TRAFO5_AXIS2_1 C07 F2 - Direction of 2nd rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Indicates the vector that describes the direction of the second rotary axis in the general 5-axis transformation (TRAFO_TYPE_* = 24, 40, 56). The vector can have any magnitude except zero. Example: Both with (0, 1, 0) and with (0, 7.21, 0), the same axis is described (in the direction of the 2nd geometry axis, i.e. usually Y). Valid for the first transformation of a channel. 2-164 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24573 TRAFO5_AXIS3_1 C07 - - Direction of third rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Indicates the vector which defines the direction of the third rotary axis in the case of the general 6-axis transformation (TRAFO_TYPE_* = 24, 40, 56, 57). The vector may have any value except zero. Example: The same axis is defined with both (0, 1, 0) and (0, 7.21, 0) (in the direction of the 2nd geometry axis, that is as a rule Y). Valid for the first orientation transformation of a channel. 24574 TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_1 C07 - - Vector of the tool base orientation for 5-axis transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Indicates the vector of the tool orientation in the general 5-axis transformation (TRAFO_TYPE_* = 24, 40, 56) if this is not defined on the transformation call or read from a programmed tool. The vector can have any magnitude except zero. 24576 TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_1 C07 - - Normal tool vector in 6-axis transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0, 1.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-165 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: Indicates a vector that is perpendicular to the tool orientation (TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENTATION_1) in the case of the general 6-axis transformation (TRAFO_TYPE_* = 24, 40, 56, 57). If TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_1 and TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENTATION_1 are neither orthogonal nor parallel, then the two vectors are orthogonalized by modifying the normal vector.The two vectors must not be parallel. The vector may have any value other than zero. Valid for the first orientation transformation of a channel. 24580 TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_1 C07 F2 - Direction of orientation vector for the first 5-axis transf. BYTE NEW CONF - - 2 0 2 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Indicates the direction of the orientation vector for the first 5-axis transformation for each channel. 0: Tool vector in x direction 1: Tool vector in y direction 2: Tool vector in z direction 24582 TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_1 C07 - - TCARR number for the first 5-axis transformation DWORD NEW CONF - - 7/7 - 0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: If the value of this machine data is not zero and if machine data $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_X that points to the first orientation transformation has value 72, the kinematics data (offsets etc.) that parameterize the first 5-axis transformation, will not be read from the machine data, but from the data of the orientable tool holder to which this machine data refers. 2-166 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24585 TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 C07 F2 - Orientation axis / channel axis assignment transformation 1 BYTE NEW CONF - 3 0 0 20 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Assignment table of the orientation axes for 5-axis transformation 1 Only active with active 5-axis transformation 1. 24590 TRAFO5_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR_1 C01, C07 - - Offset of transformation rotary axes from WO. BOOLEAN SOFORT - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: The programmable offset for orientation axes is automatically accepted from the work offset active for the orientation axes on switch-on of an orientation transformation. 24600 TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2 mm Offset vector of the 2nd 5-axis transformation in the DOUBLE channel C07 F2 NEW CONF 3 7/7 - 0.0 - - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-167 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: This machine data designates an offset of the workpiece carrier for the first (MD: TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1) or second (MD: TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2) 5-axis transformation of a channel and has a specific meaning for the different machine types: Machine type 1 (two-axis swivel head for tool): Vector from machine reference point to zero point of workpiece table. This will generally be a zero vector if both coincide. Machine type 2 (two-axis rotary table for workpiece): Vector from second joint of workpiece rotary table to zero point of table. Machine type 3 (single-axis rotary table for workpiece and single-axis swivel head for tool): Vector from joint of workpiece table to zero point of table. MD irrelevant: if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. 24610 TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 C07 - degrees Position offset of rotary axes 1/2/3 DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/7 - 3 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Indicates the offset for each channel of the rotary axes in degrees for the second orientation transformation. 24620 TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 C07 F2 - Sign of rotary axis 1/2/3 for 5-axis transformation 2 BOOLEAN NEW CONF - 3 TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data designates the sign with which the two rotary axes are included in the first (MD: TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1) or the second (MD: TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2) 5-axis transformation of a channel. 2-168 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data MD = 0 (FALSE): Sign is reversed. MD = 1 (TRUE) : Sign is not reversed and the traversing direction is defined according to AX_MOTION_DIR. This machine data does not mean that the rotational direction of the rotary axis concerned is to be reversed, but specifies whether its motion is in the mathematically positive or negative direction when the axis is moving in the positive direction. The result of a change to this data is not therefore a change in the rotational direction, but a change in the compensatory motion of the linear axes. However, if a directional vector and thus, implicitly, a compensatory motion is specified, the result is a change in the rotational direction of the rotary axis concerned. On a real machine, therefore, the machine data may be set to FALSE (or zero) only if the rotary axis is turning in an anti-clockwise direction when moving in a positive direction. MD irrelevant: if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. 24630 TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_2 C07 F2 degrees Definition of pole range for 5-axis transformation 2 DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 7/7 - 2.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This MD designates a limit angle for the fifth axis of the second 5-axis transformation with the following properties: if the path runs below this angle past the pole, the traverse will pass through the pole. For the 5-axis transformation, the two orientation axes of the tool form a coordinate system of length and width circles on a spherical surface. If orientation programming (that is the orientation vector lies in a plane) leads the path so close past the pole that the angle defined by this MD is undershot, then there is a deviation from the defined interpolation such that the interpolation runs through the pole. Alarm 14112 is output if this modification of the path gives a deviation greater than a tolerance defined by MD 24640: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-169 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data MD irrelevant: If the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. Also irrelevant with programming in the machine coordinate system ORIMKS. Related to: MD: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1 24640 TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2 degrees End angle toler. with interpol. through pole for 5-axis DOUBLE transf. C07 F2 NEW CONF - 7/7 - 2.0 - - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This MD designates an end angle tolerance for the fifth axis of the second 5axis transformation with the following properties: With the interpolation through the pole point, only the fifth axis moves, the fourth axis retains its starting position. If a motion is programmed that does not run exactly through the pole point but is to run near the pole within the area given by MD: TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT then there is a deviation from the defined path as the interpolation runs exactly through the pole point. This results in a deviation in the position of the end point of the fourth axis (the polar axis) from the programmed value. This MD defines the angle by which the polar axis may deviate from the programmed value with 5-axis transformation when switching from the programmed interpolation to the interpolation through the pole point. An error message (alarm 14112) is output if there is a greater deviation and the interpolation is not executed. MD irrelevant: If the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. Also irrelevant with programming in the machine coordinate system ORIMKS. Related to: MD: TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1 2-170 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24642 TRAFO5_POLE_TOL_2 C07 - degrees End angle tolerance for pole interpolation DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 0 - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: End angle tolerance for interpolation through the pole for the 2nd 5/6-axis transformation. This MD is evaluated only by the generic 5/6-axis transformation. If the end orientation lies within the pole cone and within the tolerance cone specified by means of this MD, the pole axis does not move and retains it start position. The other rotary axis, however, moves to the programmed angle. This results in a deviation of the end orientation from the programmed orientation. The maximum active value of this MD is the value of MD TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2, which is used to define the pole cone. 24650 TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_2 C07 F2 mm Vector of base tool on activation of 5-axis transformation 2 DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- - 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This MD indicates the vector of the base tool which takes effect when the first transformation is activated without a length compensation being selected. Programmed length compensations have an additive effect with respect to the base tool. MD irrelevant: if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-171 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24658 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_2 C07 F2 mm Vector of kinematic table offset DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Same as MD 24558: TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_1, but for the second transformation. 24660 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2 C07 F2 mm Vector of the kinem.offset of the 2nd 5-axis transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF 3 - 7/7 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This machine data designates the vector from the first to the second joint for the first (MD: TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1) or second (MD: TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2) transformation of a channel and has a specific meaning for the various machine types: Machine type 1 (two-axis swivel head for tool) and: Machine type 2 (two-axis rotary table for workpiece): Vector from first to second joint of tool rotary head or workpiece rotary table. Machine type 3 (single-axis rotary table for workpiece and single-axis swivel head for tool): Vector from machine reference point to joint of workpiece table. MD irrelevant: if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. The same applies for 3-axis and 4-axis transformations. 2-172 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24661 TRAFO6_JOINT_OFFSET_2_3_2 C07 - mm Vector of kinematic offset DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: As TRAFO6_JOINT_OFFSET_2_3_1 but for the second transformation. 24662 TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 C07 F2 mm Offset swivel point of 2nd 5-axis transf. (swivelled lin.axis) DOUBLE NEW CONF 3 - 7/7 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: In the case of 5-axis transformation with swiveled linear axis, the value indicates the offset of the rotary axis which swivels the linear axis with reference to machine zero for the 2nd transformation. MD irrelevant for: other 5-axis transformations Related to: MD 24562 24664 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_2 C07 F2 degrees Nutating head angle DOUBLE NEW CONF 89. 7/7 - - 45.0 -89. 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-173 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: Angle between the second rotary axis and the axis corresponding to it in the rectangular coordinate system MD irrelevant for: Transformation type other than "universal milling head" Related to: TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_1 24666 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_2 C07 - - Virtual orientation axes BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - FALSE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The MD has the following values: 0: The axis angles of the orientation axes are machine axis angles. 1: Virtual orientation axes are defined that form a rectangular coordinate system and the axis angles are rotations around these virtual axes. 24670 TRAFO5_AXIS1_2 C07 F2 - Direction of 1st rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/7 - 3 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: As for TRAFO5_AXIS1_1 but for the second orientation transformation of a channel. 2-174 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24672 TRAFO5_AXIS2_2 C07 F2 - Direction of 2nd rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: As for TRAFO5_AXIS2_1 but for the second transformation of a channel. 24673 TRAFO5_AXIS3_2 C07 - - Direction of third rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: As TRAFO5_AXIS3_1 but for the second orientation transformation of a channel. 24674 TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_2 C07 F2 - Basic tool orientation DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/7 - 3 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: As for TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_1 but for the second transformation of a channel. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-175 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24676 TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_2 C07 - - Normal tool vector DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0, 1.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: As TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_1 but for the second orientation transformation 24680 TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_2 C07 F2 - Direction of orientation vector BYTE NEW CONF - - 2 0 2 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Indicates the direction of the orientation vector for the second 5-axis transformation for each channel. 0: Tool vector in x direction 1: Tool vector in y direction 2: Tool vector in z direction 24682 TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_2 - TCARR number for the second 5-axis transformation DWORD C07 NEW CONF - - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- - 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Same as TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_1, but for the second orientation transformation. 2-176 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24685 TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 C07 F2 - Orientation axis / channel axis assignment transformation 1 BYTE NEW CONF - 3 0 0 20 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Assignment table of the orientation axes for 5-axis transformation 2 Only active with active 5-axis transformation 2. 24690 TRAFO5_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR_2 C01, C07 - - Offset of transformation rotary axes from WO. BOOLEAN SOFORT - - 7/2 - FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Same as TRAFO5_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR_1, but for the 2nd transformation of a channel 24700 TRAANG_ANGLE_1 C07 M1 degrees Angle between Cartesian axis and real (inclined) axis DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Indicates for the first agreed TRAANG transformation of the channel the angle of the inclined axis in degrees between the 1st machine axis and the 1st basic axis while TRAANG is active. The angle is measured positively clockwise. Related to: TRAANG_ANGLE_2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-177 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24710 TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1 C07 M1 mm Vector of base tool for 1st TRAANG transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 1st TRAANG transformation. The offset is referenced to the geometry axes valid when TRAANG is active. The basic offset is included with and without selection of the tool length compensation. Programmed length corrections have an additive effect with respect to the basic tool. The index i takes the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes. Related to: $MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2 24720 TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 C07 M1 - Velocity margin for 1st TRAANG transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - 1.0 7/7 - 0.0 0.0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Indicates the axis velocity reserve for jog, positioning and oscillating movements for each channel for the first TRAANG transformation, which is held ready on the parallel axis (see $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_n[1]) for the compensating movement. Velocity reserve to be provided for jog, positioning and oscillating movements on the parallel axis to handle the compensating movement as a consequence of the inclined axis. 0.0 means that the control or the transformation itself determines the reserve according to the angle of the inclined axis and the velocity capacity of the inclined and parallel axes. - The criterion for this is that the same speed limit is to be maintained in the direction of the parallel axis and the vertical (virtual) axis. 2-178 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data >0.0 means that a fixed reserve has been set (TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 * MAX_AX_VELO of the parallel axis). The velocity capacity in the virtual axis is determined by this. The lower TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 has been set, the lower it is Related to: TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2 24721 TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_1 C07 M1 - Acceleration margin of parallel axis for the 1st TRAANG transf. DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 0.0 1.0 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Indicates the acceleration margin for jog, positioning and oscillating movements which is held ready on the parallel axis (see $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_n[1]) for the compensatory movement; MD setting applies to the first TRAANG transformation for each channel. Related to: $MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 24750 TRAANG_ANGLE_2 degrees Angle between Cartesian axis and real (inclined) axis DOUBLE C07 NEW CONF M1 - 7/7 - 0.0 - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Indicates for the second agreed TRAANG transformation of the channel the angle of the inclined axis in degrees between the 1st machine axis and the 1st basic axis while TRAANG is active. The angle is measured positively clockwise. Related to: TRAANG_ANGLE_1 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-179 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24760 TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2 C07 M1 mm Vector of base tool for 2nd TRAANG transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 2nd TRAANG transformation. The offset is referenced to the geometry axes valid when TRAANG is active. The basic offset is included with and without selection of the tool length compensation. Programmed length corrections have an additive effect with respect to the basic tool. The index i takes the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes. Related to: $MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1 24770 TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_2 C07 M1 - Velocity margin for 2nd TRAANG transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 0.0 1.0 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Indicates the axis velocity reserve for jog, positioning and oscillating movements which is held ready on the parallel axis (see $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_n[1]) for the compensatory movement; MD setting applies to the second TRAANG transformation for each channel. Related to: TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2 2-180 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24771 TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2 C07 M1 - Acceler. margin of parallel axis for the 2nd TRAANG DOUBLE transform. NEW CONF - - 0.0 0.0 1.0 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Indicates the axis acceleration margin for jog, positioning and oscillating movements which is held ready on the parallel axis (see $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_n[1]) for the compensatory movement; MD setting applies to the second TRAANG transformation for each channel. Related to: $MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_RES_1 24800 TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 C07 M1 degrees Offset of rotary axis for the TRACYL transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Specifies the offset of the rotary axis in degrees in relation to the zero position while TRACYL is active for the first declared TRACYL transformation for each channel. Irrelevant for: No TRACYL active Anwendungsbeispiel: $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1=15.0 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-181 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24805 TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 C07 - - Rotary axis offset TRACYL 1 BYTE NEW CONF - - 0 0 2 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 0: axial rotary axis offset is not considered. 1: axial rotary axis offset is considered. 2: axial rotary axis offset is considered until SZS. SZS frames include transformed axial rotary axis offsets. 24808 TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_1 C07 M1 - TRACYL mode selection BYTE NEW CONF - - 0 0 1 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Default setting of TRACYL type 514: 0: without groove side offset (i.e. TRACYL type 514 - equals 512) 1: with groove side offset (i.e. TRACYL type 514 - equals 513) With $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_.. = 514 it can be decided via the selection parameters, whether calculation is made with or without groove side offset. The parameter will define the variable to be selected, if no selection is made in the call parameters. If $MC_TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_1 = 1, it will be sufficient to program TRACYL(30) in the part program instead of TRACYL(30,1,1). 2-182 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24810 TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 C07 M1 - Sign of rotary axis for the TRACYL transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Specifies the sign which is applied to the rotary axis during the TRACYL transformation for the TRACYL transformation. Irrelevant for: No TRACYL transformation Anwendungsbeispiel: $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 = 1 24820 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 mm Vector of base tool for TRACYL transformation, [Geo-DOUBLE Axis-Index]: 0 ... 2 C07 M1 NEW CONF 3 7/7 - 0.0 - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: MD specifies the distance of the tool zero point referred to the appropriate geometry axes valid with TRACYL active and without tool length offset selected for the TRACYL transformation. Programmed length compensations are added to the base tool. Index i assumes values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes. Irrelevant for: No TRACYL transformation Anwendungsbeispiel: $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1[0]=tx (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-183 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24850 TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 C07 M1 degrees Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd TRACYL transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Indicates the offset of the rotary axis in degrees in relation to the neutral position for the 2nd agreed TRACYL transformation for each channel. MD irrelevant: If no TRACYL is active Related to: TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 24855 TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 C07 - - Rotary axis offset TRACYL 2 BYTE NEW CONF - - 0 0 2 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 0: axial rotary axis offset is not considered. 1: axial rotary axis offset is considered. 2: axial rotary axis offset is considered until SZS. SZS frames include transformed axial rotary axis offsets. 24858 TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_2 C07 M1 - TRACYL mode selection BYTE NEW CONF - - 0 0 1 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 2-184 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: Default setting of TRACYL type 514 for the 2nd TRACYL: 0: without groove side offset (i.e. TRACYL type 514 - equals 512) 1: with groove side offset (i.e. TRACYL type 514 - equals 513) With $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_.. = 514 it can be decided via the selection parameters, whether calculation is made with or without groove side offset. The parameter defines the variable to be selected, if no selection is made in the call parameters. If $MC_TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_2 = 1, it will be sufficient to program TRACYL(30,2) in the part program instead of TRACYL(30,2,1). 24860 TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 C07 M1 - Sign of rotary axis for 2nd TRACYL transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - 7/7 - TRUE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Indicates the sign with which the rotary axis is taken into account in the TRACYL transformation for the 2nd agreed TRACYL transformation for each channel. Related to: TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 24870 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_2 C07 M1 mm Vector of base tool for 2nd TRACYL transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 2ndTRACYL transformation. The offset is referenced to the geometry axes valid when TRACYL is active. The basic offset is included with and without selection of the tool length compensation. Programmed length corrections have an additive effect with respect to the basic tool. The index i takes the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes. Related to: $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-185 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24900 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 C07 M1 degrees Position offset of rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Specifies the offset of the rotary axis in degrees in relation to the zero position - while TRANSMIT is active - for the TRANSMIT transformation. Irrelevant for: No TRANSMIT active Anwendungsbeispiel: $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1=15.0 24905 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 C07 - - Rotary axis offset TRANSMIT 1 BYTE NEW CONF 2 7/7 - - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 0: axial rotary axis offset is not considered. 1: axial rotary axis offset is considered. 2: axial rotary axis offset is considered until SZS. SZS frames include transformed rotations around the rotary axis. 24910 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 C07 M1 - Sign of rotary axis BOOLEAN NEW CONF - 7/7 - - TRUE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 2-186 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: Specifies the sign which is applied to the rotary axis during the TRANSMIT transformation for the TRANSMIT transformation. Irrelevant for: No TRANSMIT transformation Anwendungsbeispiel: $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1= 1 24911 TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1 C07 M1 - Restriction of working range in front of/behind pole BYTE NEW CONF - 2 7/7 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Restriction of working range in front of/behind pole or no restrictions, i.e. traversal through pole. The setpoints have the following meanings: 0: No restrictions of working range. Traversal through pole. 1: Working range of (if tool length 2: Working range of (if tool length linear axis for positions >=0, compensation parallel to linear axis equals 0) linear axis for positions <=0, compensation parallel to the linear axis equals 0) 24920 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 C07 M1 mm Vector of base tool on activation of transformation, [Geo-Axis-Index]]: 0 ... 2 DOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: MD specifies the distance of the tool zero point referred to the appropriate geometry axes valid with TRANSMIT active and without tool length offset selected for the TRANSMIT transformation. Programmed length compensations are added to the base tool. Index i assumes values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes. Irrelevant for: No TRANSMIT transformation Anwendungsbeispiel: $MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1[0]=20.0 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-187 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24950 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 C07 M1 degrees Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd TRANSMIT transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Indicates the offset of the rotary axis for the second agreed TRANSMIT transformation in degrees in relation to the neutral position while TRANSMIT is active. Related to: TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 24955 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 C07 - - Rotary axis offset TRANSMIT 2 BYTE NEW CONF 2 7/7 - - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 0: axial rotary axis offset is not considered. 1: axial rotary axis offset is considered. 2: axial rotary axis offset is considered until SZS. SZS frames include transformed rotations around the rotary axis. 24960 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 C07 M1 - Sign of rotary axis for 2nd TRANSMIT transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - TRUE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - 2-188 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: Indicates the sign with which the rotary axis is taken into account in the TRANSMIT transformation for the second agreed TRANSMIT transformation for each channel. Related to: TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 24961 TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_2 C07 M1 - Restr. of working range before/behind the pole, 2. TRANSMIT BYTE NEW CONF - 2 7/7 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Restriction of working area in front of/behind pole or no restriction, i.e. traversal through pole. The assigned values have the following meanings: 1: Working area of linear axis for positions >=0, (if tool length compensation parallel to linear axis equals 0) 2: Working area of linear axis for positions <=0, (if tool length compensation parallel to linear axis equals 0) 0: No restriction of working area. Traversal through pole. 24970 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2 C07 M1 mm Vector of base tool for 2nd TRANSMIT transformationDOUBLE NEW CONF - 3 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 2nd TRANSMIT transformation. The offset is referenced to the geometry axes valid when TRANSMIT is active. The basic offset is included with and without selection of the tool length compensation. Programmed length corrections have an additive effect with respect to the basic tool. The index i takes the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes. Related to: $MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-189 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24995 TRACON_CHAIN_1 C07 M1 - Transformation grouping DWORD NEW CONF - 4 0 0 8 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Transformation chain of the first concatenated transformation. In the table, the numbers of the transformations which are to be concatenated are given in the order in which the transformation has to be executed from BCS into MCS. Example: A machine can be operated optionally either as a 5-axis machine or as a transmit machine. A linear axis is not arranged at a right-angles to the other linear axes (inclined axis). 5 transformations must be set via the machine data, e.g. TRAFO_TYPE_1 = 16 (5-axis transformation) TRAFO_TYPE_2 = 256 (Transmit) TRAFO_TYPE_3 = 1024 (Inclined axis) TRAFO_TYPE_4 = 8192 (Concatenated transformation) TRAFO_TYPE_5 = 8192 (Concatenated transformation) If the 4th transformation concatenates the 5-axis transformation / inclined axis and the 5th transformation concatenates the transmit / inclined axis, then (1, 3, 0, 0) is entered in the first table TRACON_CHAIN_1, and (2, 3, 0, 0) in the table TRACON_CHAIN_2. The entry 0 means no transformation. The order in which the transformations are assigned (TRAFO_TYPE_1 to TRAFO_TYPE_8) is arbitrary. The linked transformations do not have to be the last. However, they must always stand behind all the transformations which occur in a transformation chain. In the previous example, this means that, e.g. the third and fourth transformations must not be switched. However, it would be possible to define a further, sixth transformation, if this does not go into a linked transformation. Transformations cannot be linked with one another at will. The following limitations apply in SW version 5: The first transformation in the chain must be an orientation transformation (3- , 4- , 5-axis transformation, nutator) transmit or peripheral curve transformation. The second transformation must be an inclined axis transformation. No more than two transformations may be linked. 2-190 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 24996 TRACON_CHAIN_2 C07 M1 - Transformation grouping DWORD NEW CONF - 4 0 0 8 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Transformation chain of the first concatenated transformation. In the table, the numbers of the transformations which are to be concatenated are given in the order in which the transformation has to be executed from BCS into MCS. Example: A machine can be operated optionally either as a 5-axis machine or as a transmit machine. A linear axis is not arranged at a right-angles to the other linear axes (inclined axis). Transformation chain of the second concatenated transformation. Example: 5 transformations must be set via the machine data TRAFO_TYPE_1 = 16 (5-axis transformation) TRAFO_TYPE_2 = 256 (Transmit) TRAFO_TYPE_3 = 1024 (Inclined axis) TRAFO_TYPE_4 = 8192 (Concatenated transformation) TRAFO_TYPE_5 = 8192 (Concatenated transformation) If the 4th transformation concatenates the 5-axis transformation / inclined axis and the 5th transformation concatenates the transmit / inclined axis, then (1, 3, 0, 0) is entered in the first table TRACON_CHAIN_1, and (2, 3, 0, 0) in the table TRACON_CHAIN_2. The entry 0 means no transformation. The order in which the transformations are assigned (TRAFO_TYPE_1 to TRAFO_TYPE_8) is arbitrary. The cocatenated transformations do not have to be the last. However, they must always follow all the transformations which occur in a transformation chain. In the previous example, this means that, e.g. the third and fourth transformations must not be switched. However, it would be possible to define a further, sixth transformation, if this does not go into a concatenated transformation. Transformations cannot be concatenated with one another at will. The following limitations apply in SW version 5: The first transformation in the chain must be an orientation transformation (3- , 4- , 5-axis transformation, nutator) transmit or peripheral curve transformation. The second transformation must be an inclined axis transformation. No more than two transformations may be concatenated. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-191 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 24997 TRACON_CHAIN_3 C07 M1 - Transformation grouping DWORD NEW CONF - 4 0 0 8 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Transformation chain of the third concatenated transformation. See TRACON_CHAIN_1 for documentation. 24998 TRACON_CHAIN_4 C07 M1 - Transformation grouping DWORD NEW CONF 8 7/7 - 4 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Transformation chain of the fourth concatenated transformation. See TRACON_CHAIN_1 for documentation. 26000 PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTIN C01, C09 N4 - Hardware assignment for input byte for stroke control DWORD POWER ON - - 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Assignment of the high-speed input byte for "punching and nibbling" Bit 0-7: Number of the input byte used Bit 8-15: Free Bit 16-23: Inversion mask for writing the hardware byte Bit 24-31: Free 2-192 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data This data defines which input byte is to be used for the signal "travel active". = 1: On-board inputs (4 high-speed NCK outputs) are used. 2, 3, 4, 5 The external digital NCK inputs are used 128-129: Comparator byte (results from high-speed analog inputs or VDI specification) Related to: NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[n] References: /FB/, A4, Digital and Analog NCK I/Os The signal is high active as default from software 3.2. That is there is wire break monitoring. If the signal is low active then, e.g., the MD must be set to the value MD ="H 0001 0001" for the outboard inputs. 26002 PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTOUT C01, C09 N4 - Hardware assignment for output byte for stroke control DWORD POWER ON - - 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This data defines which output byte is to be used for the stroke control. Number of the high-speed output byte for "punching and nibbling" Bit 0-7: Number of the output byte used Bit 8-15: Free Bit 16-23: Inversion mask for writing the hardware byte Bit 24-31: Free Possible inputs: 1: 840D on-board outputs (4 high-speed + 4 bits via VDI specification) 2, 3, 4, 5 External digital outputs (high-speed NCK O/I or VDI specification) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-193 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Related to: NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK[n] References: /FB/, A4, Digital and Analog NCK I/Os 26004 NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK C01, C09 N4 - Mask for fast output bits BYTE POWER ON - 8 1, 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Mask for high-speed output bits for punching and nibbling. Byte 1: Contains the bit for stroke release Bytes 2-8: Currently free Special cases: Only NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK[0] is significant. This is used to define the output bit for the signal "Release stroke". Related to: PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTOUT 26006 NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK C01, C09 N4 - Mask for fast input bits BYTE POWER ON - 8 1, 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This data can define up to 8 byte masks for the output of the high-speed bits. The standard assignment of this data is as follows: 2-194 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[0]=1: 2 = first bit for the first punch interface (SPIF1) NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[1]=4: Second punch interface (SPIF2), not available as standard NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[2]=0 ... NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[7]=0 Note: The significance of the bit to be defined must be input as a value (refer to MD 26004: NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK[n]). Special cases: Only NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[0] is relevant. This is used to define the input bit for the signal "Stroke active". Related to: PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTIN 26008 NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE C09 N4 - Definition of M functions DWORD POWER ON - 8 0,23,22, 25, 26 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This data defines the special M functions for punching and nibbling. NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[0] NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[1] NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[2] NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[3] NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[4] NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[5] = 0 = 23 = 22 = 25 = 26 =122 NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[6] =125 NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[7] = 0 Standard value Example 20 End punching, nibbling with M20 23 End punching, nibbling with M23 22 Start nibbling 25 Start punching 26 Activate dwell time 122 Start nibbling with pretension, stroke control at servo level 125 Start punching with pretension, stroke control at servo level 0 Not used (in preparation) Special cases: If MD: PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION = 2 (M functions are interpreted directly by the software), then MD: NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[0] =20 has to be set. Related to: PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-195 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 26010 PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK C09 N4 - Definition of punching and nibbling axes DWORD POWER ON - - 7,0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Defines the axes involved in punching and nibbling. That is all the axes defined here must be at rest during punching and nibbling. Related to: PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE 26012 PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION C09 N4 - Activation of punching and nibbling functions DWORD POWER ON - - 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This MD defines the ways in which punching and nibbling functions can be activated: PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION = 0 None of the punching or nibbling functions can be activated. The automatic path segmentation is the only exception if it is enabled via MD: PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING. PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION = 1 The functions are activated via language commands. If M functions are to be used, then they must be programmed using macros. PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION = 2 The M functions are interpreted directly by the software. Language commands can still be used. Note: This option is intended only as a temporary solution. Related to: PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[n] 2-196 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 26014 PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING C09 N4 - Activation of automatic path segmentation DWORD POWER ON - - 2 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: Activation data for automatic path segmentation. Value Significance -----------------------------------------------------------------0 = Automatic path segmentation only active with punching and nibbling. 1 = Automatic path segmentation can also be activated without punching and nibbling functions; that is, it is programmable and be used NC internally 2 = Automatic path segmentation can only be used NC internally; that is it cannot be programmed. 26016 PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE C09 N4 - Behavior of individual axes with automatic path segmentation DWORD POWER ON - - 1,0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data defines how single axes that are also nibbling axes within the meaning of MD: PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK are to behave. In this case, there are the following options for the behavior of the single axes during path segmentation and stroke control: (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-197 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE = 0 No special behavior during automatic path segmentation. If the single axes are programmed together with path axes in one block then their total traversing path is split up according to the path axes. That is the pure geometric relationship between the single axes and path axes is identical to the undivided motion. If the single axes are programmed without the path axes but with SPN=<value> then the path is divided accordng to the programmed SPN value. PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE = 1 In this case, the path of the single axes, if they are programmed together with path axes, are generally traversed in the first section (that is independently of the currently active type of interpolation). PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE = 2 In this case the single axes behave with linear interpolation in the same way as with PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE = 1, with all other types of interpolation, in the same way as with PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE = 0. Related to: PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK 26018 NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME C09 N4 s Delay time for nibbling/punching with G603 DOUBLE POWER ON - - 0. - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: To minimize any dead times due to the reaction time of the punching unit, it is possible to release the stroke before reaching the in-position window of the axes. The reference time for this is the interpolation end. Since there is normally a delay of some interpolation cycles after reaching the interpolation end (depending on the machine dynamics) until the axes actually come into position, the prestart time is a delay time with respect to reaching the interpolation end. The function is therefore coupled to G603 (block change at the end of interpolation). The time can be set via the machine data NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME). Example: With an interpolation cycle of 5 s, a stroke shall be released 2 cycles after reaching the interpolation end. In this case, the value 0.010 s must be selected for NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME. If a value that is not integrally divisible by the set interpolation time is selected, then the stroke is initiated in the interpolation cycle following the set time. 2-198 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 26020 NIBBLE_SIGNAL_CHECK C09 N4 - Alarm on chattering punching signal DWORD POWER ON - - 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: When stroke active signal is set, for example by punch overshoots between the strokes, then the interpolation is stopped. It is also possible to generate the message "unclean punch signal" as a function of machine data NIBBLE_SIGNAL_CHECK. 0: No error message when the punching signal is irregular 1: Alarm, when the punching signal is irregular between strokes 27100 ABSBLOCK_FUNCTION_MASK N01 - Parameterize the block display with absolute values DWORD POWER ON - - 0x0 0 0x1 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Parameterization of the "block display with absolute values" function Bit 0 = 1 : The position values of the transverse axis are always displayed as diameter values. Transverse axes can be applied via MD20100 or MD30460, bit2. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-199 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 27200 MMC_INFO_NO_UNIT EXP, - - - HMI info (without physical unit) DOUBLE POWER ON - 80 45., 2., 0., -1., 100., 1. - 0/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: 27201 MMC_INFO_NO_UNIT_STATUS EXP, - - - HMI status info (without physical unit) BYTE POWER ON 80 - 0/2 - 1 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: 27202 MMC_INFO_POSN_LIN EXP, - - mm HMI info (linear positions) DOUBLE POWER ON - 0/2 - 50 0., 1., 100., 1000. - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: - 2-200 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 27203 MMC_INFO_POSN_LIN_STATUS EXP, - - - HMI status info (linear positions) BYTE POWER ON - 50 1 - - 0/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: 27204 MMC_INFO_VELO_LIN EXP, - - mm/min HMI info (linear velocities) DOUBLE POWER ON - 0/2 - 16 10., 2000., 10000., 300., 1000.,0. - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: 27205 MMC_INFO_VELO_LIN_STATUS EXP, - - - HMI status info (linear velocities) BYTE POWER ON - 0/2 - 16 1,0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: - (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-201 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 27206 MMC_INFO_CUT_SPEED EXP, - - m/min HMI info (cutting speed) DOUBLE POWER ON - 5 100.,0. - - 0/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: 27207 MMC_INFO_CUT_SPEED_STATUS EXP, - - - HMI status info (cutting speed) BYTE POWER ON - 5 1,0 - - 0/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: 27208 MMC_INFO_REV_FEED EXP, - - mm/rev HMI info (feed) DOUBLE POWER ON - 0/2 - 10 1.,0.100,0. - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: - 2-202 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 27209 MMC_INFO_REV_FEED_STATUS EXP, - - - HMI status info (feed) BYTE POWER ON - 10 1,0 - - 0/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: 27400 OEM_CHAN_INFO A01, A11 - - OEM version information STRING POWER ON - 3 "" - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: A version information freely available to the user (is indicated in the version screen) 27800 TECHNOLOGY_MODE C09 A2 - Technology in channel BYTE NEW CONF - 7/2 - - 0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 21 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 21 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Selection of the technology for display and operating purposes (HMI) 0: Milling 1: Turning This makes technology-dependent displays and softkeys available in the HMI. Special cases: (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-203 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 27860 PROCESSTIMER_MODE C09 K1 - Activating the program runtime measurement DWORD RESET - - 0x00 0 0x0FF 7/2 802d-cu3 - 0x07 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 0x07 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 0x07 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 0x00 - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - 0x07 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 0x07 - - 2/2 - Description: The channel-specific timers can be activated/deactivated through this machine data. Meaning: Bit 0 = 0No measurement of the total runtime for all part programs Bit 0 = 1The measurement of the total runtime for all part programs is active ( $AC_OPERATING_TIME ) Bit 1 = 0No measurement of the current program runtime Bit 1 = 1The measurement of the current program runtime is active ( $AC_CYCLE_TIME ) Bit 2 = 0No measurement of the tool cutting time Bit 2 = 1The measurement of the tool cutting time is active ( $AC_CUTTING_TIME ) Bit 3 Reserved Further bits only for Bit 0, 1, 2 = 1: Bit 4 = 0No measurement with active dry run feedrate Bit 4 = 1Measurement also with active dry run feed Bit 5 = 0No measurement in program test Bit 5 = 1Measurement also in program test Bit 6, 7 Reserved Anwendungsbeispiel: Special cases: It is recommended that timers that are never used are deactivated. This helps the free-up computational time other user applications. 27880 PART_COUNTER C09 K1 - Activation of the workpiece counters DWORD RESET - - 0x0 0 0x0FFFF 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/2 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/2 2-204 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: The workpiece counters can be set with this machine data. Meaning of the individual Bits: Bit 0 - 3:Activation $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS ---------------------------------------------Bit 0 = 1:Counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS is active Further meaning Bit 1-3 only when bit 0 =1: Bit 1 = 0:Alarm IS output when $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS matches $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS Bit 1 = 1:Alarm IS output when $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS matches $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS Bit 2, 3Reserved Bit 4 - 7:Activation $AC_TOTAL_PARTS ------------------------------------------BBit 4 = 1: Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is active Further meaning Bit 5-7 only when Bit 4 =1: Bit 5 = 0:Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on output of M2/M30. Bit 5 = 1:Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on the M command from MD 27882: PART_COUNTER_MCODE[0] Bit 6 = 0:Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS also active in program test/block search Bit 6 = 1:no processing $AC_TOTAL_PARTS in program test/block search Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 - 11:Activation $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS -------------------------------------------Bit 8 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is active Further meaning Bit 9-11 only when Bit 8 =1: Bit 9 = 0:Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on output of M2/M30. Bit 9 = 1:Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on the M command from MD 27882: PART_COUNTER_MCODE[1] Bit 10 = 0:Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS also active in program test/block search Bit 10 = 1:no processing $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS in program test/block search Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 - 15:Activation $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS --------------------------------------------Bit 12 = 1:Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is active Further meaning Bit 13-15 only when Bit 12 =1: Bit 13 = 0:Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on output of M2/M30 Bit 13 = 1:Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on output of the M command from MD 27882: PART_COUNTER_MCODE[2] Bit 14, 15 Reserved Anwendungsbeispiel: related to: MD 27882: PART_COUNTER_MCODE IS "Required number of workpieces reached" (V3300 40001.1) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-205 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 27882 PART_COUNTER_MCODE C09 K1 - Workpiece counting via M command BYTE POWER ON - 3 2 0 99 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/2 - Description: On activation of workpiece counting through MD 27880: PART_COUNTER the counting pulse can be triggered by a special M command. Only in this case are the values defined here observed. Meaning: The workpiece counters are incremented by 1 at the IS signal output of the described M command. The following applies: $PART_COUNTER_MCODE[0] for $AC_TOTAL_PARTS $PART_COUNTER_MCODE[1] for $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS $PART_COUNTER_MCODE[2] for $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS Anwendungsbeispiel: related to: MD 27880: PART_COUNTER 28085 MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT C02, C09 FBW,S7 - Assignment of a TO unit to a channel (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON - 10 7/2 - 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11 1,12,13,14,15,16 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: A TO unit is assigned to each channel through a default setting. The memory is thus reserved for the data blocks (tools, magazines). A TOA unit can also be assigned to several channels. Def.: The TOA area is the sum of all TOA and magazine blocks in the NC. The TOA unit consists of a TOA block and, with activated TM function, a magazine block. Special cases: The backup data are lost if this machine data is altered! 2-206 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 28090 MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_ELEMENTS EXP, C02 - Number of block elements for compile cycles (DRAM)DWORD S7 POWER ON - - 0 0 130 7/1 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The input value defines the number of block elements that can be used for compile cycles. In the case of software version 2, approximately 1.2KB of dynamic memory is required per block element. 28100 MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_USER_MEM EXP, C02 - Size of block memory for compile cycles (DRAM), in DWORD KB S7 POWER ON - - 0 0 64000 7/1 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The value defines the total capacity of block memory available to the user in the dynamic memory area for the compile cycles. The memory is allocated in staggered blocks of 128 bytes. 28105 MM_NUM_CC_HEAP_MEM EXP, C02 S7 - Heap memory in kbytes for compile-cycle applications (DRAM) DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 64000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-207 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: Size of the heap memory in kbytes which can be used by the compile cycle user. Dynamic memory is reserved. The memory is allocated in subdivisions of 128 byte blocks. The start address and the size of the reserved memory is made available via a binding, the management lies in the hands of the CC user. 28160 MM_NUM_LINKVAR_ELEMENTS C02 B3 - Number of elements for writing NCU-link variables DWORD POWER ON - - 0 0 32000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- - 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Defines the number of elements which the user has available for programming link variables ($A_DLx). This number also applies to block search, but not to synchronized actions. The memory requirement is ca. 24 bytes per element. One element is needed for each write action when writing NCU-link variables in quick succession. However, the number of elements can be reduced if the accessing actions are made separately (block transport has already been accomplished). 28200 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN - Number of files for channel-specific protection zones DWORD (SRAM) C02, C06, C09 POWER ON S7 - 7/2 - 0 0 10 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This machine data defines how many blocks are set up for channel-specific protection zones. Related to: MD 28210: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE (number of simultaneously active protection zones) MD 18190: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK (number of files for machine-related protection zones (SRAM)) References: /FB/, A3, "Axis/Contour Tunnel Monitoring, Protection Zones" 2-208 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 28210 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE C11, C02, C06, S7 C09 - Number of simultaneously active protection zones in DWORD one channel POWER ON - - 0 0 10 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: This machine data defines the number of protection zones that may be activated simultaneously for each channel. It is not practical to enter a numerical value higher than MD 18190: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK + MD 28200: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN. Related to: MD 28200: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN (Number of blocks for channel-specific protection zones) MD 18190: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK (Number of files for machine-related protection zones (SRAM)) References: /FB1/ Function Manual Basic Functions; Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones (A3) 28212 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CONTOUR C11, C02, C06, C09 - Elements for active protection zones (DRAM) DWORD POWER ON - - 30 0 50 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: This machine data defines for each channel how many internal contour elements in total are held available for active protection zones. Dynamic memory is used. The MD affects the memory requirements for the activated protection zones. This machine data is active only if $MC_MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE is not equal to 0. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-209 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 28250 MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS C02, - S5,FBSY - Number of elements for expressions in synchronized DWORD actions POWER ON - - 159 0 32000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: The expressions of the motion-synchronous actions are stored in memory elements in the control. A motion-synchronous action occupies at least 4 elements. It occupies: 1 element for each operand in the condition >= 1 element for each action 2 elements for each assignment 1 element for each further operand in complex expressions. One element is ca 64 bytes. The option "Synchronous actions stage 2" is required if the MD is to be changed beyond its default value. References: Programming Guide, Advanced 28251 MM_NUM_SAFE_SYNC_ELEMENTS C02, - S5,FBSI - Number of elements for expressions in Safety synchr. DWORD actions POWER ON - - 0 0 32000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: The expressions of motion-synchronous actions are stored in memory elements of the control. A motion-synchronous action assigns at least 4 elements. 2-210 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Assignments: Each operand in the condition:1 element Each action:>= 1 element Each assignment:2 elements Each additional operand in complex expressions:1 element Also see: MD 28250: $MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS 28400 MM_ABSBLOCK EXP, C02 S7 - activate block display w. absolute values DWORD POWER ON - - 1 0 512 7/2 802d-cu3 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 0 - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 0 - - 2/2 Description: Value: 0: Block display with absolute values deactivated 1: Block display with absolute values activated; A display buffer with the following size is created: ($MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE + $MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP) * 256 bytes * <value> >= 128:Block display with absolute values activated; A display buffer with the following size is created: ($MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE + $MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP) 28402 MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF EXP, C02 S7 - Setting of upload buffer size DWORD POWER ON - 2 2, 4 0 32000 7/2 802d-cu3 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 0 - - 2/2 Description: Size of upload buffer: $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF[0] : Number of blocks before current block $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF[1] : Number of blocks after current block (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-211 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data The machine data is tested for the following upper / lower limits during startup: 0 <= $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF[0] <= 8 0 <= $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF[1] <= ($MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE + $MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP) When violating the limits, alarm 4152 is issued. 2.3.1 Axis-specific machine data Number Identifier Display filters Reference Unit Name Data type Active Attributes System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value Protection Description: 30100 CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR EXP, A01 G2 - Setpoint assignment: bus segment number BYTE POWER ON - 1 1 1 5 7/2 802d-cu3 - 5 0 5 2/2 802d-ng2 - 5 0 5 2/2 802d-ng3 - 5 0 5 2/2 802d-tm1 - 5 0 5 2/2 802d-tm2 - 5 0 5 2/2 802d-tm3 - 5 0 5 2/2 - Description: This MD is used to enter the number of the bus segment via which the output is addressed. 0: Local bus (for 802d MCPA) 1: 611D drive bus for SINUMERIK 840D/810D (1st DCM) 2: reserved (previously local P bus) 3: reserved (previously 611D bus, 2nd DCM) 4: reserved (virtual buses) 5: Profibus DP (e.g. SINUMERIK 840Di) 6: reserved (same effect as 5) 2-212 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 30110 CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR A01, A11, - G2 - Setpoint: Drive number/module number BYTE POWER ON - 1 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11 1,12,13,14,15,16,17, 18... 31 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 3,2,4,1 - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - 3,2,4,1 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 2,3,4,1 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 2,3,4,1 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 2,3,4,1 - - 2/2 Description: For a standard axis, the drive number must be entered. Index [n] of the machine data is coded as follows: [setpoint branch]: 0 30120 CTRLOUT_NR EXP, A01, - G2 - Setpoint: Output to module: BYTE POWER ON 3 2/2 - 1 1 1 Description: The number of the output on a module via which the setpoint output is addressed is entered here. Index[n] of the machine data is coded as follows: [setpoint branch]: 0 30130 CTRLOUT_TYPE A01, A11 G2,S6 - Output type of setpoint BYTE POWER ON - 1 0 0 3 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The speed setpoint output type is entered in the MD: 0: Simulation (no HW required) 1: Setpoint output active The index [n] of the machine data has the following code: [setpoint branch]: 0 Anwendungsbeispiel: Simulation: Machine functions can be simulated even if there is no drive system. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-213 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 30134 IS_UNIPOLAR_OUTPUT A01 G2 - Setpoint output is unipolar BYTE POWER ON - 1 0 0 2 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Anwendungsbeispiel: Unipolar output driver (for unipolar, analog drive actuator) -> analog spindle: For unipolar setting, only positive speed setpoints are supplied to the drive; the sign of the speed setpoint value is output separately in its own digital control signal. 0: Bipolar output ("10V) with pos./neg. speed setpoint value, controller enable (regular case) 1: Unipolar output 0...+10V with enabling and direction signal (controller enable, neg. direction of travel) 2: unipolar output 0...+10V with linkage of enabling and direction of travel signals (controller enabling pos. direction of travel, controller enabling neg. direction of travel) 30200 NUM_ENCS A01, A02, - G2 - Number of encoders BYTE POWER ON 2 7/2 - - 1 0 802d-cu3 - - - 1 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - 1 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - 1 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - 1 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - 1 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - 1 2/2 Description: 1: Spindle/axis with measuring system (in the motor or direct) 0: No measuring system (possible for spindles) 2-214 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 30210 ENC_SEGMENT_NR EXP, A01, A02 G2 - Actual value assignment: bus segment number. BYTE POWER ON - 2 1 1 5 7/2 802d-cu3 1 5 5 5 -1/- 802d-ng2 1 5 5 5 -1/- 802d-ng3 1 5 5 5 -1/- 802d-tm1 1 5 5 5 -1/- 802d-tm2 1 5 5 5 -1/- 802d-tm3 1 5 5 5 -1/- - Description: Number of the bus segment, through which the encoder is addressed. The bus segments are assigned to control systems SINUMERIK FM-NC or SINUMERIK 840/810D. The bus segments are assigned to the control systems. 0: reserved (previously local bus) 1: 611D drive bus for SINUMERIK 840D/810D (1st DCM) 2: reserved (previously local P bus) 3: reserved (previously 611D bus, 2nd DCM) 4: reserved (virtual busses) 5: PROFIBUS DP (for example SINUMERIK 840Di) 6: reserved (same effect as 5) Index [n] has the following coding [Encodernr.]: 0 or 1 30220 ENC_MODULE_NR A01, A02, A11 - Actual value: Drive number/measuring circuit number BYTE G2 POWER ON - 2 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7... 1 31 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - -/- 802d-ng2 1 3, 2, 4, 1 - - -/- 802d-ng3 1 3, 2, 4, 1 - - -/- 802d-tm1 1 2, 3, 4, 1 - - -/- 802d-tm2 1 2, 3, 4, 1 - - -/- 802d-tm3 1 2, 3, 4, 1 - - -/- Description: For a standard axis, the drive number must be entered. Index [n] of the machine data is coded as follows: [encoder no.]: 0 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-215 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 30230 ENC_INPUT_NR A01, A02, A11, - G2 - Actual value: Input number on module/ measuring circuit board BYTE POWER ON - 2 1, 2 1 2 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 - Description: The number of the input on a module via which the encoder is addressed is entered here. The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0 Anwendungsbeispiel: Simulation: Machine functions can be simulated even if there is no measuring system. 30240 ENC_TYPE A01, A02, A11, - G2,R1 - Actual value: Encoder type BYTE POWER ON 5 7/2 - 2 0 0 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: The encoder type used is entered in the MD: 0: Simulation 1: Raw signal generator (1VPP, sin, cos) 4: Absolute encoder with EnDat interface 2, 3, 5: reserved The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0 Anwendungsbeispiel: Simulation: Machine functions can be simulated even if there is no measuring system. 2-216 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 30270 ENC_ABS_BUFFERING EXP, A01, A02 FBA,R1 - Absolute encoder: Traversing range extension BYTE POWER ON - 2 0 0 1 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 - Description: This MD defines in which way the absolute encoder position is buffered, and whether a traversing range extension is active on software side (exceeding the limits of the absolute value encoder area that can be displayed on the hardware). "0" = standard = traversing range extension (comp. ACT_POS_ABS) is active. "1" = traversing range extension on software side is inactive. When using an absolute linear scale, there will not be a traversing range overflow for mechanical reasons. This MD is therefore only valid for rotary absolute value encoders. For rotary absolute value encoders, the traversing range that can be clearly displayed on encoder side, is stored in ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO. You can do without a traversing range extension without any problems (a hardware counter overflow that might be within the traversing range, is concealed in the software via shortest-path decision): a. in linear axes or limited rotary axes, if the actual traversing range on load side is smaller than the traversing range on load side that corresponds to ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO. b. in endlessly turning rotary axes (ROT_IS_MODULO = TRUE), if the absolute encoder is connected on load side (no gear to be considered) or if "without remainder" can be calculated: Number of rotations on load side = ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO * gear ratio (Example: ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO = 4096 encoder rotations, gear 25:32, i.e. number of rotations on load side = 4096*(25/32)=3200 ). Notice: If you do not meet the conditions under a. or b., you run the risk of getting a wrong absolute encoder position at next Power ON or encoder activation after parking without prewarning, in case the traversing range extension is not working. Therefore, the traversing range extension remains active in the standard version. Related to: $MA_ENC_TYPE $MA_IS_ROT_AX $MA_ROT_IS_MODULO $MA_ACT_POS_ABS $MA_ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO $MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-217 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 30300 IS_ROT_AX A01, A06, A11, - R2 - Rotary axis BOOLEAN POWER ON SCAL, CTEQ - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 1: Axis: The axis is defined as a "rotary axis" . The units of the axis-specific machine data/setting data are interpreted by the control in default setting as follows: D position in degrees D velocity in rev/min D acceleration in rev/s2 D jerk limiting in rev/s3 Spindle: For a spindle the machine data should always be set to "1", or alarm 4210 "Rotary axis declaration missing" is sent. 0: The axis is defined as a linear axis. Special cases: For axis: alarm 4200 if the axis is already defined as a geometry axis. For spindle: Alarm 4210 related to: The subsequent machine data only become effective after activating the MD 30300:IS_ROT_AX = 1: - MD 30310:ROT_IS_MODULO(modulo conversion for rotary axis)) - MD 30320:DISPLAY_IS_MODULO(position display is modulo) - MD 10210:INT_INCR_PER_DEG(calculation resolution for angular positions) 30310 ROT_IS_MODULO A01, A06, A11, - R2 - Modulo conversion for rotary axis BOOLEAN POWER ON - 7/2 CTEQ - - FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 1: A modulo conversion is performed on the setpoints for the rotary axis.. The software limit switches and the working area limits are inoperative; the traversing range is therefore unlimited in both directions. ROT_IS_AX must be set to "1" 2-218 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 0: no modulo conversion Irrelevant for: MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX = 0 (linear axis) Anwendungsbeispiel: Continuously rotating axes (e.g. for eccentric rotation, grinding, winding) related to: MD 30320: DISPLAY_IS_MODULO(position display is modulo 360) MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX = 1(rotary axis) MD 36100: POS_LIMIT_MINUS(software limit switch minus) MD 36110: POS_LIMIT_PLUS(software limit switch plus) SD 43430: WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS(working area, limiting minus) SD 43420: WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS(working area, limiting plus) 30320 DISPLAY_IS_MODULO A01, A06, A11 R2 - Position display "Modulo 360 BOOLEAN POWER ON CTEQ - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 1: Position display "Modulo 360 degree" is active: The position display of the rotary axis or spindle (for basic or machine coordinate system) is defined as "Modulo 360 degree". In the positive direction of rotation, the control periodically resets the position display internally to 0.000 degrees after 359.999 degrees. The display range is always positive and is always between 0 and 359,999 degrees 0: Absolute position display is active: Contrary to the modulo 360 degree position display, for the absolute position display - e.g. for a positive direction of rotation - after 1 revolution +360 degrees is displayed; after 2 revolutions, +720 degrees etc. Here, the display range is limited corresponding to the linear axes. Irrelevant for: Linear axes MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX = 0 Anwendungsbeispiel: - For endlessly rotating rotary axes (MD 30310:ROT_IS_MODULO = 1) we recommend that the position display is activated with modulo 360 degrees. - For spindles, the position display should always be activated with 360 degrees. related to: MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX (axis is rotary axis) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-219 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 30350 SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT A01, A06 G2 - Output of axis signals for simulation axes BOOLEAN POWER ON - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 CTEQ Description: The machine data specifies whether axis-specific interface signals are output to the PLC during the simulation of an axis. 1: The axis-specific interface signals of a simulated axis are output to the PLC. The PLC user program can thus be tested even if the drives are not available. 0: The axis-specific interface signals of a simulated axis are not output to the PLC. All axis-specific interface signals are set to "0". Irrelevant for: MD 30130: CTRLOUT_TYPE (output type of setpoint value) = 1 Anwendungsbeispiel: MD: SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT = 0 For instance, this prevents the brake from being opened during the simulation of an axis. 30465 AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK N01 - - Substitution of NC language commands DWORD POWER ON - 3 7/2 - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: $MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK defines for the leading spindle(s) of a coupling (synchronous spindle coupling, ELG, tangential tracking, coupled motion, master value coupling, master/slave) which language constructs/functions are to be substituted by the user program set by $MN_LANG_SUB_NAME / $MN_LANG_SUB_PATH (default: /_N_CMA_DIR/_N_LANG_SUB_SPF). The substitution is executed only if a coupling is active for the relevant spindle and in the case of a gear stage change only if a gear stage change is actually pending. 2-220 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Bit 0 = 1: Automatic (M40) and direct (M41-M45) gear stage change Bit 1 = 1: Spindle positioning with SPOS/SPOSA/M19 30500 INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB A01, A10 T1 - Axis is an indexing axis BYTE RESET - - 0 0 3 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The axis is declared as an indexing axis by assignment of indexing position table 1 or 2. 0:The axis is not declared as an indexing axis 1:The axis is an indexing axis. The associated indexing positions are stored in table 1 (MD: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1). 2:The axis is an indexing axis. The associated indexing positions are stored in table 2 (MD: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2). 3:Equidistant indexing with SW 4.3 and higher (840D) and SW 2.3 and higher (810D) >3:Alarm 17090 "Value violates upper limit" Special cases: Several axes can be assigned to an indexing position table on the condition that all the axes are of the same type (linear axis, rotary axis, modulo 360 function). If they are not, alarm 4000 is output during power-up. Alarm 17500 "Axis is not an indexing axis" Alarm 17090 "Value violates upper limit" Related to: MD: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB1 (indexing position table 1) MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1 (no. of indexing positions used in table 1) MD: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB2 (indexing position table 2) MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2 (no. of indexing positions used in table 2) For equidistant indexings with value 3: MD: INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR Numerator MD: INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR Denominator MD: INDEX_AX_OFFSET First indexing position MD: HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE Hirth tooth system (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-221 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 30501 INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR A01, A10 T1 mm, degrees Indexing axis equidistant positions numerator DOUBLE RESET - - 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 - Description: Defines the value of the numerator for calculating the distances between two indexing positions when the positions are equidistant. Modulo axes ignore this value and use $MA_MODULO_RANGE instead. MD irrelevant for non-equidistant indexes in accordance with tables. Related to: MD 30502: INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR, MD 30503: INDEX_AX_OFFSET; MD 30500: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB 30502 INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR A01, A10 T1 - Indexing axis equidistant positions denominator DWORD RESET - - 7/2 - 1 1 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 Description: Defines the value of the denominator for calculating the distances between two indexing positions when the positions are equidistant. For modulo axes it therefore specifies the number of indexing positions. MD irrelevant for non-equidistant indexes in accordance with tables. Related to: MD 30501: INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR MD 30503: INDEX_AX_OFFSET MD 30500: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB 2-222 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 30503 INDEX_AX_OFFSET A01, A10 T1 mm, degrees Indexing axis with equidistant positions first index position DOUBLE RESET - - 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 - Description: Defines the position of the first indexing position from zero for an indexing axis with equidistant positions. MD irrelevant for non-equidistant indexes in accordance with tables. Related to: MD 30501, 30502, 30500 30505 HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE A01, A10 T1 - Axis is an indexing axis with Hirth tooth system BOOLEAN RESET - - 7/2 CTEQ - FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1 A01, A06, A10 B3 Description: Hirth tooth system is active when value 1 is set. MD irrelevant is axis is not the indexing axis. Related to: MD 30500, 30501, 30502, 30503 30554 AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_NCU - Initial setting which NCU creates setpoints for the axisBYTE POWER ON - - 0 0 16 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-223 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: This machine data is evaluated only if the NCU is linked with other NCUs via the NCU link communication. Assignment of master NCU: If a machine axis is activated via $MC_AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB in several NCUs in an NCU cluster, then a MASTER NCU must be assigned to it. This NCU takes over the setpoint creation for the axis after the runup. For axes which are only activated in one NCU, the number of this NCU or 0 must be entered. Other entries initiate a runup interrupt. 30560 IS_LOCAL_LINK_AXIS EXP, A01 B3 - Axis is a local link axis BOOLEAN POWER ON - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: An axis for which this MD is set to 1 is not addressed by the local NCU at runup. The associated drive is put into operation. The axis is traversed by another NCU. The evaluation is made only if link communication exists. Not relevant for: Systems without link modules Related to: MM_NCU_LINK_MASK 30600 FIX_POINT_POS A03, A10 K1 mm, degrees Fixed-value positions of axis with G75 DOUBLE POWER ON 2 - 7/2 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The fixed-point positions (max. 2) for each axis which can be approached when G75 is programmed are entered in these machine data. References: /PA/, "Programming Guide: Fundamentals" 2-224 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 31000 ENC_IS_LINEAR A02, A11, - G2 - Direct measuring system (linear scale) BOOLEAN POWER ON - 2 FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 A02, A11, - G2 - Description: Value 1: Encoder is a linear scale 31010 ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST mm Distance between reference marks on linear scales DOUBLE POWER ON - 2 0.01 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 - Description: Distance of marks with linear encoders 31020 ENC_RESOL A02, A11, - G2 - Encoder pulses per revolution DWORD POWER ON - 7/2 - 2 2048 - 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: The encoder lines per encoder revolution should entered in the MD. The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-225 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 31030 LEADSCREW_PITCH A02, A11, - G2 mm Leadscrew pitch DOUBLE POWER ON - - 10.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The pitch of the leadscrew is entered in this MD. 31040 ENC_IS_DIRECT A02, A11, - G2 - Encoder is connected directly to the machine BOOLEAN POWER ON 2 - 7/2 - FALSE - 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: 1: Encoder for actual-value assignment is mounted directly at the machine. 0: Encoder for actual-value assignment is mounted on the motor. The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0 Special cases: Entering the wrong information can cause an incorrect encoder resolution, because, for example, the wrong gear ratios are used for calculation. 31044 ENC_IS_DIRECT2 A02, - - - Encoder mounted on the additional gearbox BOOLEAN NEW CONF - 2 FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 - 2-226 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: When using a load intermediate gearbox (for example for rotating tools, compare $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA and $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_DENOM), the encoder installation location can be defined "on the output" of this load intermediate gearbox: Encoder installation "on the output of the load intermediate gearbox" is configured by $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT=1 and $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2=1 at the same time. Encoder installation "on the input of the load intermediate gearbox" is configured by $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT=1 together with $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2=0. A parameterization alarm will be output, if $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2=1 is set without $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT=1 (this combination has not been defined). 31050 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM A02, A11, - G2 - Load gearbox, denominator DWORD POWER ON 2147000000 7/2 - 6 1 1 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The denominator of the load gearbox should entered in the MD. The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [closed-loop control set of parameters set no.]: 0-5 31060 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA A02, A11, - G2 - Load gearbox, numerator DWORD POWER ON - 6 1 -2147000000 2147000000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The numerator of the load gearbox should entered in the MD. The index[n] of the machine data has the code: Closed-loop control set of parameters set no.: 0-5 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-227 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 31064 DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_DENOM A02, - - - Denominator additional gearbox DWORD NEW CONF - - 1 1 2147000000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Intermediate gearbox denominator The MD together with $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA defines an intermediate gearbox that acts as multiplier to the motor/load gearbox (described by $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA and $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM). The load intermediate gearbox is inactive with default values 1:1. Please consider $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2 for encoder installation. When functionality Safety Integrated (see $MA_SAFE_FUNCTION_ENABLE) is active, the intermediate gearbox can be used, if the effectively active gear ratio from the motor to the tool is considered in the safety-relevant machine data and if the safety-relevant secondary conditions are considered the gear ratios. For more detailed information see the Safety Integrated Description of Functions. 31066 DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA A02, - - - Numerator additional gearbox DWORD NEW CONF - - 1 -2147000000 2147000000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Intermediate gearbox numerator Related to: MD 31064 2-228 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 31070 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM A02, A11, - G2 - Measuring gearbox denominator DWORD POWER ON - 2 1 1 2147000000 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: The denominator of the measuring gearbox should entered in the MD. The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0 31080 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA A02, A11, - G2 - Measuring gearbox numerator DWORD POWER ON 2147000000 7/2 - 2 1 1 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: The numerator of the measuring gearbox should entered in the MD. The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0 31122 BERO_DELAY_TIME_PLUS A02, A06 S1 s BERO delay time plus DOUBLE NEW CONF - 2 0.000110 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: In conjunction with the setting MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE = 7, the MD causes a signal propagation delay compensation in the positive direction of motion when a Bero (zero mark) is used for defining position. related to: MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-229 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 31123 BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS A02, A06 S1 s BERO delay time minus DOUBLE NEW CONF - 2 0.000078 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: In conjunction with the setting MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE = 7, the MD causes a signal propagation delay compensation in the negative direction of motion when a Bero (zero mark) is used for defining position. related to: MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE 32000 MAX_AX_VELO mm/min, rev/min Maximum axis velocity A11, A04 G2 DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/2 CTEQ - - 10000. 1.e-9 Description: The limit velocity to which the axis can accelerate (rapid traverse limit) is entered in this MD. This velocity is used for traversing when rapid traverse G0 is programmed. The maximum linear or rotary axis velocity should be entered in the MD in accordance with MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX. The maximum permissible axis velocity depends on the machine and drive dynamics and the limit frequency of the actual-value acquisition. 32010 JOG_VELO_RAPID mm/min, rev/min Rapid traverse in JOG mode A11, A04, - H1 DOUBLE RESET - 7/2 CTEQ - - 10000. - Description: The axis velocity entered here applies when the rapid traverse override key is operated in JOG mode and when the feedrate override switch is set to 100%. The value entered may not exceed the maximum permissible axis velocity (MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO). MD 32010 will not be used for the programmed rapid traverse G0. Irrelevant for: Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDA related to: MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity) IS "Rapid transverse override" (V3200 1000.5, V3200 1004.5, V3200 1008.5, V380x 0004.5,) IS "Feedrate override" (VB380x 0000) - axis-specific IS "Rapid transverse override" (VB3200 0005) - for geom. axes 2-230 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 32020 JOG_VELO mm/min, rev/min Axis velocity in JOG mode A11, A04, - H1 DOUBLE RESET - 7/2 CTEQ - - 2000. - Description: The velocity entered applies to traversing axes in JOG mode when the feedrate override switch is at position 100%. The velocity of MD 32020: JOG_VELO is only used when general setting data is SD 41110: JOG_SET_VELO = 0 for linear axes or SD 41130: JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO = 0 for rotary axes. If this is the case, the axis velocity is active for - Continuous jogging - Incremental traversing (INC1, ..., INCvar) The value entered may not exceed the maximum permissible axis velocity (MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO). Spindle in JOG mode: This can also be used to define the traverse velocity in JOG mode for specific spindles if SD 41200: JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO = 0. The velocity is influenced by the spindle speed override switch. Irrelevant for: Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDA Anwendungsbeispiel: If different velocities have to be set for the individual axes traversing in JOG mode, this can be done for specific axes in this MD. SD 41110: JOG_SET_VELO (or equivalent) may be set to 0! related to: MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity) SD 41110: JOG_SET_VELO (JOG velocity for G94, linear axis) SD 41130: JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO (JOG velocity for rotary axes) SD 41200: JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO (JOG speed for spindle), which applies to all spindles, Axis-specific IS "Feedrate override" (VB380x 0000) Axis-specific IS "Spindle override" (VB380x 2003) Channel-specific IS "Feedrate override" (VB3200 0004) for geom. axes 32100 AX_MOTION_DIR A07, A03, A11, - G2 - Traversing direction DWORD POWER ON - - 1 -1 1 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-231 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: The traversing direction of the machine axis can be reversed with this MD. The control direction is not reversed, i.e. closed-loop control remains stable. 0 or 1: Direction not reversed -1: Direction reversed 32110 ENC_FEEDBACK_POL A07, A02, A11 G2 - Sign of actual value (control direction) DWORD POWER ON - 2 1 -1 1 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 - Description: The direction of evaluation of the rotary encoder signals is entered in this MD. 0 or 1:Direction not reversed -1: Direction reversed If the direction is reversed, the control direction is also reversed if the encoder is used for position control. The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0 0 Special cases: If the wrong control direction is entered, the axis may go out of control. One of the following alarms is output, depending on the settings of the associated limit values: Alarm 25040 "Zero-speed monitoring" Alarm 25050 "Contour monitoring" Alarm 25060 "Speed setpoint limit" The associated limit values are described in: References: Chapter "Axis monitoring functions" The control direction selected might be incorrect if an uncontrolled setpoint jump occurs when a drive is connected. 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN A07, A11 G2 1000/min Servo gain factor DOUBLE NEW CONF 2000. 7/2 CTEQ - 6 16.66666667 0 Description: Position controller gain, so-called servo gain factor The input/output unit for the user is [(m/min)/mm]. That is, MD: POSCTRL_GAIN[n] = 1 corresponds to 1 mm following error at V = 1m/min. 2-232 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data If the value "0" is entered the position controller is opened. When entering the servo gain factor it is important to check that the gain factor of the whole position control loop is still dependent on other parameters of the controlled system. A distinction should be made between a "desired servo gain factor" (MD: POSCTRL_GAIN) and the "actual servo gain" (produced by the machine). Only when all the parameters of the control loop are matched will these servo gain factors be the same. Note: Axes which interpolate with one another for a machining operation must either have the same gain setting (i.e. an identical following error at the same velocity). The real servo gain factor can be checked with the following error in the service displays. The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [closed-loop control set of parameters set no.]: 0-5 32210 POSCTRL_INTEGR_TIME A07 G2 s Position controller integral time DOUBLE NEW CONF 10000.0 7/2 - - 1.0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Position controller integral action time for the integral component in s The MD is only active if $MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE = TRUE. A value of the MD less than 0.001 disables the integral component of the PI controller. The controller is then a P controller which works with disabled manipulated variable clamping (s.a. $MA_POSCTRL_CONFIG, bit0 = 1). 32220 POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE A07 G2 - Enable integral component position controller BOOLEAN POWER ON - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Enable of the integral component position controller; the position controller is then a PI controller in which the manipulated variable clamping is disabled (s.a. $MA_POSCTRL_CONFIG, bit0 = 1). (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-233 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Position overshoots may occur if the integral component is used. For this reason, this functionality may only be used in special cases. 32230 POSCTRL_CONFIG A07 - - Configuration of the position controller structure BYTE POWER ON - 17 7/2 - 0 0 Description: Configuration of the position controller structure: Bit0 = 1: Manipulated variable clamping inactive Bit4 = 1: Accelerated exact stop signal active 32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL A11, A04, - B2 m/s, rev/s Axis acceleration DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/2 CTEQ - 5 1.0 1.0e-3 Description: The acceleration defines a change in velocity of the axis against time. Different axes do not have to have the same acceleration. The lowest acceleration value of all the axes involved in interpolation is taken into account. In the case of rotary axes, the entered value corresponds to the angular acceleration. The machine manufacturer should determine for which continuous deceleration and acceleration the machine is suitable. This value is entered in the machine data. The acceleration value is active for every type of acceleration and delay operation. Irrelevant for: Error states that lead to rapid stop. 32320 DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK A05, A06, A10, A04 - - Reset behavior of dynamic response limitation. DWORD RESET - - 0 0 0x01 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 CTEQ Description: With MD $MA_DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK, the reset behavior of functions limiting the dynamic response can be set. The MD is bit-coded; currently only bit 0 (LSB) is assigned. 2-234 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Bit 0 == 0: Channel reset/M30 resets the programmed ACC to 100%. response as before) (compatibility: same Bit 0 == 1: Programmed ACC is maintained beyond channel reset/M30. 32420 JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE A04 B2 - Enabling axis-specific jerk limitation BOOLEAN RESET CTEQ - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Enables the axis-specific jerk limitation function for JOG and REF modes and positioning axis operation. related to: MD 32430: JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK(axis-specific jerk) 32430 JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK A04 B2 m/s, rev/s Axis-specific jerk DOUBLE RESET - 7/2 CTEQ - - 1000.0 1.e-9 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The jerk limitation restricts changes to axis acceleration in JOG mode. Irrelevant for: Path interpolation and error states that lead to rapid stop. related to: MD 32420: JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE (enabling of axis-specific jerk limitation) 32431 MAX_AX_JERK A04 B1 m/s, rev/s Maximum axis-specific jerk during path motion (in AUTO, MDA mode) DOUBLE NEW CONF 5 - 3/3 - 1.e6 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 1.e-9 2-235 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: This maximum axis-specific jerk is active for path motion. Path motion is possible in AUTO, MDA modes. related to: MD 32432: PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM acts at block transition We recommend setting equal values for both MD. 32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM m/s, rev/s Maximum axis-specific jerk during path movement at DOUBLE the block transition A04 B1 NEW CONF 5 3/3 CTEQ - 1.e6 - - Description: The control limits the jerk (acceleration jump) at a block transition between contour sections of different curvature to the value set. Irrelevant for: Exact stop Anwendungsbeispiel: related to: Continuous path mode, SOFT type of acceleration MD 32431: MAX_AX_JERK (maximum axis-specific jerk with path movement) It is recommended to set both MD to the same values. 32440 LOOKAH_FREQUENCY EXP, A04 B1 - Smoothing frequency for Look Ahead DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 10. - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Acceleration procedures in continuous-path mode with Look Ahead which execute with a higher frequency than that parameterized in this MD are smoothed as a function of the parameterization in MD $MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR. It is always the minimum of all the axes participating in the path which is determined. If vibrations are aroused in the mechanics of this axis and if their frequency is known, then this MD should be set to a lower value than this frequency. 2-236 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 32450 BACKLASH A09 K3 mm, degrees Backlash DOUBLE NEW CONF - 2 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: Backlash between the positive and the negative direction of travel. The compensation value input is - positive if the encoder leads the machine part (normal case) - negative if the encoder lags behind the machine part. If zero is entered backlash compensation is deactivated. Backlash compensation is always activated after reference point approach in all modes. The index [n] has the following coding: [encoder no.]: 0 Special cases: related to: MD 36500: ENC_CHANGE_TOL(backlash compensation partial section) 32490 FRICT_COMP_MODE A09 K3 - Type of friction compensation BYTE POWER ON 2 7/2 - 1 1 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 0: No friction compensation 1: Friction compensation with constant injection value or adaptive characteristic 2: Friction compensation with learned characteristic via neural network (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-237 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 32500 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE A09 K3 - Friction compensation active BOOLEAN NEW CONF - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: 1: Friction compensation is enabled for this axis. Depending on the setting of MD 32490: FRICT_COMP_MODE, either "friction compensation with constant injected value" or "QEC with neural networks" becomes active. In the case of neural QEC, the machine data should first be set to "1" when a valid characteristic has been "learnt". During the learning stage, the compensation values are injected independently of the contents of this machine data. 0: Friction compensation is not enabled for this axis. Thus, no friction compensation values are injected. Related to: MD 32490: FRICT_COMP_MODE Friction compensation type MD 32510: FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE Friction compensation adaptation active MD 32520: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX Maximum friction compensation value MD 32540: FRICT_COMP_TIME Friction compensation time constant MD 38010: MM_QEC_MAX_POINTS Number of interpolation points for QEC with neural networks 32510 FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE EXP, A09 K3 - Adaptation friction compensation active BOOLEAN NEW CONF 1 - 7/2 - FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 2-238 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: 1: Friction compensation with amplitude adaptation is enabled for the axis. With friction compensation, quadrant errors on circular contours can be compensated. Often, the injection amplitude of the friction compensation value is not constant over the entire acceleration range. In this case, a smaller compensation value must be injected for optimum friction compensation for high accelerations than for small accelerations. The parameters of the adaptation curve must be determined and entered in the machine data. 0: Friction compensation with amplitude adaptation is not enabled for the axis. MD irrelevant for: MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE = 0 MD 32490: FRICT_COMP_MODE = 2 Related to: MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE Friction compensation active MD 32520: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX Maximum friction compensation value MD 32530: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN Minimum friction compensation value MD 32550: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1 Adaptation acceleration value 1 MD 32560: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL2 Adaptation acceleration value 2 MD 32570: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL3 Adaptation acceleration value 3 MD 32540: FRICT_COMP_TIME Friction compensation time constant 32520 FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX mm/min, rev/min Maximum friction compensation value EXP, A09 K3 DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/2 - 1 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: With inactive adaption (MD32510=0), the maximum friction compensation is injected all over the acceleration range. With active adaption (MD32510=1), the maximum friction compensation is injected according to the adaptation curve. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-239 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data In the 1st acceleration range ( a < MD32550), amplitude = MD32520 * (a/MD32550) In the 2nd acceleration range (MD32550 <= a <= MD32560), amplitude = MD32520 In the 3rd acceleration range (MD32560 < a < MD32570), amplitude = MD32520 * (1-(a-MD32560)/(MD32570-MD32560)) In the 4th acceleration range (MD32570 <= a ), amplitude = MD32530 the injection the injection the injection the injection MD irrelevant for: MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE = 0 MD 32490: FRICT_COMP_MODE = 2 (neural QEC) Related to: MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE Friction compensation active MD 32510: FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE Friction compensation adaptation active MD 32530: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN Minimum friction compensation value MD 32550: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1 Adaptation acceleration value 1 MD 32560: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL2 Adaptation acceleration value 2 MD 32570: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL3 Adaptation acceleration value 3 MD 32540: FRICT_COMP_TIME Friction compensation time constant 32530 FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN mm/min, rev/min Minimum friction compensation value EXP, A09 K3 DOUBLE NEW CONF - 1 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The minimum friction compensation value is active only if "Friction compensation with adaptation" (MD32510=1) is active. The amplitude of the friction compensation value is injected in the 4th acceleration range (MD32570 <= a). MD irrelevant for: MD 32510: FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE = 0 MD 32490: FRICT_COMP_MODE = 2 (neural QEC) 2-240 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Special cases: In special cases, the value for FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN may even be higher than for MD 32520: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX. Related to: MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE Friction compensation active MD 32510: FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE Friction compensation adaptation active MD 32520: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX Maximum friction compensation value MD 32550: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1 Adaptation acceleration value 1 MD 32560: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL2 Adaptation acceleration value 2 MD 32570: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL3 Adaptation acceleration value 3 MD 32540: FRICT_COMP_TIME Friction compensation time constant 32540 FRICT_COMP_TIME EXP, A09 K3 s Friction compensation time constant DOUBLE NEW CONF 1 - 7/2 - 0.015 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The friction compensation value is injected via a DT1 filter. The injection amplitude decays in accordance with the time constant. MD irrelevant for: MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE = 0 Related to: MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE Friction compensation active MD 32520: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX Maximum friction compensation value (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-241 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT A07, A09 K3 - Feedforward control factor f. velocity/speed feedforward control DOUBLE NEW CONF - 6 1.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Weighting factor for feedforward control. Is normally = 1.0 on digital drives, since these keep the setpoint speed exactly . On analog drives, this factor can be used to compensate the gain error of the drive actuator, so that the actual speed becomes exactly equal to the setpoint speed (this reduces the following error with feedforward control). On both drive types, the effect of the feedforward control can be continuously reduced with a factor of < 1.0, if the machine moves too abruptly and other measures (e.g. jerk limitation) are not to be used. This also reduces possibly existing overshoots; however, the error increases on curved contours, e.g. on a circle. With 0.0, you have a pure position controller without feedforward control. Contour monitoring takes into account factors < 1.0. In individual cases, it can, however, become necessary to increase MD CONTOUR_TOL. 32630 FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE A07, A09 K3,PA1 - Feedforward control can be activated from program BYTE RESET - - 1 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 CTEQ Description: This MD can be used to define whether the feedforward control for this axis/spindle can be switched on and off in the part program. 0: Feedforward control cannot be switched on/off with FFWON or FFWOF. 1: Feedforward control can be switched on/off with FFWON or FFWOF in the part program. The last condition to be active remains active even after Reset (and therefore with JOG). 2-242 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Because the feedforward control for all axes of a channel is switched on/off with FFWON or FFWOF, this MD should therefore have identical settings for axes that interpolate with each other. related to: 32640 STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE A01, A07 K3,FBA - Dynamic stiffness control BOOLEAN NEW CONF - 7/2 CTEQ - 1 FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Activate dynamic stiffness control, if bit is set. With active stiffness control, higher servo gain factors are possible (MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN). Note on SIMODRIVE 611D: Due to the higher computational load in the SIMODRIVE 611D, the setting of the sampling cycles (current/drive module sampling time) should possibly be adjusted in the 611D. For a single-axis drive module, the standard setting (sampling time: 125 s current, 125 s speed controller) is sufficient; for double-axis modules, the speed controller should possibly be increased (to 250 s). 32642 STIFFNESS_CONTROL_CONFIG A01, A07 K3,FBA - Dynamic stiffness control configuration (DSC) BYTE NEW CONF 1 1 7/2 CTEQ - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Configuration of dynamic stiffness control (DSC): 0: DSC in drive works with indirect measuring system (standard case) 1: DSC in drive works with direct measuring system Note: Availability of this function depends on the drive used; it is not supported, for example, by SIMODRIVE 611D. Note: When the dynamic stiffness control of SINAMICS (P1193 unequal to 0) is used, the value of this machine data must be set to 0. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-243 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 32644 STIFFNESS_DELAY_TIME A01, A07 K3,FBA s dynamic stiffness control: Delay DOUBLE POWER ON CTEQ - 1 0.0 -0.02 0.02 7/2 802d-cu3 - -0.0015 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - -0.0015 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - -0.0015 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - -0.0015 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - -0.0015 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - -0.0015 - - 2/2 Description: Configuration of compensation dead time of the dynamic stiffness control (DSC) with optimized DP cycle (e.g. SIMODRIVE 611U), unit: seconds 32700 ENC_COMP_ENABLE A09 K3 - Encoder/spindle error compensation (LEC ) BOOLEAN NEW CONF 2 - 7/2 - FALSE - 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: 1: 'LEC' is activated for the axis/measuring system. With LEC, leadscrew errors and measuring system errors can be compensated. The function is only enabled internally if the measuring system has been referenced (IS: "Referenced/synchronized 1" = 1). Write protection function (compensation values) active. 0: 'LEC' is not active for the axis/measuring system. Index[n] has the following coding: [encoder no.]: 0 related to: IS "Referenced/synchronized 1" 32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME A07, A09 K3,G2 s Equivalent time constant of speed control loop DOUBLE NEW CONF - 6 0.008 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - 0.003 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 0.003 - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - 0.003 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 0.003 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 0.003 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 0.003 - - 2/2 2-244 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: This equivalent time constant is required for the "speed feedforward control" function. The value must correspond with the equivalent time constant of the closed speed control loop. Setting aid: Guide value is the time constant of the setpoint value smoothing in the drive. related to: 33050 LUBRICATION_DIST A03, A10 A2 mm, degrees Path for lubrication pulse PLC signal DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 7/2 - 1.0e8 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: Path for triggering the lubrication pulse. The status of the axis-specific IS: "Lubrication pulse" (V390x 1002.0) is changed according to the specified path of the respective axis. This enables travel-dependent control of a lubrication device for one axis by the PLC user program. The path is added up after POWER ON. related to: IS: "Lubrication pulse" (V390x 1002.0) 34000 REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE A03, A11 R1 - Axis with reference point cam BOOLEAN RESET - - TRUE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Machine axes with only one zero mark across their entire traversing range or rotary axes with only one zero mark per revolution are not identified as a machine axis with reference cam by the MD: REF_CAM_IS_ACTIVE. A machine axis identified as a machine axis with reference cam accelerates, when the plus/minus travel key is pressed, to the velocity defined in MD 34040: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (reference point creep velocity). Irrelevant for: (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-245 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 34010 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS A03, A11 R1 - Reference point approach in minus direction BOOLEAN RESET - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: 0: Reference point approach in the positive direction 1: Reference point approach in negative direction Approach with incremental measuring systems: Starting via the traverse key is only possible in the specified direction. If the wrong travel key is pressed, reference point approach does not start. If the machine axis is positioned before the reference cam, it accelerates to the velocity specified in MD 34020: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM (reference point creep velocity). If the machine axis is on the reference cam, it accelerates to the velocity specified in MD 34020: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM and travels initially away from the preset direction, away from the cam. Note for absolute encoders: The direction of the traversing key is also significant for calibrating the absolute encoders: Approach the direction for fixed position and update values in MD 34090 and MD 34210. 34020 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM mm/min, rev/min Reference point approach velocity A03, A11, A04 R1 DOUBLE RESET - - 5000.00 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The reference point approach velocity is the velocity at which the machine axis travels in the direction of the reference cam when the travel key is pressed (phase 1). This value should be set at a magnitude large enough for the axis to be stopped before it reaches a hardware limit switch. Irrelevant for: 2-246 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 34030 REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST A03, A11 R1 mm, degrees Maximum distance to reference cam DOUBLE RESET - - 10000.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: If the machine axis travels a path defined in this MD from the starting position in the direction of the reference cam without reaching the reference cam ("Reference point approach delay" interface signal is not set), the axis stops and alarm 20000 "Reference cam not reached" is signaled Irrelevant for: 34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER mm/min, rev/min Reference point creep speed [encoder number]: 0 A03, A11, A04 R1 DOUBLE RESET - 2 300.00 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: 1) For incremental measuring systems: This is the velocity at which the axis travels between initial detection of the reference cam and synchronization with the first zero mark (phase 2). Traversing direction: opposite to the direction specified for cam detection (MD 34010: REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS) If MD 34050: REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE (direction reversal at the reference cam) is set, then for synchronization with a rising reference cam edge, at the cams, the axis travels at the velocity defined in MD 34020: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM. 2) Indirect measurement system with BERO on the load-side (preferred for spindles) At this velocity, the zero mark associated with the BERO is searched for. The zero mark is accepted if the actual velocity is within the tolerance range defined by MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, from the velocity specified in MD 34040: MD 34040: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER[n]. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-247 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 34050 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE A03, A11 R1 - Change of direction on reference cam [encoder number]: 0 BOOLEAN RESET - 2 FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 - Description: This can be used to set the search direction for the zero mark: 0: Synchronization with falling reference cam edge The machine axis accelerates to the velocity defined in MD 34040: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (reference point creep velocity) in the opposite direction to that defined in MD 34010: REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS (approach reference point in minus direction). If the reference cam is exited ("Reference point approach delay" interface signal is reset), the control synchronizes itself with the first zero mark. 1: Synchronization with rising reference cam edge The machine axis accelerates to the velocity defined in MD 34020: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (reference point creep velocity) in the opposite direction to that specified in the MD: REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS. When the axis leaves the reference cam ("Reference point approach delay" interface signal is reset), the machine axis decelerates to a stop and accelerates in the opposite direction towards the reference cam at the velocity defined in MD: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER. When the reference cam is reached ("Reference point approach delay" interface signal is enabled), the control is synchronizing with the first zero mark. Irrelevant for: 34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST mm, degrees Maximum distance to reference mark [encoder no.]: 0DOUBLE A03, A11 RESET R1 - 2 20.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: For incremental measuring systems: If, after leaving the reference cam ("Reference point approach delay" interface signal is reset), the machine axis travels a distance defined in MD: REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST without detecting the reference mark, the axis stops and alarm 20002 "Zero mark missing" is signaled. 2-248 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Anwendungsbeispiel: If, on incremental measurement systems, the control is required to detect reliably that the same zero mark is always used for synchronization (to avoid detection of an incorrect machine zero), the maximum value in this MD must not exceed the distance between two reference marks. 34070 REFP_VELO_POS mm/min, rev/min Reference point positioning velocity A03, A11, A04 R1 DOUBLE RESET - - 10000.00 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: With incremental measuring systems: The axis travels at this velocity between the time of synchronization with the first zero mark and arrival at the reference point. 34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST A03, A11 R1 mm, degrees Reference point distance/target point with distance- DOUBLE coded system [encoder number]: 0 NEW CONF - 2 -2.0 -1e15 1e15 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 - Description: 34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR A03, A02, A08, A11 R1 mm, degrees Reference point offset/absolute offset, distancecoded, n: [encoder number]: 0 DOUBLE NEW CONF - 2 0.0 -1e12 1e12 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 -, - 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-249 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: - Incremental encoder with zero mark(s): After detecting the zero mark, the axis is positioned away from the zero mark through the distance specified by MD 34080: REFP_MOVE_DIST + REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR. Once the axis has traveled this distance, it has reached the reference point. MD 34100: REFP_SET_POS is included in the actual value. Override switches are effective during the traversing motion through REFP_MOVE_DIST+REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR. - Absolute value encoder: REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR is effective as absolute offset. It defines the offset between machine zero and the zero mark of the absolute measuring system. Note: this MD is changed by the control during calibration and modulo correction in conjunction with the absolute encoders! 34092 REFP_CAM_SHIFT A03, A11 R1 mm, degrees Electronic reference cam offset for incremental measuring systems with equidistant zero marks DOUBLE RESET 2 - 7/2 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: 34093 REFP_CAM_MARKER_DIST A03, A11 R1 mm, degrees Reference cam/reference mark distance DOUBLE POWER ON 2 - 7/2 -, READ - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: The indicated value is equivalent to the distance between departure from the reference cam and detection of the reference mark. If the values are too small, there is a risk that the determination of the reference point will be non-deterministic, due to temperature effects or fluctuations in the operating time of the cam signal. The path covered can be used as a guide for setting the electronic reference cam offset. The machine data is read only. related to: REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE, REFP_SHIFT_CAM 2-250 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 34100 REFP_SET_POS A03, A11 R1 mm, degrees Reference point for an incremental system DOUBLE RESET - 4 0. -45000000 45000000 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: - Incremental encoder with zero mark(s): The position value which is set as the current position after detecting the zero mark and traveling through the distance REFP_MOVE_DIST + REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR (relative to the zero mark). - Absolute value encoder: REFP_SET_POS corresponds to the correct actual value at the calibration position. The reaction on the machine depends on the status of MD34210: ENC_REFP_STATE: When MD 34210: ENC_REFP_STATE = 1, the value of REFP_SET_POS is transferred as the absolute value. When MD 34210: ENC_REFP_STATE = 2 and MD 34330: REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER=0, the axis approaches the target position defined in REFP_SET_POS. The value from REFP_SET_POS is used. Note: MD: REFP_SET_POS[1]...[3] reserved - do not use. related to: 34110 REFP_CYCLE_NR A03 R1 - Axis sequence for channel-specific referencing DWORD POWER ON - - 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,1-1 1,12,13,14,15,16,17, 18... 31 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: 0: Axis-specific referencing Axis-specific referencing is started separately for each machine axis with the "plus/minus travel keys" interface signal. All axes can be referenced at the same time. If the machine axes are to be referenced in a particular order, the following options are available: (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-251 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data D The operator must follow the order himself after starting. D The PLC must check the order after starting or define the order itself. The machine axis is not started via channel-specific referencing . The NC cannot be started without first referencing this axis. -1:The machine axis is started using channel-specific referencing. NC start is possible without referencing this axis. Note: The effect of inputting -1 for all axes of a channel can be achieved by setting the channel-specific MD 20700: REFP_NC_START_LOCK (NC start disable without reference point) to zero. > 0:Channel-specific referencing Channel specific referencing is started with the "activate referencing" interface signal (V3200 0001.0). The control acknowledges a successful start with the "referencing active" interface signal. Each machine axis assigned to the channel can be referenced with channel-specific referencing (this is achieved internally on the control by simulating the plus/minus travel keys). MD: REFP_CYCLE_NR can be used to define the sequence in which machine data is referenced: 1: The machine axis is started using channel-specific referencing. 2: The machine axis is started using channel-specific referencing if all of the machine axes designated in MD: REFP_CYCLE_NR with a 1 are referenced. 3: The machine axis is started using channel-specific referencing if all of the machine axes designated in MD: REFP_CYCLE_NR with a 2 are referenced. 4: The machine axis is started using channel-specific referencing if all of the machine axes designated in MD: REFP_CYCLE_NR with a 3 are referenced. Irrelevant for: Axis-specific referencing related to: "Activate referencing" interface signal "Referencing active" interface signal 34120 REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE A02 M5 - BERO polarity change BOOLEAN POWER ON - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: With this MD, the electrical "polarity" of a BERO connected to the digital drive is indicated. REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE = 0 means: Non-deflected state 0 V (low), deflected state 24 V (high) REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE = 1 means: Non-deflected state 24 V (high), deflected state 0 V (low) The polarity is evaluated in the referencing mode ENC_REFP_MODE = 5. 2-252 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Note: The use of this MD is allowed only in conjunction with ENC_REFP_MODE = 5 and the following SIMODRIVE 611 closed-loop control modules: Performance 1 control module (1 axis) 6SN1118R0DG2*-0AA1 Performance 1 control module (2 axes) 6SN1118R0DH2*-0AA1 Performance 2 control module (2 axes) 6SN1118R0DK23-0AA0 Related to: ENC_REFP_MODE 34200 ENC_REFP_MODE A03, A02 R1 - Referencing mode [encoder no.]: 0 BYTE POWER ON - 2 1 0 8 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: All mounted position measuring systems can be subdivided as follows for referencing: 0: if absolute encoder exists: transfer of MD 34100: REFP_SET_POS Other encoders: no reference point travel possible 1: referencing with incremental measuring systems: Incremental rotary measuring system Incremental linear measuring system (position measuring system) Zero pulse on encoder track (not with absolute encoders) 2, 3, 4, 5, 6: not available 7: synchronize spindle with BERO, configured approach velocity (MD 34040) related to: 34210 ENC_REFP_STATE A07, A03, A02 R1 - Adjustment status of absolute encoder BYTE SOFORT - 2 0 0 2 7/4 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 - Description: - Absolute encoder: This machine data contains the absolute encoder status 0: Encoder is not calibrated 1: Encoder calibration enabled (but not yet calibrated) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-253 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 2: Encoder is calibrated Default setting for new startup: Encoder is not calibrated. Incremental encoder: This machine data contains the "Referenced status", which can be saved over Power On: 0: Default setting: No automatic referencing 1: Automatic referencing enabled, but encoder not yet referenced 2: Encoder is referenced and at exact stop, automatic referencing active with next encoder activation Default setting for new startup: No automatic referencing 34220 ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO A03, A02 R2 - Modulo range for rotary absolute encoder DWORD POWER ON 2 100000 7/2 - 4096 1 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: Number of encoder revolutions, which a rotary absolute encoder can resolve (cf. also maximum multiturn information of the absolute encoder, cf. encoder data sheet or, for example SIMODRIVE 611D-MD 1021 or 1031). The absolute position of a rotary axis is reduced to this resolvable range when an absolute encoder is switched on: That means that a MODULO transformation takes place, if the actual position sensed is larger than the position permitted by MD ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO. 0 degree <= position <= n*360 degrees, (with n = ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO) Note: With SW 2.2, the position is reduced to this range when the control/encoder is switched on. With SW 3.6 and higher, half of this value represents the maximum permissible travel distance with the control swiched off / the encoder inactive. Special cases: For SIMODRIVE 611D, only powers of two are permissible values ( 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, ..., 4096). If other values are entered, these are "rounded down" up to SW < 4.1 without any further message. With SW 4.1 and higher, a rounded down value bcomes visible in the machine data and is indicated by alarm 26025. This MD is relevant only for rotary encoders (on linear and rotary axes). Important recommendation: The default value "1 encoder revolution" has been changed for SW 3.6 and higher to "4096". The new value is a more robust setting for the most frequently used encoder types. 2-254 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data When an encoder with a smaller multiturn information (encoder data sheet!) is used or when singleturn encoders are used, the value must be reduced accordingly. In either case, the value should be adjusted with multiturn absolute encoders to the maximum variable supported by the encoder, in order to be able to utilize the definite maximum travel range (Please observe: This value also influences the permissible position offset with the encoder inactive/Power Off). Related to: SIMODRIVE 611D-MD 1021, ENC_ABS_TURNS_MOTOR, SIMODRIVE 611D-MD 1031, ENC_ABS_TURNS_DIRECT 34990 ENC_ACTVAL_SMOOTH_TIME A02 V1 s Smoothing time constant for actual values. DOUBLE RESET 2 0.5 7/2 - 0.0 0.0 802d-cu3 1 - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 1 - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 1 - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 1 - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 1 - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 1 - - - 3/3 Description: Using low-resolution encoders, a more continuous motion of coupled path or axis motions can be achieved with smoothed actual values. The bigger the time constant, the better the smoothing of actual values and the larger the overtravel. Smoothed actual values are used for: Thread-cutting (G33, G34, G35) Revolutional feedrate (G95, G96, G97, FPRAON) Display of actual position and velocity, or speed respectively. 35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX A01, A06, A11 S1 - Assignment of spindle to machine axis BYTE POWER ON - - 0 0 20 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The machine axis that is to be used as a spindle is entered into this MD. Anwendungsbeispiel: (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-255 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data An example of a milling machine with 3 machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1) and a spindle: SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX1] = 0 --->X1 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX2] = 0 --->Y1 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX3] = 0 --->Z1 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX4] = 1 --->Spindle no. 1 is the 4th machine axis related to: MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis/spindle) MD 30310: ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis/spindle) This machine data must be set; otherwise, the alarms 4210 "Rotary axis declaration missing" and 4215 "Modulo axis declaration missing" are output. MD 30320: DISPLAY_IS_MODULO (display modulo 360 degrees) IS "Spindle/no axis" (V390x 0000.0) 35010 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE A06, A11 S1 - Gear stage change possible DWORD RESET CTEQ - - 0x00 0 0x2B 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: If the spindle motor is mounted to the spindle directly (1:1) or with a nonadjustable gear ratio, GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change is possible) must be set to zero. It is not possible to change the gear stage with M40 to M45. If the spindle motor is mounted to the spindle via a gearbox with changeable gear stages, GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE must be set to one. The gear can have up to 5 gear stages, which can be selected using M40, M41 to M45. related to: MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (maximum speed for gear stage change) MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (min. speed for gear stage change) GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO and GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO must cover the whole speed range. 35012 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION A06, A11 S1 mm, degrees Gear stage change position DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ - 6 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 2-256 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: Gear stage change position. The value range must be within the configured modulo range. Related to: MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE, bit 1 MD 30330: MODULO_RANGE 35014 GEAR_STEP_USED_IN_AXISMODE A01, A06, A11 - - Gear stage for axis mode with M70 DWORD NEW CONF 5 7/2 CTEQ - - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: With this MD, a gear stage can be defined which can be loaded into the axis mode during the transition with M70. The parameter set zero used in axis mode is to be optimized on this gear stage. Significance of the values: 0: There is no implicit gear stage change with M70. The current gear stage is retained. 1 ... 5: There is a change into gear stage (1...5) during the execution of M70. During the transition into axis mode without M70, there is monitoring for this gear stage and alarm 22022 is issued if necessary. The condition for a gear stage change is the general release of the function in MD 35010 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE. Secondary conditions: When changing from axis mode into spindle mode, the configured gear stage continues to remain active. There is no automatic return to the last active gear stage in spindle mode. 35020 SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE A06, A10 S1 - Initial spindle setting BYTE RESET CTEQ - - 0 0 3 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-257 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE activates the operating mode of the spindle at the time specified in MD 35030: SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK. The appropriate spindle operating modes can be selected with the following values: 0 Speed mode, position control deselected 1 Speed mode, position control activated 2 Positioning mode 3 Axis mode Related to: MD 35030: SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK (activate initial spindle setting) 35030 SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK A06, A10 S1 - Time at which initial spindle setting is effective BYTE RESET - 0x03 7/2 CTEQ - 0x00 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK specifies the time at which the operating mode defined in MD 35020: SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE becomes effective. The initial spindle setting can be assigned the following values at the following points in time: 0 POWER ON 1 POWER ON and NC program start 2 POWER ON and RESET (M2/M30) Special cases: If MD 35040: SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET = 1, the following supplementary conditions are applicable: SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK should be set to 0 If this is not possible, the spindle must be at standstill prior activation. to Related to: MD 35020: SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE (initial spindle setting) MD 35040: SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (spindle active via reset) 35040 SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET A06, A10 S1 - Spindle active after reset BYTE POWER ON CTEQ - - 0 0 2 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 2-258 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: This MD defines the response of the spindle after reset (V3200 0000.7) and program end (M2, M30). It is only active in the spindle control mode. 0: Open-loop control mode:- Spindle stops; applies to M2/M30 and Reset - Program is aborted; applies to M2/M30 Oscillation mode:- Alarm 10640 "Stop not possible during gear change" - Oscillation is not aborted - Axes are stopped - Program is aborted after gear change or spindle reset, the alarm is cleared. Positioning mode:- Is stopped Axis mode:- Is stopped ------------------------------------------------------------------------1: Open-loop control mode:- Spindle does not stop - Program is aborted Oscillation mode:- Alarm 10640 "Stop not possible during gear change" - Oscillation is not aborted - Axes are stopped - Program is aborted after gear change, the alarm is cleared and the spindle continues rotating at the programmed M and S value. Positioning mode:- Is stopped Axis mode:- Is stopped The IS "Spindle reset" (V380x 0002.2) is always active irrespective of SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET. Irrelevant for: All spindle modes except control mode related to: IS "Reset" (V3200 0000.7) IS "Spindle reset" (V380x 0002.2) 35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT A06, A11, A04 S1 rev/min Maximum spindle speed DOUBLE POWER ON - 7/2 CTEQ - - 10000.0 1.0e-3 Description: The maximum spindle speed is defined in this MD, which the spindle (the spindle chuck with the workpiece or the tool) must not exceed. The NCK limits an excessive spindle speed setpoint to this value. If the maximum spindle actual speed is exceeded, even allowing for the spindle speed tolerance (MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, there is a fault in the drive and the IS "Speed limit exceeded" (V390x 2001.0) is enabled. Alarm 22050 "Maximum speed reached" is also output and all of the axes and spindles on the channel brought to a standstill (provided the encoder is still functioning correctly). related to: MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL (spindle speed tolerance) IS "Speed limit exceeded" (V390x 2001.0) Alarm 22050 "Maximum speed reached" (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-259 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO A06, A11, A04 S1 rev/min Maximum speed for gear stage change [gear stage number]: 0...5 (index 0 is irrelevant for spindles) DOUBLE NEW CONF 6 - 7/2 CTEQ - 500., 500., 1000., 2000., 4000., 8000. 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The maximum speed of the gear stage for automatic gear stage change (M40 ) is defined. The gear stages must be defined by this MD and MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT in a way that avoids gaps in the programmable spindle speed range between the gear stages. Incorrect GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO [gear stage1] =1000 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO [gear stage2] =1200 Correct GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO [gear stage1] =1000 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO [gear stage2] =950 related to: MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change is possible) MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (minimum speed for gear stage change) MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (minimum speed for gear stage) MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (maximum speed for gear stage) 35112 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 rev/min 2nd data set: Maximum speed for gear stage change DOUBLE A06, A11, A04 NEW CONF S1 6 2/2 CTEQ - 500., 500., 1000., 0 2000., 4000., 8000. - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: With GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2, the 2nd data set for the max. speeds (upper switching threshold) of the gear stages for the automatic gear stage change (M40) is set. The gear stage must be defined via GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 and MD 35122: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 so that there are no gaps between the gear stages in the programmable spindle speed range. 2-260 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Examples: incorrect: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 correct: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 [gear stage 1] =1000 [gear stage 2] =1200 [gear stage 1] =1000 [gear stage 2] =950 Activation of the 2nd gear stage data block for tapping with G331/G332 via MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE bit 5 of the master spindle. Corresponding with: MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (min. speed of gear stage) MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (max. speed of gear stage) 35120 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO A06, A11, A04 S1 rev/min Minimum speed for gear stage change [gear stage number]: 0 ... 5 DOUBLE NEW CONF 6 - 7/2 CTEQ - 50., 50., 400., 800., 1500., 3000. 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The minimum speed of the gear stage for automatic gear stage change (M40 ) is defined. Refer to MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO for more information. related to: MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (maximum speed for gear stage change) MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change is possible) MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (minimum speed for gear stage) MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (maximum speed for gear stage) 35122 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 A06, A11, A04 S1 rev/min 2nd data set: Minimum speed for gear stage change DOUBLE NEW CONF - 6 50., 50., 400., 800., 0 1500., 3000. - 2/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 CTEQ Description: In GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 the 2nd data block of the minimum speeds (lower (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-261 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data switching thresholds) of the gear stages for automatic gear stage change (M40) is set. The gear stages must be defined with GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 and MD 35112: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 so that there are no gaps between the gear stages within the programmable spindle speed range. Examples: incorrect: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 correct: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 [gear stage 1] = 1000 [gear stage 2] = 1200 [gear stage 1] = 1000 [gear stage 2] = 950 Activation of the 2nd gear stage data block for tapping with G331/G332 via MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE bit 5 of the master spindle. Corresponding with MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (min. speed of the gear stage) MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (max. speed of the gear stage) 35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT rev/min Maximum speed for gear stage [gear stage number]; DOUBLE 0 ... 5 A06, A11, A04 S1 NEW CONF - 6 500., 500., 1000., 1.0e-3 2000., 4000., 8000. - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 CTEQ Description: The maximum speed for the gear stage is defined. This speed can never be exceeded in the currently engaged gear stage. Special cases: - When the closed-loop position control is enabled, then a limit is set to 90% of the value (control margin) - If an S value is programmed, that lies above the max. speed of the gearbox stage selected, the reference (setpoint) speed is limited to the maximum speed of the gear stage (for gear stage selection - M41 to M45); further, the IS: "Programmed speed too high" is set. - If an S value is programmed that lies above the max. speed for gear stage change, a new gear stage is specified (for automatic gear stage selection M40). - If an S value is programmed, that lies above the max. speed of the highest gear stage, the speed is limited to the max. speed of the gear stage (for automatic gear stage selection - M40). - If an S value is programmed for which there is no matching gear stage, then a gear stage change is not made. 2-262 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data related to: MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change is possible) MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (maximum speed for gear stage change) MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (minimum speed for gear stage change) MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (min. speed of gear stage) IS "Setpoint speed limited" (V390x 2001.1) 35135 GEAR_STEP_PC_MAX_VELO_LIMIT A06, A11, A04 S1 rev/min Maximum speed of the gear stage with position control DOUBLE NEW CONF 6 - 7/2 CTEQ - 0. 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: In GEAR_STEP_PC_MAX_VELO_LIMIT the maximum speed of the gear stage is set with the position control active. If value 0 is set (default), 90% of the value from MD35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (control margin) will become the max. speed of the gear stage with position control active. This limit speed is limited to a value that does not exceed MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT and MD 35100: SPIND_VELO_LIMIT. If an S value is programmed that exceeds the limit speed, the setpoint speed is limited to the limit speed. In this case, the VDI interface signal "Programmed speed too high" will be set. Related to: MD 35010: MD 35110: MD 35120: MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change possible) GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (max. speed for gear stage change) GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (min. speed for gear stage change) GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (min. speed of the gear stage) 35140 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT rev/min Minimum speed for gear stage [gear stage number]: 0 DOUBLE ... 5 A06, A11, A04 S1 NEW CONF 6 7/2 CTEQ - 5., 10., 20., 40., 80. - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-263 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: The minimum gear stage speed is entered. The speed cannot drop to below this value, even if a very low S value is programmed. The speed can only drop to below this minimum value as a result of the signals/commands/states listed in "Minimum/maximum speed for the gear stage". Irrelevant for: Spindle mode, oscillation mode, positioning mode Anwendungsbeispiel: Smooth operation of the motor is not assured below the minimum speed. related to: MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change is possible) MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (maximum speed for gear stage change) MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (minimum speed for gear stage change) MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (max. speed of gear stage) IS "Setpoint speed increased" (V390x 2001.2) 35150 SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL A03, A05, A06, A10, A04 S1 - Spindle speed tolerance DOUBLE RESET - - 0.1 0.0 1.0 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Factor for spindle speed for determining the tolerance in the spindle mode control mode. The set speed (programmed speed x spindle override, allowing for limits) is compared with the actual speed. - If the actual speed deviates from the setpoint speed by more than the SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, IS "spindle in setpoint range" (V390x 2001.5) is set to zero. - If the actual speed exceeds the maximum spindle speed (MD 35100: SPIND_VELO_LIMIT) by more than SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, the IS "Speed limit exceeded" is set (V390x 2001.0) and alarm 22050 "Maximum speed reached" is output. All axes and spindles of the channel are brought to a standstill. Irrelevant for: Spindle mode oscillation mode Spindle mode positioning mode related to: MD 35500: SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START MD 35100: SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (maximum spindle speed) IS "Spindle in setpoint range" (V390x 2001.5) IS "Speed limit exceeded" (V390x 2001.0) Alarm 22050 "Maximum speed reached" 2-264 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 35160 SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT A06, A04 S1 rev/min Spindle speed limiting via PLC DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ - - 1000.0 1.0e-3 - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: A limit for the spindle speed is entered, which is taken into account when the IS "Velocity/speed limiting" (V380x 0003.6) is enabled. The control limits an excessive spindle speed setpoint to this value. 35200 GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL rev/s Acceleration in control mode [gear stage number]: 0 DOUBLE ... 5 A06, A11, A04, - S1 NEW CONF - 6 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0 1.0e-3 - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 CTEQ Description: If the spindle is in control mode, the acceleration in GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL. is entered. Special cases: Thus the acceleration in speed control mode can be set so that the current limit is reached. related to: MD 35210: GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL (acceleration in position control mode) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-265 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL A06, A11, A04, - S1 rev/s Acceleration in position control mode [gear stage number]: 0 ... 5 DOUBLE NEW CONF 6 - 7/2 CTEQ - 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0 1.0e-3 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The acceleration in position control mode must be set so that the current limit is not reached. related to: MD 35200: GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL 35212 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL2 A06, A11, A04, - S1 rev/s 2nd data set: Acceleration in position control mode DOUBLE NEW CONF 6 - 2/2 CTEQ - 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0 1.0e-3 Description: Second gear stage data set for maximum acceleration capability of the gear stages in position control mode. The acceleration in position control mode must be set so that the current limit is not reached. Activation of the 2nd data set for tapping with G331/G332 via MD 35010 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE, bit 5 for the master spindle. Related to: MD 35210: GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL MD 35200: GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL MD 35220: ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT 35300 SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO A06, A04 S1 rev/min Position control activation speed DOUBLE NEW CONF 7/2 CTEQ - 6 500.0 - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 2-266 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: When positioning a spindle that is not in position control mode, the position control is not activated until the spindle has reached the speed defined in MD: SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO. Please refer to Chapter "Spindle mode, positioning mode" for a description of spindle operating characteristics under various supplementary conditions (positioning from movement, positioning from standstill). related to: MD 35350: SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR (direction of rotation during positioning from standstill), if no synchronization is available. 35310 SPIND_POSIT_DELAY_TIME A06, A04 S1 s Positioning delay time [gear stage number]: 0 ... 5 DOUBLE NEW CONF 6 - 7/2 CTEQ - 0.0, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: After reaching the positioning end (exact stop fine) the time delay for block search is activated at output of a collected positioning block (SPOS). related to: 35350 SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR - Positioning direction of rotation for a nonsynchronized BYTE spindle A06 S1 RESET - 7/2 CTEQ - 3 3 4 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: When SPOS is programmed, the spindle is switched to position control mode and accelerates with the acceleration defined in MD 35210: GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL (acceleration in position control mode) if the spindle is not synchronized. The direction of rotation is defined by MD 35350: SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR (direction of rotation for positioning from standstill). SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR = 3 --->Clockwise rotation SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR = 4 --->Counterclockwise rotation related to: MD 35300: SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO (position control activation speed) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-267 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 35400 SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO A06, A04 S1 rev/min Oscillation speed DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ - - 500.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: During oscillation, the IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) is used to select a motor speed for the spindle motor. The motor speed is defined here. This motor speed is independent of the current gear stage. In the AUTOMATIC and MDA displays, the oscillation speed is displayed in the "spindle setpoint" window until the gear is changed. Irrelevant for: All spindle modes except oscillation mode Anwendungsbeispiel: The to and fro oscillation of the spindle motor makes it easier to engage a new gear stage because the teeth on the gear wheels can mesh with each other better. Special cases: The oscillation acceleration defined in MD 35410: SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL is valid for the oscillation speed defined in this MD. related to: MD 35410: SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL (acceleration in oscillation mode) MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT[n] (maximum speed of the gear stage) IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4) IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) 35410 SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL A06, A04, - S1 rev/s Oscillation acceleration DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ - - 16.0 1.0e-3 - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The acceleration specified is only effective for the output of the oscillation speed (MD 35400: SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO) to the spindle motor. The oscillation speed is selected using the IS "Oscillation speed". 2-268 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Irrelevant for: All spindle modes except oscillation mode related to: MD 35400: SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO (Oscillation speed) IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4) 35430 SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR A06 S1 - Oscillation start direction BYTE RESET CTEQ - - 0 0 4 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: With the IS "Oscillation speed", the spindle motor accelerates to the speed specified in MD 35400: SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO. The start direction is defined by this MD: SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR if IS "Oscillation via PLC" is not enabled. 0: start direction corresponding with the last direction of rotation 1: start direction in opposite direction of last rotation 2: start direction in opposite direction of last rotation 3: start direction is M3 4: start direction is M4 Irrelevant for: All spindle modes except oscillation mode related to: MD 35400: SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO (Oscillation speed) IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4) 35440 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW A06 S1 s Oscillation time for M3 direction DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/2 CTEQ - - 1.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-269 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: The oscillation time defined here acts in direction of M3. Irrelevant for: - All spindle modes except oscillation mode - Oscillation set by the PLC (IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4)) related to: MD 35450: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW (Oscillation time for M4 direction) IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4) 35450 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW A06 S1 s Oscillation time for M4 direction DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ - - 0.5 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The oscillation time defined here acts in direction of M4. Irrelevant for: - All spindle modes except oscillation mode - Oscillation set by the PLC (IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4)) related to: MD 35440: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (Oscillation time for M3 direction) IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4) 35500 SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START A03, A06, A10 S1 - Feed enable with spindle in setpoint range BYTE RESET - - 1 0 2 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 CTEQ Description: 0: path interpolation is not influenced 1: path interpolation is only enabled when the spindle has reached the specified speed (tolerance band is set via MD35150). 2: function as for value =1, in addition: Traveling path axes are also stopped before machining. e.g. continuous path mode (G64) and change of rapid traverse (G60) in one machining block (G1, G2,...). The path is stopped at the last G0 block and does not start moving until the spindle has reached the speed setpoint range. 2-270 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Anwendungsbeispiel: see MD 35510 related to: MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL (spindle speed tolerance) IS "Spindle in setpoint range" (V390x 2001.5) 35510 SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START A03, A06, A10 S1 - Feed enable with stationary spindle BOOLEAN RESET CTEQ - - FALSE - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: When a spindle is stopped (M5), the path feed is disabled if this MD is enabled and the spindle is in control mode. When the spindle has come to a standstill (IS, "axis/spindle stationary" (V390x 0001.4) is enabled), the path feed is enabled. Anwendungsbeispiel: The MD 35500 and this MD 35510 can be used to control the path feed according to the actual spindle speed (control mode): - If the spindle is in the acceleration phase (programmed setpoint not yet reached), the path feed is disabled. - If the actual speed deviates from the speed setpoint by less than the spindle speed tolerance (MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL), the path feed is enabled.. - If the spindle is in the braking phase, the path feed is disabled. - If the spindle is signaled to be stationary (IS: "Axis/spindle stationary " V390x 0001.4) path feed is enabled. - In blocks with G0, the modification is not active. related to: MD 35500: SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START (feed enable for spindle in setpoint range) 35550 DRILL_VELO_LIMIT A06, A11, A04 - rev/min Maximum speeds for tapping DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ - 6 10000. 1 - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-271 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: Limit speed values for tapping without compensating chuck with G331/G332. The maximum speed of the linear motor characteristic range (constant acceleration capacity) must be specified depending on the gear stage. 36000 STOP_LIMIT_COARSE A05 B1 mm, degrees Exact stop coarse DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.04 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: An NC block has been completed when the distance in between the actual position of the path axes and the setpoint (reference) position is the exact stop limit that has been entered. If the actual position of a path axis is not within these limits, the NC block is not considered complete and continued part program processing is not possible. Transition to the next block can be influenced by the value entered. The larger the value, the earlier block change can be initiated. If the defined exact stop limit is not reached, - the block is not considered completed, - it is not possible to continue traversing the axis, - alarm 25080 positioning monitoring is triggered after the time in MD 36020: POSITIONING_TIME (monitoring time exact stop fine) has elapsed, - the direction of movement +/- is displayed for the axis in the positioning display. The exact stop window is also evaluated for spindles in position control mode. Special cases: This MD may not be smaller than the setting in MD 36010: STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine). In order to achieve the same block change behavior as for exact stop, the exact stop coarse window can be the same as that for exact stop fine. This MD may not be equal to or larger than the setting in MD 36030: STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero-speed tolerance). related to: MD 36020: POSITIONING_TIME (exact stop fine delay time) 36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE A05 B1 mm, degrees Exact stop fine DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/2 - - 0.01 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 2-272 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: See MD 3600: STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (exact stop coarse) Special cases: This MD must not be greater than the setting in MD 36000: STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (exact stop coarse). This MD must not be equal to or greater than the setting in MD 36030: STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero-speed tolerance). related to: MD 36020: POSITIONING_TIME (exact stop fine delay time) 36020 POSITIONING_TIME A05 B1,A3 s Time delay exact stop fine DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 1.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This MD defines the time after which the following error must have reached the limit value for exact stop fine when approaching a position (position setpoint has reached the target). If this is not the case, alarm 25080 "Positioning monitoring" is set and the relevant axis is stopped. The MD setting should be large enough that the monitoring function does not respond during normal operation, as the complete traversing operation (acceleration, constant travel, deceleration) is monitored by other functions. related to: MD 36010: STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine) 36030 STANDSTILL_POS_TOL A05 A3 mm, degrees Zero-speed tolerance DOUBLE NEW CONF 7/2 - - 0.2 - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: At the end of a motion block (position setpoint has reached the target), monitoring checks whether the axis is not more than the distance specified in MD 36040: STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME (zero-speed monitoring delay time) from its setpoint after the configurable delay time in MD 36060: STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero-speed tolerance) has expired. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-273 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data If the setpoint position zero-speed tolerance has been violated in any direction, alarm 25040 "Zero-speed monitoring" is triggered and the axis is brought to a standstill. Special cases: The zero-speed tolerance must be greater than the "Exact stop limit coarse". related to: MD 36040: STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME (zero-speed monitoring delay time) 36040 STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME A05 A3 s Zero-speed monitoring delay time DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/2 - - 0.4 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: See MD 36030: STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero-speed tolerance) related to: MD 36030: STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero-speed tolerance) 36050 CLAMP_POS_TOL A05 A3 mm, degrees Clamping tolerance with interface signal "Clamping active" DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 7/2 - 0.5 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The clamping monitor is activated by "Clamping active" interface signal (V380x 0002.3). If the monitored axis has been pushed out of the setpoint position (exact stop limit) by more than the clamping tolerance, alarm 26000 "Clamping monitoring" is triggered and the axis is stopped. Special cases: The clamping tolerance must be larger than the "Exact stop limit coarse". related to: IS "Clamping in progress" 2-274 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 36060 STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL mm/min, rev/min Maximum velocity/speed "Axis/spindle stationary" A05, A04 A2 DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 5.00 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The zero-speed range for the axis velocity and spindle speed is set in this machine data. If the actual velocity of the axis or the actual speed of the spindle is smaller than the value entered, and if no more setpoints are being output to the axis/ spindle, interface signal "Axis/spindle stationary" (V390x 0001.4) is set. Anwendungsbeispiel: The pulse enable should not be removed until the axis/spindle is stationary to ensure that the axis/spindle is stopped in a controlled manner. Otherwise the axis will coast to rest. related to: "Axis/ spindle stationary" interface signal (V390x 0001.4) 36100 POS_LIMIT_MINUS A03, A05, A11, - A3 mm, degrees 1st software limit, switch minus DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ - - -1.0e8 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Same meaning as 1st software limit switch but applies to the traversing limit in the negative direction. The MD is effective after reference point approach if PLC interface signal "2nd software limit switch minus" is not set. Irrelevant for: If axis is not referenced. related to: "2nd software limit switch minus" interface signal (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-275 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 36110 POS_LIMIT_PLUS A03, A05, A11, - A3 mm, degrees 1. Software limit, switch plus DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ - - 1.0e8 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: A software limit switch can be activated in addition to a hardware limit switch. The absolute position, in the machine coordinate system, of the positive range limit is entered for each axis. The MD is effective after reference point approach if interface signal "2nd software limit switch plus" is not enabled. Irrelevant for: If axis is not referenced. related to: "2nd software limit switch plus" interface signal 36120 POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 A03, A05, - A3 mm, degrees 2nd software limit, switch minus DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ - - -1.0e8 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Same meaning as 2nd software limit switch plus, but applies to the traversing limit in the negative direction. An interface signal can be used to select from the PLC which of the software limit switches 1 or 2 is to apply. e.g.V380x 1000 Bit 2 = 0"1st software limit switch minus" active for 1st axis Bit 2 = 1"2nd software limit switch minus" active for 1st axis Irrelevant for: If axis is not referenced. related to: "2nd software limit switch minus" interface signal 2-276 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 36130 POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 A03, A05, - A3 mm, degrees 2nd software limit, switch plus DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ - - 1.0e8 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This machine data can be used to specify a 2nd software limit switch position in the positive direction in the machine axis system. An interface signal can be used to select from the PLC which of the software limit switches 1 or 2 is to apply. e.g.:V380x 1000 Bit 3 = 0"1st software limit switch plus" active for 1st axis Bit 3 = 1"2nd software limit switch plus" active for 1st axis. Irrelevant for: If axis is not referenced. related to: "2nd software limit switch plus" interface signal 36200 AX_VELO_LIMIT mm/min, rev/min Threshold value for velocity monitoring A05, A11, A04 A3,G2 DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/2 CTEQ - 6 11500. - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The threshold value for the actual velocity monitoring function is entered in this MD. If the axis has at least one active encoder and this is operating below its limit frequency, alarm 25030 "Actual velocity alarm limit" is activated and the axes brought to a standstill when the threshold value is exceeded. Settings - BFor axes, a value that lies 10-15% above MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity) should be chosen. - For spindles, a value should be selected for each gear stage which is 10-15% higher than MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT[n] (maximum speed of gear stage). Machine data index has the following code: [control parameter set number]: 0-5 Please refer to the following for the effect of control parameters sets: References: Chapter "Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control" (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-277 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 36210 CTRLOUT_LIMIT EXP, A05 G2 % Maximum speed setpoint DOUBLE NEW CONF 200 7/2 CTEQ - 1 110.0 0 Description: The maximum speed setpoint is defined as a percentage in this MD. The value refers to the speed (100%) at which the axis velocity of MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO is reached. A value larger than 100% contains the required control reserve for digital drives. If settings beyond the limit are made, the MD value is used as the limiter, an alarm is emitted and the axes brought to a halt. With an analog spindle the maximum speed that con be output is limited by the maximum setpoint output voltage of 10V. The value in this MD should not be greater than the speed value that is reached at this voltage (100%). Index[n] of the machine data is coded as follows: [setpoint branch]: 0 36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT EXP, A02, A05, A3 A06 - Encoder limit frequency DOUBLE POWER ON - 2 3.0e5 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: The encoder frequency is entered into this MD. The active encoder is defined via the "Position measuring system 1" interface signal (V380x 0001.5). related to: MD 36302: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW 36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW EXP, A02, A05, A3 A06 % Encoder limit frequency resynchronization DOUBLE NEW CONF 2 100 7/2 - 99.9 0 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 2-278 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: The encoder frequency monitoring function operates with a hysteresis. MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT defines the encoder limit frequency at which the encoder is switched off, MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW the frequency at which the encoder is switched back on again. MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW is a fraction of MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT in percent. Normally the default of MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW is enough. However, the limit frequency of the absolute track on absolute value encoders with En-Dat interface is significantly lower than the limit frequency of the incremental track. By setting a low value in MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT, it is possible to ensure that the encoder is not switched on again until the frequency is lower than the limit frequency of the absolute track and is thus not referenced until permitted by the absolute track. This referencing takes place automatically for spindles. Example EQN 1325: Limit frequency of incremental track electronics: 430 kHz ===>MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT = 430000 Hz Limit frequency of absolute track: approx. 2000 encoder rev/min with 2048 marks, i.e. limit frequency (2000/60) * 2048 Hz = 68 kHz ===>MD 36302: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW = 68/430 = 15 % related to: 36310 ENC_ZERO_MONITORING EXP, A02, A05 A3 - Zero-mark monitoring DWORD NEW CONF - 2 0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2 Description: This machine data activates the zero-mark monitoring and determines the number of inadmissible zero marks. 0: Zero-mark monitoring OFF, encoder hardware monitoring ON 1-99, > 100: Number of identified zero-mark errors at which the monitoring should be activated 100: Zero-mark monitoring OFF, encoder hardware monitoring OFF Special cases: The zero-mark monitoring on absolute value encoders must be switched off with value = 0! (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-279 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 36400 CONTOUR_TOL A05, A11 A3 mm, degrees Contour monitoring tolerance band DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 1.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Tolerance band for max. contour deviation. The maximum difference between the real and expected actual value is entered in this MD. The input of a tolerance band is designed to prevent the contour monitoring function from responding erroneously due to slight fluctuations in speed resulting from normal control procedures (e.g. during first cut). This MD must be adapted to the position controller gain and, in the case of feedforward control, to the accuracy of the loop model MD 32810: EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME (equivalent time constant for speed loop feedforward control) and to the permissible acceleration rates and velocities. 36500 ENC_CHANGE_TOL mm, degrees Backlash compensation partial section/tolerance for DOUBLE position actual value changeover A02, A05 G2 NEW CONF - 7/2 - 0.1 - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Partial section when applying backlash compensation. This MD is used to manage large backlash compensation values. It ensures that the backlash is not switched through to the actual value all at once, but in n steps with an increment size as set in MD: ENC_CHANGE_TOL. Calculation of the backlash thus takes n servo cycles. If it takes too long to complete computation of the backlash, zero speed monitoring alarms may be generated. This MD only becomes effective if the MD: ENC_CHANGE_TOL is set higher than MD: BACK_LASH. related to: MD 32450: BACKLASH[0] (backlash compensation) 2-280 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 36600 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE EXP, A05 A3 - Deceleration behavior on hardware limit switch BYTE POWER ON - - 1 0 1 7/2 802d-cu3 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - 0 - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - 0 - - 2/2 CTEQ Description: If a rising signal edge is detected at the axis-specific hardware limit switch, the axis is decelerated immediately. The type of deceleration is specified via machine data: 0: controlled deceleration according to the acceleration ramp defined by MD 32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL (axis acceleration). 1: fast deceleration (setpoint default = 0) with reduction of following error. related to: "Hardware limit switch plus or minus" interface signal (V380x 1000.1 or V380x 1000.0) 36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME A05, - A3 s Length of the braking ramp for error states DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 7/2 - 0.05 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Where interpolating axes are involved, maintenance of the contour during the deceleration phase cannot be guaranteed. Notice:If the value for the duration of the braking ramp for error states has been set too high, controller enable is canceled even though the axis/spindle is still traversing. It is then stopped abruptly with speed setpoint 0. The time set in MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME should therefore be less than the time set in MD 36620: SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME (shutdown delay controller enable). related toIrrelevant for: MD 36620: SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIMEShutdown delay servo enable MD 36210: CTRLOUT_LIMITMaximum speed setpoint (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-281 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 36620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME A05, - A2 s Cutout delay servo enable DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.1 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Maximum delay time for removal of "controller enable" after a fault. If the axis/spindle is still moving the speed enable (controller enable) of the drive is removed by the control at the latest after the delay time set. The entered delay time is activated in the following events: - For faults which cause the axes to stop immediately - If IS "controller enable" is removed by the PLC As soon as the actual speed has reached the zero speed range (MD 36060: STANDSTILL_VELO_ TOL) "Servo enable" is removed for the drive. The time set must be long enough to allow the axis/spindle to be brought to zero speed from maximum traversing velocity/speed. If the axis/spindle is stationary, "controller enable" is removed for the drive immediately. Anwendungsbeispiel: The drive speed control should be maintained long enough for the axis/spindle to come to a standstill from maximum traversing speed. Removal of "controller enable" for a moving axis/spindle must be delayed until this has happened. Special cases: Caution: If the setting for the controller enable shutdown delay is too small the servo enable will be removed even though the axis/spindle is still moving. The axis/spindle is then stopped abruptly with setpoint 0. The time in this MD should therefore be greater than the duration of the brake ramp in error states (MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME). related to: IS "controller enable" (V380x 0002.1) MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (Time for braking ramp when an error occurs) 36710 DRIFT_LIMIT EXP, A07, A09 K3 % Drift limit value for automatic drift compensation DOUBLE NEW CONF 1 1.e9 1/1 - 0.0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 2-282 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: With MD: DRIFT_LIMIT, the magnitude of the drift additional value calculated during automatic drift compensation can be limited. If the drift additional value exceeds the limit value entered in MD: DRIFT_LIMIT, alarm 25070 "Drift value too large" is output and the drift additional value is limited to this value. MD irrelevant for: MD: DRIFT_ENABLE = 0 36720 DRIFT_VALUE EXP, A07, A09 K3 % Basic drift value for analog spindles only DOUBLE NEW CONF - 1 0.0 - - 1/1 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The basic drift value entered here is always applied as an additional speed setpoint value for the analog spindle. Irrelevant for: 37000 FIXED_STOP_MODE A10, - F1 - Travel to fixed stop mode BYTE POWER ON CTEQ - - 0 0 3 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The machine data specifies how the "Travel to fixed stop" function can be started. Value =0:Travel to fixed stop not available. = 1:Travel to fixed stop may be started from the NC program using the command FXS[x]=1. (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-283 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 37002 FIXED_STOP_CONTROL A10 F1 - Special function when traveling to fixed stop BYTE POWER ON - - 0 0 3 7/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 - 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Bit 0: Response for pulse inhibit at limit =0:Travel to fixed stop is canceled. = 1:Travel to fixed stop is interrupted, i.e. the drive is rendered powerless. As soon as the pulse block is canceled once more, the drive applies pressure again with the limited torque. The torque is applied abruptly. 37010 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF A10 F1 % Default for clamping torque DOUBLE POWER ON 100.0 7/2 CTEQ - - 5.0 0.0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The clamping torque is entered in this machine data as a percentage of the maximum motor torque (for FSD, corresponds with percentage of max. current setpoint) The clamping torque becomes operative as soon as the fixed stop is reached or IS "Acknowledge fixed stop" has been set. The entered value is a default and is effective only on the condition that - no clamping torque has been programmed with command FXST[x]. - the clamping torque set in SD 43510: FIXED_STOP_TORQUE has not been changed (after fixed stop was reached). related to: SD 43510: FIXED_STOP_TORQUE (clamping torque for travel to fixed stop) 2-284 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 37012 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_RAMP_TIME A10 F1 s Virtual time until reaching the new clamping torque when traveling to fixed stop DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Virtual time until reaching the modified torque limit. The subdivision is measured in the position controller cycle and applied abruptly. The value 0.0 deactivates the ramp function. 37014 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_FACTOR A10 F1 - Adaption factor torque limit DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/2 - - 1.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Interface factor torque limit. With this factor, the torque limit of linked slave axes (MD 37250) can be weighted additionally. Even with different motors, the torque limits can be kept equal in all linked axes. 37020 FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF A05, A10 F1 mm, degrees Default for fixed stop monitoring window DOUBLE POWER ON - - 7/2 CTEQ - 1.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-285 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: The default setting for the fixed stop monitoring window is set in this machine data. The fixed stop monitoring window becomes operative as soon as the fixed stop is reached, i.e. IS "Fixed stop reached" is set. If the axis/spindle leaves the position at which the fixed stop has been detected by more than the tolerance specified in MD: FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF, then alarm 20093 "Fixed stop monitoring has responded" is output and the "FXS" function deselected. The entered value is a default and is effective only on the condition that - no fixed stop monitoring window has been programmed with command FXSW[x] - the fixed stop monitoring window set via SD 43520: FIXED_STOP_WINDOW has not been changed (after fixed stop was reached). related to: SD 43520: FIXED_STOP_WINDOW (fixed stop monitoring window) 37030 FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD A10, - F1 mm, degrees Threshold for fixed stop detection DOUBLE NEW CONF - 7/2 - - 2.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The contour monitoring threshold for fixed stop detection is entered in this machine data. This machine data is effective only if MD: FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR is set to 0. IS "Fixed stop reached" is set if the axis-specific contour deviation exceeds the threshold set in MD: FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD. Irrelevant for: MD 37040: FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR = 1 related to: IS "Fixed stop reached" 37040 FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR A10 F1 - Fixed stop detection via sensor BYTE SOFORT CTEQ - - 0 0 3 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 2-286 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Description: The machine data specifies how the "Fixed stop reached" criterion is determined. Value=0:The "Fixed stop reached" criterion is determined internally based on the axis-specific contour deviation (threshold specified by MD: FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD). = 1:The "Fixed stop reached" criterion is determined via an external sensor and the NC is notified via IS "Fixed stop sensor". =2:The "Fixed stop reached" criterion is accepted provided either the contour monitoring function (setting = 0) or the signal from the external sensor (setting = 1) has responded. related to: MD 37030: FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD (threshold for fixed stop detection) IS "Sensor for fixed stop" 37050 FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK A05, A10 F1 - Enabling the fixed stop alarms BYTE NEW CONF 15 7/2 - - 1 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The machine data specifies whether the alarm 20091 "Fixed stop not reached" and 20094 "Fixed stop aborted" will be generated. Value= 0:suppress alarm 20091 "Fixed stop not reached" = 2:suppress alarms20091 "Fixed stop not reached" and 20094 "Fixed stop aborted" = 3:suppress alarm 20094 "Fixed stop aborted" All other permissible values of ? 7 do not suppress any alarms. 37060 FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK A10 F1 - Monitoring of PLC acknowledgments for travel to fixed stop BYTE POWER ON - 3 7/2 CTEQ - 0 0 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-287 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Description: This machine data determines whether or not the NC waits for acknowledgment messages from the PLC when the "Travel to fixed stop" function is active. Bit 0 = 0:Once the NC has transmitted IS "Activate travel to fixed stop" to the PLC, it starts the programmed travel motion. Bit 0 =1:After the NC has transferred IS "Activate travel to fixed stop" to the PLC, it waits for the PLC to acknowledge with IS "Enable travel to fixed stop" and then starts the programmed travel motion. Bit 1 = 0:Once the NC has transferred IS "Fixed stop reached" to the PLC, the program advances to the next block. Bit 1 = 1:After the NC has transferred IS "Fixed stop reached" to the PLC, it waits for the PLC to acknowledge with IS "Acknowledge fixed stop reached", outputs the programmed torque and then executes a block change. related to: IS "Activate travel to fixed stop" IS "Enable travel to fixed stop" IS "Fixed stop reached" IS "Acknowledge fixed stop reached" 37100 GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE A01, A10 G1 - Gantry axis definition BYTE POWER ON CTEQ - - 0 0 33 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: General: decimal representation, with a b a 0:Leading axis 1:Synchronized axis b 0: No gantry axis 1: Axis in gantry grouping 1 2: Axis in gantry grouping 2 3: Axis in gantry grouping 3 ... A max. of 8 gantry groupings is possible. Examples: 11: Axis is synchronized axis in gantry grouping 1 2: Axis is leading axis in gantry grouping 2 12: Axis is synchronized axis in gantry grouping 2 3:Axis is leading axis in gantry grouping 3 13:Axis is synchronized axis in gantry grouping 3 2-288 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Special cases: Alarm 10650 "Incorrect gantry machine data" and 10651 "Gantry unit not defined" in the case of incorrect gantry axis definition. Related to: MD 37110: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING (gantry warning limit) MD 37120: GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR (gantry trip limit) MD 37130: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF (gantry trip limit during referencing) 37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING A05, A10 G1 mm, degrees Gantry warning limit DOUBLE RESET - - 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Value > 0 With gantry axes, the difference between the position actual values of the leading and synchronized axes is constantly monitored. MD: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING is used to define a limit value for the position actual value difference; when the limit is exceeded, warning 10652 "Warning limit exceeded" is output. However, the gantry axes are not stopped internally in the control. The warning threshold must therefore be selected such that the machine can withstand the position actual value deviation between the gantry axes without sustaining mechanical damage. Furthermore, the IS "Gantry warning limit exceeded" (DB31-48, DBX101.3) to the PLC is set to "1". The PLC user program can thus initiate the necessary measures (e.g. program interruption at block end) when the warning limit is exceeded. As soon as the current position actual value difference has dropped below the warning limit again, the message is canceled and IS "Gantry warning limit exceeded" reset. Effect of gantry warning limit on gantry synchronization process: The position actual value difference between the leading and synchronized axes is determined during gantry synchronization. If the deviation is lower than the gantry warning limit, the synchronizing motion of the gantry axes is automatically started internally in the control. The synchronizing motion must otherwise be initiated via the PLC interface (IS "Start gantry synchronization process"). (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-289 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data Value = 0 Setting MD: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING to 0 deactivates the monitoring for violation of the warning limit. Gantry synchronization is not initiated internally in the control. MD irrelevant for: SINUMERIK FM-NC; SINUMERIK 840D with NCU 571 Special cases: Alarm 10652 "Warning limit exceeded" in response to violation of gantry warning limit. Related to: MD 37100: GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE Gantry axis definition MD 37120: GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR Gantry trip limit MD 37130: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF Gantry trip limit during referencing IS "Gantry warning limit exceeded" (DB31-48, DBX101.3) IS "Start gantry synchronization" (DB31-48, DBX29.4) 37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR A05, A10 G1 mm, degrees Gantry trip limit DOUBLE POWER ON - 7/2 - - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: With gantry axes, the difference between the position actual values of the leading and synchronized axes is continuously monitored. The maximum permissible deviation in position actual value between the synchronized axis and the leading axis in the gantry axis grouping must be defined with MD: GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR. Monitoring for violation of this limit value takes place only if the gantry axis grouping is already synchronized (IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" = 1); otherwise the value set in MD 37130: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF is used. When the limit value is exceeded, alarm 10653 "Error limit exceeded" is output. The gantry axes are immediately stopped internally in the control to prevent any damage to the machine. In addition, IS "Gantry trip limit exceeded" to the PLC is set to "1". MD irrelevant for: SINUMERIK FM-NC; SINUMERIK 840D with NCU 571 Special cases: Alarm 10653 "Error limit exceeded" in response to violation of gantry trip limit. 2-290 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Related to: MD 37100: GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE Gantry axis definition MD 37110: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING Gantry warning limit MD 37130: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF Gantry trip limit during referencing IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" (DB31-48, DBX101.5) IS "Gantry trip limit exceeded" (DB31-48, DBX101.2) 37130 GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF A05, A10 G1 mm, degrees Gantry trip limit during referencing DOUBLE POWER ON - 7/2 - - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: With gantry axes, the difference between the position actual values of the leading and synchronized axes is continuously monitored. The maximum permissible deviation in position actual values between the synchronized axis and the leading axis that is monitored if the gantry axis grouping is not yet synchronized (IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" = "0") must be set in MD: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF. When the limit value is exceeded, alarm 10653 "Error limit exceeded" is output. The gantry axes are immediately stopped internally in the control to prevent any damage to the machine. In addition, IS "Gantry trip limit exceeded" to the PLC is set to "1". MD irrelevant for: SINUMERIK FM-NC; SINUMERIK 840D with NCU 571 Special cases: Alarm 10653 "Error limit exceeded" in response to violation of gantry trip limit. Related to: MD 37100: GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE Gantry axis definition MD 37110: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING Gantry warning limit MD 37120: GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR Gantry trip limit IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" (DB31-48, DBX101.5) IS "Gantry trip limit exceeded" (DB31-48, DBX101.2) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-291 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 37135 GANTRY_ACT_POS_TOL_ERROR A05, A10 - mm, degrees Current gantry trip limit DOUBLE RESET - - 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Actual value difference between master axis and slave axis in the case of alarm 10653. Leads to alarm 10657 after Power ON. 37140 GANTRY_BREAK_UP EXP, A01, A10 G1 - Invalidate gantry axis grouping BOOLEAN RESET - 7/2 CTEQ - - FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: GANTRY_BREAK_UP = "0" The forced coupling of the gantry axis grouping remains valid. Monitoring of violation of the gantry warning or trip limit is active! GANTRY_BREAK_UP = "1" This invalidates the forced coupling of the gantry grouping, thus allowing all gantry axes in this grouping to be traversed individually in manual mode. The monitoring for violation of the gantry warning or trip limit is deactivated. IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" is set to "0". Notice: In cases where the gantry axes are still mechanically coupled, the machine may sustain damage in this operating state when the leading or synchronized axis is traversed! The gantry axes cannot be referenced individually. MD irrelevant for: SINUMERIK FM-NC; SINUMERIK 840D with NCU 571 2-292 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data Related to: MD 37100: GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE Gantry axis definition MD 37110: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING Gantry warning limit MD 37130: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF Gantry trip limit during referencing IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" (DB31-48, DBX101.5) IS "Gantry trip limit exceeded" (DB31-48, DBX101.2) 37150 GANTRY_FUNCTION_MASK A10 - - Gantry functions DWORD RESET 0x3 7/2 - - 0x00 0 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: Special gantry functions are set with this MD. The MD is bit-coded, the following bits are assigned: Bit 0 == 0: Extended monitoring of the actual value difference is inactive. An offset between master and slave axes occurring in the tracking or BREAK_UP is not taken into account in the monitoring of the actual value difference. Alarm 10657 is not output if alarm 10563 occurs before Power OFF. Bit 0 == 1: Extended monitoring of the actual value difference is active. An offset between master and slave axes occurring in the tracking or BREAK_UP is taken into account in the monitoring of the actual value difference. Prerequisite: The gantry grouping must be re-referenced or re-synchronized after starting of the control. Alarm 10657 is output if alarm 10563 occurs before Power OFF. Bit 1 == Zero Bit 1 == Zero 0: mark search direction of the slave axis analogous to MD 34010 1: mark search direction of the slave axis same as for master axis (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-293 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 37400 EPS_TLIFT_TANG_STEP A10 T3 mm, degrees Tangential angle for corner recognition DOUBLE RESET - - 5.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 CTEQ Description: If TLIFT has been programmed and the axis is under tangential follow-up control (tracking), a step change in the position setpoint which is larger than the value of this MD causes an intermediate block to be inserted. The intermediate block moves the axis to the position corresponding to the initial tangent in the next block. Irrelevant for: TLIFT not activated related to: TLIFT instruction 37402 TANG_OFFSET A10 T3 mm, degrees Default angle for tangential follow-up control DOUBLE RESET - - 0.0 - - 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 CTEQ Description: Default offset (angle) which the following axis forms with the tangent. The angle acts additively to the angle programmed in the TANGON block. Irrelevant for: if no tangential follow-up control related to: TANGON instruction 2-294 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data 37610 PROFIBUS_CTRL_CONFIG EXP, A01 K4 - Profibus control bit configuration BYTE POWER ON - - 0 0 2 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Machine data for setting special PROFIBUS control word functionality: 0 = default = no change of standard behavior 1 = STW2, bits 0-1 are set depending on mode of operation/rapid traverse suppressing the setting of defaults for the VDI control bits "Parameter set bit0/1" from the PLC. Bits 0-1 get the following combinations depending on the mode of operation, and controlled by NCK: 00 = Default (after Power-On) 01 = JOG (except for JOG-INC) or ((AUTOMATIC or MDI) and G0) 10 = ((AUTOMATIC or MDI) and not G0), other 11 = JOG-INC 2 = Combination of MD=0 (preset by VDI) and MD=1 (internally preset): MD=2 acts as MD=1, as long as there are no VDI control bits from the PLC, i.e. if the VDI control bits "Parameter set bit0/1" are both reset (0). MD=2 acts as MD=0, if the VDI control bits "Parameter set bit0/1" are set both or individually (!=0). In this case, the VDI control bits are transferred directly to the drive (priority of VDI signals higher than that of internally created signals). 37620 PROFIBUS_TORQUE_RED_RESOL EXP, A01 - % Resolution Profibus torque reduction DOUBLE NEW CONF - - 1.0 0.005 10.0 7/2 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 - Description: Resolution of the torque reduction on the PROFIBUS (LSB significance) (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-295 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data The MD is only relevant for controls with PROFIBUS drives. For these controls, it defines the resolution of the cyclic interface data "Torque reduction value" (only exists for $MN_DRIVE_TELEGRAM_TYPE = 101 ff. or 201 ff.), which is required for the "Travel to fixed stop" functionality. The 1% default value corresponds to the original significance. The torque limit is transferred on the PROFIBUS with increments of 1%; the value 100 in the corresponding PROFIBUS data cell corresponds to full torque reduction (i.e. without force). By changing this MD to 0.005%, for example, the value can be entered in increments of 0.005%, i.e. the increments for the torque limit value become finer by the factor 200. For the limitation to the rated torque, the value 0 is transmitted in this case; a complete torque reduction (i.e. without force) characterizes the transmittable value 10000. To avoid misadaptation, the setting value of the MD must be selected to match the interpretation configured on the drive side or the firmly defined interpretation of the torque reduction value. 37800 OEM_AXIS_INFO A01, A11 - - OEM version information STRING POWER ON - 7/2 - 2 "" - 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 A01, A09, A02 K3 Description: A version information freely available to the user (is indicated in the version screen) 38000 MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS - Interpolation points for encoder/spindle compensation DWORD (LEC ) POWER ON - 2 0 7/2 802d-cu3 1 125 - - 7/0 802d-ng2 1 125 - - 7/0 802d-ng3 1 125 - - 7/0 802d-tm1 1 125 - - 7/0 802d-tm2 1 125 - - 7/0 802d-tm3 1 125 - - 7/0 0 5000 Description: For leadscrew error compensation, the maximum number of interpolation points per axis/measuring system is 125. 2-296 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Machine Data Channel-specific machine data The required number k can be calculated as follows using the defined parameters: $AA_ENC_COMP_MAX$AA_ENC_COMP_MIN k = ------------------------------------------- + 1 $AA_ENC_COMP_STEP $AA_ENC_COMP_MINInitial position(system variable) $AA_ENC_COMP_MAX End position(system variable) $AA_ENC_COMP_STEP Distance betw. interpolation points(system variable) Index[n] has the following coding: [encoder no.]: 0 related to: MD 32700: ENC_ COMP_ ENABLE[n] Interpolatory compensation active (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 2-297 Machine Data 06/2007 Channel-specific machine data 2-298 (c)Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3 Setting Data - Description Number Identifier Display filters Reference Unit Name Data type Active Attributes System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value Protection 3.1 General setting data 41010 JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE - H1 - Size of variable increment for INC/handwheel DOUBLE SOFORT - - 7/7 - 0. - Description: This setting data defines the number of increments when variable increment (INCvar) is selected. This increment size is traversed by the axis in JOG mode whenever the traverse key is pressed or the handwheel is turned one detent position and variable increment is selected ("Active machine function: INC variable" interface signal for machine or geometry axes is set to 1). Note: Please note that the increment size is active for incremental jogging and handwheel jogging. Irrelevant for: If INCvar not active related to: IS "Active machine function: INCvariable" (V3200 1001.5, V3200 1005.5, V3200 1009.5, V380x 0005.5) (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-299 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 General setting data 41110 JOG_SET_VELO - H1 mm/min JOG velocity for linear axes (for G94) DOUBLE SOFORT - - 7/7 - 0.0 - Description: Value > 0: The velocity entered applies to all linear axes in JOG mode if they are traversed manually using the "traversing keys plus and minus". The axis velocity setting is active for: Continuous traversing Incremental traversing (INC1, ..., INCvar) The value entered may not exceed the maximum permissible axis velocity (MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO). Value = 0: The feedrate in JOG mode is the corresponding axis-specific MD 32020: JOG_VELO "JOG axis velocity". In this way, it is possible to define a separate JOG velocity for every axis. Irrelevant for: For rotary axes (SD 41130: JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO) applies related to: Axis-specific MD 32020: JOG_VELO (JOG axis velocity) Axis-specific MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity) SD 41130: JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO (JOG velocity for rotary axes) 41130 JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO - H1 rev/min JOG velocity for rotary axes DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 0.0 - Description: As for SD 41110: JOG_AX_SET_VELO - but for all rotary axes instead of linear axes Application example: The operator can define a JOG velocity for a particular application. related to: MD 32020: JOG_VELO(JOG axis velocity) MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity) 41200 JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO - H1 rev/min JOG speed for spindles DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - 3-300 - 0.0 - (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description General setting data Description: Value > 0: The velocity entered applies to spindles in JOG mode if they are traversed manually using the "traversing keys plus and minus". The velocity setting is active for: Continuous jogging Incremental jogging (INC1, ..., INCvar) The value entered must not exceed the maximum permissible velocity (MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO). Value = 0: If 0 has been entered in the setting data, the active JOG velocity is MD 32020: JOG_VELO (JOG axis velocity). Each axis can be given its own JOG velocity with this MD (axis-specific MD). When the spindle is traversed in JOG mode, the maximum velocity of the active gear stage (MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT) is taken into account. Irrelevant for: Axes related to: MD 32020: JOG_VELO (JOG axis velocity) MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (maximum velocity of gear stages) 41300 CEC_TABLE_ENABLE - K3 - Compensation table enable BOOLEAN SOFORT - 7/7 - 62 FALSE - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: 1: The evaluation of the compensation table [t] is enabled. The compensation table is now included in the calculation of the compensation value for the compensation axis. The compensation axis $AN_CEC_OUTPUT_AXIS can be taken from the table configuration. The effective total compensation value in the compensation axis can be adapted to the current machining by the targeted activation of tables (from NC part programm or PLC user program). The function does not become active until the following conditions have been fulfilled: The option "Interpolatory compensation" is set The associated compensation tables in the NC user memory have been loaded and enabled (SD: CEC_TABLE_ENABLE[t] = 1) The current position measuring system is referenced (IS: "Referenced/Synchronized" =1). (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-301 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 General setting data 0: The evaluation of the sag compensation table [t] is not enabled. Related to .... MD: MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS[t] Number of interpolation points with sag compensation SD: CEC_TABLE_ENABLE[t] Evaluation of the sag compensation table t is enabled IS "Referenced/Synchronized 1" DB31-48, DBX60.4 IS "Referenced/Synchronized 2" DB31-48, DBX60.5 41310 CEC_TABLE_WEIGHT - K3 - Weighting factor compensation table DOUBLE SOFORT 62 - 7/7 - 1.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The compensation value stored in the table [t] is multiplied by the weighting factor. When selecting the weighting factor it should be ensured that the total compensation value in the compensation axis does not exceed the maximal value of (MD: CEC_MAX_SUM). With [t] = index of the compensation table (see MD: MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS) If, for example, the weight of the tools used on the machine or the workpieces to be machined are too different and this affects the error curve by changing the amplitude, this can be corrected by changing the weighting factor. In the case of sag compensation, the weighting factor in the table can be changed for specific tools or workpieces from the PLC user program or the NC program by overwriting the setting data. However, different compensation tables are to be used if the course of the error curve is substantially changed by the different weights. Related to .... SD: CEC_TABLE_ENABLE[t] Evaluation of the sag compensation table t is enabled MD: CEC_MAX_SUM Maximum compensation value for sag compensation 41500 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_1 - N3 mm/inch, degrees Trigger points at falling cam 1-8 DOUBLE SOFORT - 8 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- 3-302 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description General setting data Description: The cam positions of minus cams 1 - 8 are entered in this machine data. The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system. Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 1, 2, ... , 8 When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associated "minus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch from 1 to 0. 41501 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_1 - N3 mm/inch, degrees Trigger points at rising cam edge 1-8 DOUBLE SOFORT - 8 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The cam positions of plus cams 1 - 8 are entered in this machine data. The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system. Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 1, 2, ... , 8 When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associated "plus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch from 0 to 1. 41502 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_2 - N3 mm/inch, degrees Trigger points at falling cam edge 9-16 DOUBLE SOFORT 8 - 7/7 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The cam positions of minus cams 9-16 are entered in this machine data. The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-303 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 General setting data Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 9, 10, ... , 16 Switching points with falling edges of cams 9 - 16. When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associated "minus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch from 1 to 0. 41503 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_2 - N3 mm/inch, degrees Trigger points at rising cam edge 9-16 DOUBLE SOFORT - 8 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The cam positions of plus cams 9-16 are entered in this machine data. The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system. Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 9, 10, ... , 16 Switching points with rising edges of cams 9 - 16. When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associated "plus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch from 0 to 1. 41504 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_3 - N3 mm/inch, degrees Trigger points at falling cam edge 17-24 DOUBLE SOFORT 8 - 7/7 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- 3-304 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description General setting data Description: The cam positions of minus cams 17 - 24 are entered in this machine data. The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system. Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 17, 18, ... , 24 Switching points with falling edges of cams 17 - 24. When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associated "minus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch from 1 to 0. 41505 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_3 - N3 mm/inch, degrees Trigger points at rising cam edge 17-24 DOUBLE SOFORT - 8 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: The cam positions of plus cams 17 - 24 are entered in this machine data. The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system. Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 17, 18, ... , 24 Switching points with rising edges of cams 17 - 24 When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associated "plus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch from 0 to 1. 41506 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_4 - N3 mm/inch, degrees Trigger points at falling cam edge 25-32 DOUBLE SOFORT - 8 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-305 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 General setting data Description: The cam positions of minus cams 25 - 32 are entered in this machine data. The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system. Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 25, 26, ... , 32 Switching points with falling edges of cams 25 - 32. When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associated "minus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch from 1 to 0. 41507 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_4 - N3 mm/inch, degrees Trigger points at rising cam edge 25-32 DOUBLE SOFORT 8 - 7/7 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The cam positions of plus cams 25 - 32 are entered in this machine data. The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system. Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 25, 26, ... , 32 Switching points with rising edges of cams 25 - 32. When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associated "plus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch from 0 to 1. 41520 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1 - N3 s Rate time for '-' trigger points of cams 1-8 DOUBLE SOFORT - 8 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: A lead or delay time can be assigned to each cam 1-8 in this setting data to compensate for delay times. 3-306 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description General setting data The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time value entered. Positive value: Negative value: Lead time Delay time Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 1, 2, ... , 8 This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n]. Related to .... MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 1 - 16) 41521 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1 - N3 s Rate time for '+' trigger points of cams 1-8 DOUBLE SOFORT - 8 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: A lead or delay time can be assigned to each plus cam 1-8 in this setting data to compensate for delay times. The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time value entered. Positive value: Negative value: Lead time Delay time Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 1, 2, ... , 8 This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n]. Related to .... MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 1 - 16) 41522 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_2 - N3 s Rate time for '-' trigger points of cams 9-16 DOUBLE SOFORT - 8 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-307 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 General setting data Description: A lead or delay time can be assigned to each minus cam 9 - 16 in this setting data to compensate for delay times. The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time value entered. Positive value: Negative value: Lead time Delay time Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 9, 10, ... , 16 This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n+8]. Related to .... MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 1 - 16) 41523 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_2 - N3 s Rate time for '+' trigger points of cams 9-16 DOUBLE SOFORT 8 - 7/7 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: A lead or delay time can be assigned to each plus cam 9 - 16 in this setting data to compensate for delay times. The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time value entered. 3-308 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description General setting data Positive value: Negative value: Lead time Delay time Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 9, 10, ... , 16 This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n+8]. Related to .... MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 1 - 16) 41524 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_3 - N3 s Rate time for '-' trigger points of cams 17-24 DOUBLE SOFORT 8 - 7/7 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: A lead or delay time can be assigned to each minus cam 17-24 in this setting data to compensate for delay times. The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time value entered. Positive value: Negative value: Lead time Delay time Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 17, 18, ... , 24 This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n]. Related to .... MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 1 - 16) 41525 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_3 - N3 s Rate time for '+' trigger points of cams 17-24 DOUBLE SOFORT - 8 0. - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-309 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 General setting data Description: A lead or delay time can be assigned to each plus cam 17-24 in this setting data to compensate for delay times. The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time value entered. Positive value: Negative value: Lead time Delay time Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 17, 18, ... , 24 This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n]. Related to .... MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 1 - 16) 41526 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_4 - N3 s Rate time for '-' trigger points of cams 25-32 DOUBLE SOFORT 8 - 7/7 - 0. - 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: A lead or delay time can be assigned to each minus cam 25-32 in this setting data to compensate for delay times. The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time value entered. 3-310 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description General setting data Positive value: Negative value: Lead time Delay time Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 25, 26, ... , 32 This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n+8]. Related to .... MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 1 - 16) 41527 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_4 - N3 s Rate time for '+' trigger points of cams 25-32 DOUBLE SOFORT 8 - 7/7 - 0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: A lead or delay time can be assigned to each plus cam 25 - 32 in this setting data to com-pensate for delay times. The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time value entered. Positive value: Negative value: Lead time Delay time Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair: n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 25, 26, ... , 32 This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n+8]. Related to .... MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 1 - 16) 41600 COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1 - A4 - Threshold value of the 1st comparator DOUBLE SOFORT 8 - 7/7 - 0. - 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-311 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 General setting data Description: COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1[b] defines the threshold values for the individual input bits [b] of comparator byte 1. The output bit n of the 1st comparator is created by comparing the threshold value n according to the comparison type defined in bit n of COMPAR_TYPE_1. For example: COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_1[2] = 4 COMPAR_TRESHOLD_1[2] = 5000.0 COMPAR_TYPE_1 =5 The 3rd output bit of comparator 1 is set if the input value at AnalogIn 4 is greater than or equal to 5 volts. Index [b]: Bits 0 - 7 Related to .... MD 10530: COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_1 MD 10531: COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_2 MD 10540: COMPAR_TYPE_1 MD 10541: COMPAR_TYPE_2 41601 COMPAR_THRESHOLD_2 - A4 - Threshold value of the 2nd comparator DOUBLE SOFORT - 8 0. - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- - Description: COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1[b] defines the threshold values for the individual input bits [b] of comparator byte 1. The output bit n of the 1st comparator is created by comparing the threshold value n according to the comparison type defined in bit n of COMPAR_TYPE_2. Index [b]: Bits 0 - 7 Related to .... MD 10530: COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_1 MD 10531: COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_2 MD 10540: COMPAR_TYPE_1 MD 10541: COMPAR_TYPE_2 3-312 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description General setting data 41700 AXCT_SWWIDTH - B3 - Default rotation of axis container DWORD NEW CONF CTDE - 16 0 -32 32 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm1 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm2 - - - - -1/- 802d-tm3 - - - - -1/- Description: The number of entries (slots) by which the entries in the axis container are advanced on execution of the rotation. The value is interpreted modulo of the actually existing entries. Negative values reverse the direction of rotation. Related to the container rotation command, container axes. This machine data is distribued via the NCU-link. Contrary to the the definition for setting data, this SD is not immediately active, but first with NEWCONF. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-313 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data 3.2 Channel-specific setting data 42000 THREAD_START_ANGLE - K1 degrees Start angle for thread G33 DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0. - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: This setting data can be used to program the offset of the individual threads when cutting multiple threads. This SD can be changed from the part program by the SF=... command. If no SF=... is written in the G33 block of the part program, then the setting data applies. 42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP - V1 mm Starting and deceleration behavior of feed axis in thread cutting G33 DOUBLE SOFORT 2 999999. 7/7 - -1. -1. 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: The SD is effective for thread cutting with G33, G34, G35. It provides two elements that determine the behavior during the starting of the thread axis (1st element = index 0) and during the braking with rounding (2nd element = index 1). The values possess the same properties for the thread run-in and run-out: -1: Starting/braking of the thread axis is carried out with the configured acceleration. Jerk according to current BRISK/SOFT programming. 0: Abrupt starting/braking of the feedrate axis during thread cutting. > 0:The maximum thread starting/braking distance is defined. The defined distance may cause an acceleration overload of the axis. The SD is defined during the programming of DITR (Displacement Thread Ramp) from the block. The default values (-1) for both elements of the SD are set with NC reset and at the end of the part program. Example:$SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP[0]=2 ; run-in path 2 mm 3-314 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data The SD is defined during the programming of DITS (index 0) and DITE (index 1) from the block. Irrelevant for: no G33, G34, G35 related to: With the DITS and DITE (Displacement Thread Start/End) part program instructions. 42100 DRY_RUN_FEED - V1 mm/min Dry run feedrate DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 5000. - Description: To check a part program with regard to the traversing path (without workpiece to be machined) the operator can activate the dry run feed function on the operator interface (Program control softkey). The value of this setting data is then taken instead of the programmed feed value. Rapid traverse feed values are not changed. The dry run feedrate value can be entered in the Setting data menu. The function is effective only in the AUTOMATIC and MDA modes. Irrelevant for: Dry run feedrate function not activated Application example: Checking traversing distances with new part programs Special cases: The function may not be activated if a workpiece should be machined. The maximum cutting speed of the tool might be exceeded by the activated dry run feedrate. The destruction of the workpiece and of the tool could be the consequence. 42101 DRY_RUN_FEED_MODE - V1 - Mode for dry run velocity BYTE SOFORT 12 7/7 - - 0 0 Description: This MD can be used to set the method of operation of the dry run velocity specified by the setting data $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED. The following values are possible: 0: The maximum of setting data $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED and the programmed velocity become active. This is the standard setting and corresponds to the behavior up to SW 5. 1: The minimum of setting data $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED and the programmed velocity become active. 2: The setting data $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED becomes active directly irrespective of the programmed velocity. The values 3...9 are reserved for extensions. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-315 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data 10: As configuration 0 except thread cutting (G33, G34, G35) and tapping (G331, G332, G63). These functions are executed as programmed. 11: As configuration 1 except thread cutting (G33, G34, G35) and tapping (G331, G332, G63). These functions are executed as programmed. 12: As configuration 2 except thread cutting (G33, G34, G35) and tapping (G331, G332, G63). These functions are executed as programmed. 42110 DEFAULT_FEED - V1,FBFA mm/min Default value for path feedrate DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 0. - Description: The setting date is evaluated during the start of the part program with consideration of the switch-on position of the feedrate type. Switch-on positions: Turning: G95 - feedrate in mm/rev. of the spindle Milling: G94 - feedrate in mm/min If no F word is written at G1, G2, G2, ... for the applicable feedrate type and if the SD value is not zero, the feedrate from this SD is used. Otherwise, an alarm indicating the missing feedrate is issued. Irrelevant for: Turning: G94 programmed Milling: G95 programmed 42120 APPROACH_FEED - - mm/min Path feedrate in approach blocks DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0. - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: Default value for path feedrate in approach blocks (after repos., block search, SERUPRO etc). The contents of this settting data are only used when it is non-zero. It is evaluated like an F word programmed for G94. 3-316 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data 42122 OVR_RAPID_FACTOR - $MN_OVR_FAC TOR_RAPID_T RA,$AC_OVR % Add. rapid traverse override can be specified through operation DOUBLE SOFORT - - 7/7 - 100.,100.,100.,100., 100.,100.,100.... Description: Additional channel-specific rapid traverse override in %. The value is calculated to the path depending on OPI variable enablOvrRapidFactor. The value multiplies the other rapid traverse overrides (rapid traverse override of the machine control panel, override default through synchronized actions $AC_OVR). 42140 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_P - FBFA - Default scaling factor for address P DWORD SOFORT - - 1 - - 7/7 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- Description: The value in this machine data is active if no scaling factor P has been programmed in the block. Related to: WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE 42150 DEFAULT_ROT_FACTOR_R - - - Default rotation factor for address R DOUBLE SOFORT - - 7/7 - 0. - Description: The value in this machine data is active if no factor for rotation R is programmed in the block. 42160 EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9 - FBFA - Fixed feedrates F1 - F9 DOUBLE SOFORT - 10 0. - - 7/7 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-317 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data Description: Fixed feedrate values for programming with F1 - F9. If the machine data $MC_FEEDRATE_F1_F9_ON = TRUE is set with the programming of F1 - F9, the feedrate values are read from the setting data $SC_EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9[0] $SC_EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9[8], and activated as the machining feedrate. The rapid traverse feedrate must be entered in $SC_EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9[0]. 42162 EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_DIST - FBFA - Double turret head tool distance DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0. - - 7/7 802d-ng2 - - - - -1/- 802d-ng3 - - - - -1/- Description: Distance between both tools of a double turret head. The distance is activated using G68 as additive zero point offset if $MN_EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_ON is set to TRUE. 42200 SINGLEBLOCK2_STOPRE - BA - Activate SBL2 debug mode BOOLEAN SOFORT - 7/7 - - FALSE - Description: Value = TRUE: A preprocessing stop is made with every block if SBL2 (single block with stop after every block) is active. This suppresses the premachining of part program blocks. This variant of the SBL2 is not true-to-contour. This means that a different contour characteristic might be generated as a result of the preprocessing stop than without single block or with SBL1. Application: Debug mode for testing part programs. 42400 PUNCH_DWELLTIME - N4 s Dwell time for punching and nibbling DOUBLE SOFORT - - 7/7 - 1.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 3-318 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data Description: This data sets the dwell time between reaching the position and triggering the stroke. The set value is rounded to an integer multiple of the interpolation cycle. (This means that the value set here can only differ slightly from that which is actually executed.) Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred into the active file system on reset (i.e. the value is retained even after the reset). 42402 NIBPUNCH_PRE_START_TIME - N4 s Delay time (punch/nibble) with G603 DOUBLE SOFORT - - 7/7 - .02,0.0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: This machine data has exactly the same effect as machine data NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME. Its primary purpose is to allow the pre-start time to be altered from the NC program so that it can be adapted to different metal sheet sizes and thicknesses. However, the setting data is active only when the machine data has been set to zero. Related to .... NIBBLE_PRESTART_TIME 42404 MINTIME_BETWEEN_STROKES - N4 s Minimum time between 2 strokes in seconds DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: Minimum time between 2 strokes in seconds (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-319 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data 42440 FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG - K2 - Traversing from zero offset with incr. programming BOOLEAN SOFORT - - 7/7 - TRUE - Description: 0: When incremental programming is used on an axis, only the programmed position delta is traversed after a frame change. Zero offsets in FRAMES are only traversed when an absolute position is specified. 1: When incremental programming is used on an axis, changes to zero offsets are traversed after a frame change (standard response up to software version 3). Related to .... SD 42442: TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 42442 TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG - W1 - Traversing from zero offset with incr. programming BOOLEAN SOFORT - - 7/7 - TRUE - Description: 0: When incremental programming is used on an axis, only the programmed position delta is traversed after a frame change. Tool length offsets in FRAMES are only traversed when an absolute position is specified. 1: When incremental programming is used on an axis, changes to tool length offsets are traversed after a tool change (standard response up to SW version 3). Related to .... SD 42440: FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 42444 TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG - BA - Set down mode after search run with calculation BOOLEAN SOFORT - - 7/7 - TRUE - Description: If the first programming of an axis after "Search run with calculation to end of block" is incremental, the incremental value is added as a function of SD $SC_TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG to the value accumulated up to the search target : SD = TRUE: Incremental value is added to accumulated position SD = FALSE: Incremental value is added to current actual value The setting data is evaluated on NC start for output of the action blocks. 3-320 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data 42465 SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL - B1 mm maximum contour tolerance on smoothing DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0.05 0.000001 999999. 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 - Description: This setting data defines the maximum tolerance of smoothing for the contour. Related to: $MC_SMOOTHING_MODE, $SC_SMOOTH_ORI_TOL 42470 CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE - W1,PGA degrees Corner limit angle for compressor DOUBLE SOFORT 89.0 7/7 - - 36.0 0.0 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: The setting data defines the limit angle from which the compressor COMPCAD interprets a block transition as a corner. Practical values lie between 10 and 40 degrees. Values from 0 to 89 degrees inclusive are permitted. The angle only serves as an approximate measure for corner detection. The compressor can also classify flatter block transitions as corners and eliminate larger angles as outliers on account of plausibility considerations. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-321 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data 42471 MIN_CURV_RADIUS EXP, C09 - mm Minimum radius of curvature DOUBLE SOFORT - - 3.0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: The setting data defines a typical tool radius. It is only evaluated in compressor COMPCAD. The lower the value, the greater the precision, but the slower the program execution. 42475 COMPRESS_CONTUR_TOL - F2,PGA mm maximum contour deviation with compressor DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0.05 0.000001 999999. 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 - Description: This setting data defines the maximum contour tolerance in the compressor. 42480 STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE - W1 - Alarm response with tool radius compensation and preproc. stop BOOLEAN SOFORT - - 7/7 - TRUE - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 3-322 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data Description: If this setting data is TRUE, block execution is stopped by preprocessing stop and active tool radius compensation, and does not resume until after a user acknowledgement (START). If it is FALSE, machining is not interrupted at such a program point. 42490 CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE - Retraction behavior of tool radius compensation with BOOLEAN prep. stop - W1 SOFORT - 7/7 - FALSE - - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: FALSE: If there is a preprocessing stop (either programmed or generated internally by the control) before the deselection block (G40) when tool radius compensation is active, then firstly the starting point of the deselection block is approached from the last end point before the preprocessing stop. The deselection block itself is then executed, i.e. the deselection block is usually replaced by two traversing blocks. Tool radius compensation is no longer active in these blocks. The behavior is thus identical with that before the introduction of this setting data. TRUE: If there is a preprocessing stop (either programmed or generated internally by the control) before the deselection block (G40) when tool radius compensation is active, the end point of the deselection point is traversed in a straight line from the last end point before the preprocessing stop. 42494 CUTCOM_ACT_DEACT_CTRL - W1 - Approach & retraction behavior with 2-1/2D tool radius compens. DWORD SOFORT - - 7/7 - 2222.. - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: This setting data controls the approach and retraction behavior with tool radius compensation if the activation or deactivation block does not contain any traversing information. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-323 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data It is only evaluated with 2-1/2D TRC (CUT2D or CUT2DF). The decimal coding is as follows: NNNN | | | |____ Approach behavior for tools with tool point direction | | | (turning tools) | | |______ Approach behavior for tools without tool point direction | | (milling tools) | |________ Retract behavior for tools with tool point direction | (turning tools) |__________ Retract behavior for tools without tool point direction (milling tools) If the position in question contains a 1, approach or retraction is always performed, even if G41/G42 or G40 stands alone in a block. For example: N100 x10 y0 N110 G41 N120 x20 If we assume a tool radius of 10mm in the above example, position x10y10 is approached in block N110. If the position in question contains the value 2, the approach or retraction movement is only performed if at least one axis of the offset plane is programmed in the activation/deactivation block. To obtain the same results as the above example with this setting, the program must be altered as follows: N100 x10 y0 N110 G41 x10 N120 x20 If axis information x10 is missing in block N110, activation of TRC is delayed by one block, i.e. the activation block would now be N120. If the position in question contains a value other than 1 or 2, i.e. in particular the value 0, an approach or retraction movement is not performed in a block that does not contain any traversing information. About the term "Tools with tool point direction": These are tools with tool numbers between 400 and 599 (turning and grinding tools), whose tool point direction has a value between 1 and 8. Turning and grinding tools with tool point direction 0 or 9 or other undefined values are treated like milling tools. Note: If the value of this setting data is changed within a program, we recommend programming a preprocessing stop (stopre) before the description to avoid the new value being used in program sections before that point. The reverse case is not serious, i.e. if the setting data is written, subsequent NC blocks will definitely access the new value. 3-324 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data 42496 CUTCOM_CLSD_CONT - - - Tool radius compensation behavior with closed contour BOOLEAN SOFORT - - FALSE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: FALSE: If two intersections are created on correction of the inner side of an (almost) closed contour consisting of two successive circle blocks or a circle and a linear block, the intersection that lies on the first part contour nearer to the block end will be selected as per the default behavior. A contour will be considered as (almost) closed if the distance between the starting point of the first block and the end point of the second block is smaller than 10% of the active compensation radius, but not larger than 1000 path increments (corresponds to 1mm to 3 decimal places). TRUE: Under the same condition as described above, the intersection that lies on the first part contour nearer to block start is selected. 42500 SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL - B2 m/s maximum path acceleration DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 10000. 1.0e-3 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: Setting data for additional limitation of (tangential) path acceleration Related to ... MD 32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL SD 42502: IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-325 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data 42502 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL - B2 - Evaluate SD SC_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL BOOLEAN SOFORT - - FALSE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: Setting data SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL is included in the limit calculations if SD: IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL=TRUE Related to ... SD 42500: SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL 42510 SD_MAX_PATH_JERK - B2 m/s maximum path-related jerk as setting data DOUBLE SOFORT - - 7/7 - 100000.,100000.,10 1.e-9 0000.,100000.... 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: As well as MD: MAX_PATH_JERK, the maximum path-related jerk can also limit the jerk. Related to ... MD 20600: MAX_PATH_JERK SD 42510: IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK 3-326 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data 42512 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK - B2 - Evaluate SD SD_MAX_PATH_JERK BOOLEAN SOFORT - - FALSE - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: Setting data SD_MAX_PATH_JERK is included in the limit calculations if SD: IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK=TRUE Related to ... SD 42510: SD_MAX_PATH_JERK (SD for additional limitation of (tangential) path jerk) 42520 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_START - - mm Start of feed reduction at G62. DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 0. - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: Traverse path distance from which the feed is reduced before the corner with G62. 42522 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_END - - mm End of feed reduction at G62. DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 0. - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-327 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data Description: Traverse path distance up to which the feed remains reduced after a corner with G62. 42524 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_OVR - - % Feed override reduction at G62 DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0. - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: Override used to multiply the feed at the corner with G62. 42526 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_CRIT - - degrees Corner detection at G62 DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 0. - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: Angle from which a corner is taken into account when reducing the feed with G62. For example: CORNER_SLOWDOWN_CRIT = 90 means that all corners of 90 degrees or a more acute angle are traversed slower with G62. 3-328 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data 42528 CUTCOM_DECEL_LIMIT - - - Feed lowering on circles with tool radius compensation DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0. 0. 1. 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: The setting data limits feed lowering of the tool center point on concave circle segments with tool radius compensation active and CFC or CFIN selected. With CFC, the feed is defined at the contour. On concave circular arcs, feed lowering of the tool center point is created by the ratio of the contour curvature to the tool center point path curvature. The setting data is limiting this effect, reducing backing off and overheating of the tool. For contours with varying curvatures, a mid-range curvature is used. 0: Provides the previous behavior: If the ratio between contour radius and tool center point path radius is less than or equal to 0.01 the feed is applied to the tool center point path. Less pronounced feed reductions are executed. >0: Feed lowering is limited to the programmed factor. At 0.01, this means that the feed of the tool center point path is possibly only 1 percent of the programmed feed value. 1: On concave contours, the tool center point feed equals the programmed feed (the behavior then corresponds to CFTCP). 42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST - W1 - Retain the assignment of tool lengths 1 to 3 to the DWORD geo-axes when changing the machining plane (G17 to G19) SOFORT - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 - Description: If this setting data is not zero, the allocation of the tool lengths 1 to 3 (length, wear) to the geometry axes is not changed if the machining plane (G17 to G19) changes. The allocation of tool length components to the geometry axes results from the value of the setting data according to the following tables. With respect to the allocation, (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-329 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data a distinction is made between turning tools (tool types 500 to 599) and other tools (drilling/milling tools). For the representation in the tables it is assumed that geometry axes 1 to 3 are named X, Y, Z. However, the geometry axis sequence, and not the axis identifier, is the determining factor in the assignment of an offset to an axis. The assignment of the tool lengths to the geometry axes for turning tools (tool types 500 to 599) results from the value of setting data SD 42940 in accordance with the following table: Plane/value Length 1 Length 2 Length 3 17 Y XZ 18*) X ZY 19 Z YX -17 X YZ -18 Z XY -19 Y ZX The following table shows the allocation of the tool lengths 1 to 3 to the geometry axes for drills/milling cutters (tool types 100 to 299): Plane/valueLength 1 Length 2 Length 3 17*) Z YX 18 Y XZ 19 X ZY -17 Z XY -18 Y ZX -19 X YZ related to: SD 42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE 42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE - W1 - Allocation of the tool length compensation independent of tool type DWORD SOFORT - - 7/7 - 0 - 802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3 802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3 802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3 Description: 0: The assignment is performed by default. A distinction is made between turning tools (tool type 500 to 599) and drilling/milling tools (tool type 100 to 299). related to: SD 42940: TOOL_LENGTH_CONST 3-330 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data 42990 MAX_BLOCKS_IN_IPOBUFFER - K1 - maximum number of blocks in IPO buffer DWORD SOFORT - - -1 - - 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This setting data can be used to delimit the maximum number of blocks in the interpolation buffer by the maximum number specified in MD MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE. A negative value means that no limitation of the number of blocks is active in the interpolation buffer, and the number of blocks is determined solely by the MD MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE (default setting). 42995 CONE_ANGLE - - - Taper angle DOUBLE SOFORT 90 7/7 - - 0 -90 Description: This setting data writes the taper angle for taper turning. This setting data is written via the operator interface. 43120 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS - FBFA - Axial default scaling factor with G51 active DWORD SOFORT - - 1 - - 7/7 802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0 802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0 - Description: If no axial scaling factor I, J, or K is programmed in the G51 block, DEFAULT_SCALEFACTOR_AXIS is active. The scaling factor is only active if MD AXES_SCALE_ENABLE is set. Related to: AXES_SCALE_ENABLE, WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE 43200 SPIND_S - S1 rev/min Speed for spindle start by VDI DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 0.0 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition - 3-331 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data Description: Spindle speed at spindle start by VDI interface signals DB31,...DBB30.1 and DB31,...DBB30.2. Example: $SA_SPIND_S[S1] = 600 Spindle 1 is started at a speed of 600 rpm upon detection of the positive edge of one of the above mentioned VDI starting signals. Speed programming values are entered in the SD by setting bit 4=1 in MD 35035 SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK. The SD becomes active in JOG as a default speed by setting bit 5=1 in MD 35035 SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK (exception: the value is zero). Related to: SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK 43202 SPIND_CONSTCUT_S - S1 m/min Const cut speed for spindle start by VDI DOUBLE SOFORT - - 7/7 - 0.0 - Description: Definition of the constant cutting speed for the master spindle. The setting data is evaluated at spindle start by the VDI interface signals DB31,...DBB30.1 and DB31,...DBB30.2. Cutting speed programming values are entered in the SD by setting bit 8=1 in MD 35035 SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK. Related to: SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK 43206 SPIND_SPEED_TYPE A06 - - Spindle speed type for spindle start through VDI DWORD SOFORT - 972 7/7 - 94 93 Description: Definition of the spindle speed type for the master spindle. The setting data is evaluated via the DBB30 interface at spindle start. The range of values and the functionality correspond to the 15th G group "feed type". Permissible values are the G values: 93, 94, 95, 96, 961, 97, and 971. With the stated values, a functional distinction has to be made between the following variants: ==>93, 94, 95, 97 and 971: The spindle is started at the speed in SD 43200 $SA_SPIND_S. ==>96 und 961: The speed of the spindle is derived from the cutting speed of SD 43202 $SA_SPIND_CONSTCUT_S and the radius of the transverse axis. The default value is 94 (corresponds to G94). The default value becomes active if the SD is written with impermissible values. 3-332 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data 43210 SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 - S1 rev/min Programmable lower spindle speed limiting for G25 DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - 0.0 - - Description: The spindle speed is not permitted to drop below the minimum spindle speed limit entered in this SD. The NCK limits an excessively small spindle speed setpoint to this value. The spindle speed can only fall below the minimum limit through: - Spindle override 0% - M5 - S0 - IS "Spindle stop" (V380x 0004.3) - IS "Controller enable" (V380x 0002.1) - IS "Reset" (V3000 0000.7) - IS "Spindle reset" (V380x 0002.2) - IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5 Irrelevant for: All spindle modes except control mode Special cases: The value in SD: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 can be altered by means of: - G25 S .... in the part program - Operator commands from the HMI The value in SD: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 is retained after reset or power off. related to: SD 43220: SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 SD 43230: SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS (progr. Spindle speed limiting with G96) 43220 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 - S1 rev/min Programmable upper spindle speed limiting for G26 DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - 1000.0 - - Description: The spindle speed is not permitted to exceed the maximum spindle speed limit entered in this SD. The NCK limits an excessive spindle speed setpoint to this value. Irrelevant for: All spindle modes except control mode. Special cases: The value in this SD: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G26 can be altered by means of: - G26 S .... in the part program - Operator commands from the HMI The value in SD: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G26 is retained after reset or power off. related to: SD 43210: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 (progr. spindle speed limiting G25) SD 43230: SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS (progr. Spindle speed limiting with G96) (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-333 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data 43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS - S1 rev/min progr. Spindle speed limiting G96 DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 100.0 - Description: At constant cutting rate (G96 and G97) an extra limits entered in SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS is operative in addition to the continually applied limits. Furthermore this can be described with SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS in the part program with LIMS=... . Irrelevant for: All spindle functions except for G96 and G97 (constant cutting speed) Application example: When cutting-off and for very small diameters of the workpiece to be machined, the spindle with the workpiece (lathe) accelerates higher and higher at a constant cutting rate (G96), theoretically reaching an infinitely high set speed in the position of the traverse axis X=0. In cases such as this, the spindle rotates up to its maximum spindle speed in the current gear stage (limited, where applicable, by G26). If, especially for G96, the spindle is to be limited to a lower speed, then this can be defined using LIMS=.... SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS. Special casesrelated to: The value SD 43210: SPIND_MIN_VELO_LIMS can be changed using: - LIMS S .... in the part program - Operator commands from the HMI The value SD SPIND_MIN_VELO_LIMS is retained after reset or power down. related to: SD 43220: SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 (maximum spindle speed) SD 43210: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 (minimum spindle speed) 43240 M19_SPOS -, A12 S1 degrees Spindle position for spindle positioning with M19. DOUBLE SOFORT - 10000000.0 7/7 - 0.0 -10000000.0 Description: Spindle position in [ DEGREES ] for spindle positioning with M19. The position approach mode is defined in $SA_M19_SPOSMODE. Default positions must lie in the range 0 <= pos < $MA_MODULO_RANGE. Path defaults ($SA_M19_SPOSMODE = 2) can be positive or negative and are only limited by the input format. 43250 M19_SPOSMODE -, A12 S1 - Spindle position approach mode for spindle positioning with M19. DWORD SOFORT - 5 7/7 - 3-334 0 0 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data Description: Spindle position approach mode for spindle positioning with M19. In which signify: 0: DC (default) approach position on the shortest path. 1: AC approach position normally. 2: IC approach incrementally (as path), sign gives the traversing direction 3: DC approach position on the shortest path. 4: ACP approach position from the positive direction. 5: ACN approach position from the negative direction. 43340 EXTERN_REF_POSITION_G30_1 -, A12 FBFA - Reference point position for G30.1 DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 0.0 - Description: Reference point position for G30.1. This setting data will be evaluated in CYCLE328. 43400 WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE - A3 - Working area limiting active in positive direction BOOLEAN SOFORT - - 7/7 CTEQ - FALSE - Description: 0: The working area limit of the axis is deactivated in the positive direction. 1: The working area limit of the axis is active in the positive direction. The setting data is parameterized using the operator panel in the "Parameter" area by activating/deactivating the working area limitation. Irrelevant for: G-Code: WALIMOF 43410 WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE - A3 - Working area limiting active in negative direction BOOLEAN SOFORT - - 7/7 CTEQ - FALSE - Description: 0: The working area limit of the axis is deactivated in the negative direction. 1: The working area limit of the axis is active in the negative direction. The setting data is parameterized using the operator panel in the "Parameter" area by activating/deactivating the working area limitation. Irrelevant for: G-Code: WALIMOF (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-335 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data 43420 WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS - A3 mm, degrees Working area, limiting plus DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - 1.0e+8 - Description: The working area limits can be used to restrict the working area in the MCS in the positive direction of the corresponding axis. The setting data can be changed via the operator panel in the "Parameter" operating area. The positive working area limit can be changed in the program with G26. Irrelevant for: G-Code: WALIMOF related to: SD 43400: WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE 43430 WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS - A3 mm, degrees Working area, limiting minus DOUBLE SOFORT - 7/7 - - -1.0e+8 - Description: The working area limitation can be used to restrict the working area in the MCS in the negative direction of the corresponding axis. The setting data can be changed via the operator panel in the "Parameter" operating area. The negative working area limit can be changed in the program with G25. Irrelevant forSpecial cases: G code: WALIMOF related to: SD 43410: WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE 43500 FIXED_STOP_SWITCH - F1 - Selection of travel to fixed stop BYTE SOFORT - - 0 0 1 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: This setting data allows the "Travel to fixed stop" function to be checked. Value=0: Deselect "Travel to fixed stop" function =1: Select "Travel to fixed stop" function The setting data can be overwritten by the part program using the command FXS[x]=1/0. 3-336 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data 43510 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE - F1 % Clamping torque for travel to fixed stop DOUBLE SOFORT - - 5.0 0.0 800.0 7/7 802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2 802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1 802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2 802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2 Description: The clamping torque is entered in this setting data as a percentage of the maximum motor torque (for FSD, corresponds with percentage of max. current setpoint) Please note that a clamping torque greater than 100% may only be present for a short time; otherwise, the motor will be damaged When selecting the function "Travel to fixed stop" through programming FXS[.] the default setting of the MD 37010: FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF applies until it is programmed with FXST[.]. The FXST[x] command acts like a block-synchronous change of this setting data. The setting data can be modified by the operator. The SD is already operative as the stop is approached. The fixed stop is considered reached if: FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK, bit 1 = 0, with MD37060: (no acknowledgment required) IS "Fixed stop reached" is set by the NC. Bit 1 = 1: (acknowledgment required) IS "Fixed stop reached" is set by the NC and acknowledged by IS "Acknowledge fixed stop reached". related to: MD 37010: FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF (default setting for clamping torque) 43700 OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 - P5 mm, degrees Oscillation reversal point 1 DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: Position of the oscillating axis at reversal point 1. Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after RESET.) (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-337 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data Application example(s) NC language: OSP1[Axis]=Position Related to .... OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2 43710 OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2 - P5 mm, degrees Oscillation reversal point 2 DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: Position of the oscillating axis at reversal point 2. Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after reset.) Application example(s) NC language: OSP2[Axis]=Position Related to .... OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 43720 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1 - P5 s Hold time at oscillation reversal point 1 DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 - Description: Hold time of the oscillating axis at reversal point 1. Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after RESET.) Application example(s) NC language: OST1[Axis]=Position Related to .... OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2 3-338 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data 43730 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2 - P5 s Hold time at oscillation reversal point 2 DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 - Description: Hold time of the oscillating axis at reversal point 2. Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after RESET.) Application example(s) NC language: OST2[Axis]=Position Related to .... OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1 43740 OSCILL_VELO mm/min, rev/min Feedrate of reciprocating axis - P5 DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: Feed rate of the oscillating axis Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after RESET.) Application example(s) NC language: FA[Axis]=F value 43750 OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES - P5 - Number of spark-out strokes DWORD SOFORT - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-339 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data Description: Number of sparking-out strokes performed after ending the oscillating movement Application example(s) NC language: OSNSC[Axis]=Stroke number Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after reset.) 43760 OSCILL_END_POS - P5 mm, degrees End position of the reciprocating axis DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 - Description: Position the oscillating axis travels to after ending the sparking-out strokes. Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after reset.) Application example(s) NC language: OSE[Axis]=Position 43770 OSCILL_CTRL_MASK - P5 - Oscillation sequence control mask DWORD SOFORT - - 0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: Bit mask: Bit no. | Meaning in OSCILL_CTRL_MASK -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0(LSB)-1 | 0: Stop at the next reversal point if the | oscillating movement is switched off | | 1: Stop at reversal point 1 if the | oscillating movement is switched off | 2: Stop at reversal point 2 if the | oscillating movement is switched of | 3: Do not approach a reversal point when the oscillating movement is switched 3-340 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Setting Data - Description Channel-specific setting data off | if no sparking-out strokes are programmed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------2 | 1: Approach end position after sparking out -----------------------------------------------------------------------------3 | 1: If the oscillating movement is aborted by delete distance-to-go, | then the sparking-out strokes are to be executed afterwards | and the end position approached if necessary -----------------------------------------------------------------------------4 | 1: If the oscillating movement is aborted by delete distance-to-go, | then the corresponding reversal point | is approached on switch off -----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 | 1: Changed feedrate does not become active until the next reversal point -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6 | 1: Path override is active if the feed rate is 0, | otherwise speed override is active -----------------------------------------------------------------------------7 | 1: In the case of rotary axes DC (shortest path) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------8 | 1: Execute sparking-out stroke as single stroke not as double stroke -----------------------------------------------------------------------------9 | 1: On starting, first approach the starting position, see | $SA_OSCILL_START_POS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Application example(s) NC language: OSCTRL[Axis]=(setting options, reset options) 43780 OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE - P5 - Activate oscillation movement BOOLEAN SOFORT - - FALSE - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: Switching the oscillating movement on and off Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after reset.) Application example(s) NC language: OS[Axis]=1, OS[Axis]=0 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 3-341 Setting Data - Description 06/2007 Channel-specific setting data Irrelevant for 43790 OSCILL_START_POS - - mm, degrees Start position of reciprocating axis DOUBLE SOFORT - - 0.0 - - 7/7 802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0 802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0 Description: Position approached by the oscillating axis at the start of oscillation if this is set in $SA_OSCILL_CTRL_MASK. Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after reset.) 3-342 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 4 Interface Signals 4.1 General Interfaces The exchange of signals and data between the PLC user program and * NCK (core of numerical control) * HMI (display unit) takes places through various data areas. The PLC user program does not have to handle the exchange of data and signals. From the users point of view, this takes place automatically. 1&. *HQHUDO 3/& 6LJQDOVWR1& *HQHUDO 6LJQDOVIURP1& 8VHU SURJUDP 2SHUDWLQJPRGHV 6LJQDOVWR1& 2SHUDWLQJ PRGHV 6LJQDOVIURP1& &KDQQHO 6LJQDOVWR1& &KDQQHO 6LJQDOVIURP1& 6SLQGOH Q $[LVQ $[LV 6SLQGOH $[LV $[LV 6LJQDOVWR1& 6LJQDOVIURP1& Cyclical signal exchange The control and status signals of the PLC/NCK interface are updated cyclically. * General signals * Operating mode signals * Channel signals * Axis/spindle signals (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-343 Interface Signals 06/2007 Signals from/to HMI 4.2 Signals from/to HMI 4.2.1 Program-control signals from HMI V1700 0000.5 M01 selected Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Program control Activate M1 has been selected on the operator interface. This does not activate the function. Program control Activate M1 has not been selected via the operator interface. Note for the reader: IS "Activate M01" IS "M0/M1 active" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V1700 0000.6 Dry run feedrate selected Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal status 1 or edge transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC Signal(s) updated: cyclic Dry run feedrate is selected. Signal status 0 or edge transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) valid from SW: Instead of the programmed feedrate, the dry run feedrate entered in SD 42100: DRY_RUN_FEED is effective. When activating the dry run feedrate, the signal is automatically entered in the PLC interface and transferred by the PLC basic program to the PLC interface signal "Activate dry run feedrate". Dry run feedrate is not selected. Related to .... The programmed feedrate is effective. IS "Activate dry run feedrate" (V3200 0000.6) Note for the reader: SD: DRY_RUN_FEED (dry run feedrate) 802D sl Description of Functions: V1, K1 V1700 0001.3 Feed override for rapid traverse selected Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal status 1 or edge transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The feedrate override switch is also to act as a rapid traverse override switch. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) 4-344 Overrides more than 100 % are limited to the maximum value of 100 % rapid traverse override. The interface signal (IS) "Feedrate override selected for rapid traverse" is automatically entered in the PLC interface by the operator panel and transferred by the PLC basic program to the PLC interface signal "Rapid traverse override effective". Furthermore, the IS "Feedrate override" (VB3200 0004) is copied by the PLC basic program into the IS "Rapid traverse override" (VB3200 0005). Program control -Feed override for rapid traverse- has not been selected via the operator interface. This signal is used if no separate rapid traverse override switch exists. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Signals from/to HMI Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 V1700 0001.7 Program test selected Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Program control Program test has been selected via the operator interface. This does not activate the function. Program control Program test has not been selected via the operator interface. IS "Activate program test" IS "Program test active" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 Note for the reader: V1700 0002 V1700 0003.0 to .1 Skip block selected Program test selected""# Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Program control -skip block- has been selected via the operator interface. This does not activate the function. Program control -skip block- has not been selected via the operator interface. V1700 0003.7 *** Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: IS "Activate skip block" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 Measuring in JOG active Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 The "Tool measuring in JOG" function is activated by HMI. Note: This signal remains set when changing to AUTOMATIC mode in this function. The HMI maintains the JOG image in the display. Only the active mode display changes. The "Tool measuring" function is not active. 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-345 Interface Signals 06/2007 Signals from/to HMI 4.2.2 Signals from HMI V1800 0000.0 AUTOMATIC mode Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 AUTOMATIC mode has been selected by the HMI. The signal status 1 is active for only one PLC cycle. AUTOMATIC mode is not selected by the HMI. if "Change mode disable" signal V1800 0000.1 MDA mode Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 MDA mode has been selected by the HMI. The signal status 1 is active for only one PLC cycle. MDA mode is not selected by the HMI. if "Change mode disable" signal 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 V1800 0000.2 JOG mode Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 JOG mode has been selected by the HMI. The signal status 1 is active for only one PLC cycle. JOG mode is not selected by the HMI. if "Change mode disable" signal 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 V1800 0000.4 Mode group changeover disable Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 Request by MMC: The current active mode (JOG, MDA or AUTOMATIC) should not be changed. The signal status is active for only one PLC cycle. The mode can be changed. 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 Signal state 0 Note for the reader: 4-346 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Signals from/to HMI V1800 0000.6 *** Start measuring in JOG Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 Request to PLC by HMI to start the measuring program with NC start. The signal status 1 is active for only one PLC cycle only. 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 V1800 0001.2 Machine function REF Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 The REF machine function is selected from within JOG mode. The signal status 1 is active for only one PLC cycle only. Machine function REF is not selected. if JOG mode is not active. 4.2.3 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 Signals from operator panel V1900 0000.6 Simulation activ Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The -simulation- function has been selected via the operator interface. The -simulation- function has not been selected via the operator interface. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-347 Interface Signals 06/2007 Signals from/to HMI 4.2.4 General selection/status signals from HMI V1900 0003.7 V1900 0004.7 Machine axis Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from NC (HMI -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The operator has assigned an axis to the handwheel (1, 2, 3) directly on the operator panel. This axis is a machine axis - not a geometry axis (axis in the WCS). Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: for handwheel 1 for handwheel 2 For further information see IS "Axis number". The operator has assigned an axis to the handwheel (1, 2, 3) directly on the operator panel. This axis is a geometry axis (axis in the WCS). For further information see IS "Axis number". IS "Axis number" (V1900 0003.0 to .4, ff) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 V1900 1003.0 to .2 V1900 1004.0 to .2 Axis number Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Significance of signal Signal(s) from NC (HMI -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The operator can assign an axis to every handwheel directly via the operator panel. To do so, he defines the required axis (e.g. X). The PLC user interface provides the number of the axis plus the information 'machine axis or geometry axis' ("machine axis" interface signal) as HMI interface signals. The "Activate handwheel" interface signal for the defined axis must be set from the PLC user program. Depending on the setting in the HMI interface signal "machine axis", either the interface for the geometry axis or for the machine axis is used. 4-348 for handwheel 1 for handwheel 2 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Signals from/to HMI The following must be noted when assigning the axis designation to the axis number: * IS "Machine axis" = 1; i.e. machine axis - not geometry axis: The assignment is made via MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[n] (machine axis name). * IS "Machine axis" = 0; i.e. geometry axis (axis in WCS): The assignment is made via MD 20060: AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[n] (geometry axis name in channel). IS "Channel number geometry axis handwheel n" defines the channel assigned to the handwheel. The following coding applies to the axis number: Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 axis number 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 2 0 1 1 3 1 0 0 4 1 0 1 5 Note: Bit 3 and bit 4 must always be left with value =0. Related to .... IS "Machine axis" (V1900 1003.7 ff) IS "Activate handwheel" 1 to 3 /geometry axes 1, 2, 3 (V3200 1000.0 to .2, V3200 1004.0 to .2, V3200 1008.0 to .2) IS "Activate handwheel" 1 to 3 /machine axes (V380x 0004.0 to .2) MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB [n] (machine axis name) Note for the reader: MD 20060: AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[n] (name of the geometry axis in the channel) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-349 Interface Signals 06/2007 Signals from/to HMI 4.2.5 General selection/status signals to HMI V1900 5001.0 Update the tool list Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (PLC ---> HMI) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Tool display is updated V1900 5002.0 Enabling machine tool measuring in JOG Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from NCK (PLC HMI) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2 Measuring in JOG function can be activated. VD1900 5004 Tool number for tool measuring in JOG Signal(s) valid from SW: No effect 802D sl Description of Functions: W1 Measuring in JOG is not possible. 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Value > 0 (DWORD) Signal(s) to HMI (PLC ---> HMI) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 Input of T number from PLC for entering measurement results to HMI. The number entered in the HMI screen is used as offset number D. Value = 0 No specification of the T no. by PLC Signal irrelevant for ... ... if IS "Measuring in JOG active" (V1700 0003.7) is not set. Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 4-350 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel 4.3 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel V2500 0004. 0 to .4 V2500 0006.0 V2500 0008.0 V2500 0010.0 V2500 0012.0 to .2 M function Change 1 to 5 S function Change 1 T function Change 1 D function Change 1 H function Change 1 to 3 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 Signal state 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: An M, S, T, D or H function has been output to the interface with a new value together with the associated change signal. In this case, the change signal indicates that the appropriate value is valid. The change signals are only valid for one PLC cycle! That means that there is a pending change for this cycle if the signal is 1. The value of the data concerned is not valid. 802D sl Description of Functions: H2 VB2500 1000 to VB2500 1012 Decoded M signals: M0 - M99 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 Signal state 0 Application example(s) Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) valid from SW: The dynamic M signal bits are set by decoded M functions. With a general auxiliary function output, dynamic M signal bits are acknowledged by the PLC system program after the complete AWP routine has been executed once. clockwise rotation, switch coolant ON/OFF specific" (VD370x 0000) 802D sl Description of Functions: H2 VD2500 2000 T function 1 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Job controlled Signal(s) valid from SW: by NCK The T function programmed in an NC block is made available here as soon as the T change signal is applied. Value range of T function: 0-32000; integer The T function remains valid until it is overwritten by a new T function. * After PLC power-up. Signal state 1 Signal state 0 Application example(s) Special cases, errors, ... ... Note for the reader: * All auxiliary functions are deleted before a new function is entered. Control of automatic tool selection. When T0 is selected, the current tool is removed from the tool holder but not replaced by a new tool (default configuration by machine manufacturer). 802D sl Description of Functions: H2 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-351 Interface Signals 06/2007 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel VD2500 3000 VD2500 3008 VD2500 3016 VD2500 3024 VD2500 3032 VB2500 3004 VB2500 3012 VB2500 3020 VB2500 3028 VB2500 3036 M function 1 M function 2 M function 3 M function 4 M function 5 Extended address M function 1 Extended address M function 2 Extended address M function 3 Extended address M function 4 Extended address M function 5 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 0 Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Job controlled Signal(s) valid from SW: by NCK Up to 5 M functions programmed in an NC block are made available here simultaneously as soon as the M change signals are applied. Value range of the M functions: 0 to 99; integer Value range of extended address: 1-2; integer (spindle number) The M functions remain valid until they are overwritten by new M functions. * After PLC power-up. Related to .... Note for the reader: * All auxiliary functions are deleted before a new function is entered. IS "S function for the spindle (REAL), axis-specific" (VD370x 0000) 802D sl Description of Functions: H2 VD2500 4000 VD2500 4008 VB2500 4004 VB2500 4012 S function 1 S function 2 Extended address S function 1 Extended address S function 2 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Job controlled by Signal(s) valid from SW: NCK The S function programmed in an NC block (speed or cutting value with G96) is made available here as soon as the S change signal is applied. Signal state 1 Signal state 1 Value range of the S function: : Floating point (REAL format/4-byte) Value range of extended address: 1-2; integer (spindle number) Signal state 0 The S function remains valid until it is overwritten by a new S function. * After PLC power-up. Related to .... Note for the reader: * All auxiliary functions are deleted before a new function is entered. specific" (VD370x 0004) 802D sl Description of Functions: H2 VD2500 5000 D function 1 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Job controlled by Signal(s) valid from SW: NCK The D function programmed in an NC block is made available here as soon as the D change signal is applied. Value range of D function: 0-9; integer The D function remains valid until it is overwritten by a new D function. Signal state 1 4-352 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel Signal state 0 * After PLC power-up. * All auxiliary functions are deleted before a new function is entered. Application example(s) Special cases, errors, ... ... Note for the reader: D0 is reserved for deselecting the current tool offset. VD2500 6000 VD2500 6008 VD2500 6016 H function 1 H function 2 H function 3 VW2500 6004 VW2500 6012 VW2500 6020 Extended address H function 1 Extended address H function 2 Extended address H function 3 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Job controlled by Signal(s) valid from SW: NCK Up to 3 H functions programmed in an NC block are made available here simultaneously as soon as the H change signals are applied. Signal state 1 802D sl Description of Functions: H2 Value range of the H functions: Floating point (REAL format/4-byte) Value range of extended address: 0 to 99; integer Signal state 0 Application example(s) Note for the reader: The H functions remain valid until they are overwritten by new H functions. * After PLC power-up. * All auxiliary functions are deleted before a new function is entered. Switching functions on the machine. 802D sl Description of Functions: H2 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-353 Interface Signals 06/2007 NC signals 4.4 NC signals 4.4.1 General signals to NC V2600 0000.1 EMERGENCY STOP Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) to NC (PLC ---> NC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The NC is switched to the EMERGENCY STOP state and the EMERGENCY STOP procedure is started on the NC. Related to .... * The NC is not in the EMERGENCY STOP state. * The EMERGENCY STOP state is (still) active but can be reset with IS "Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP" and IS "reset". IS "Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP" (V2600 0000.2) IS "EMERGENCY STOP active" (V2700 0000.1) V2600 0000.2 Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to NC (PLC ---> NC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The EMERGENCY STOP state is reset only if IS "Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP" followed by IS "Reset" (V3000 0000.7) are set. It must be noted in this respect that IS "Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP" and IS "Reset" must be set (together) for a long enough period for IS "EMERGENCY STOP active" (V2600 0000.1) to be reset. By resetting the EMERGENCY STOP state: * the "EMERGENCY STOP active" interface signal is reset * the controller enable is switched in * IS "Position control active" is set * Ready" is set * Alarm 3000 is canceled Related to .... * the part program is no longer processed IS "EMERGENCY STOP" (V2600 0000.1) IS "EMERGENCY STOP active" (V2700 0000.1) IS "Reset" (V3000 0000.7) V2600 0001.0 INC inputs in mode group range active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to NCK (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 4-354 Signal(s) valid from SW: The IS "INC1", "INC10", ..., "continuous" in the operating mode range are used as input signals (V3000 0002.0 to .6). The IS "INC1", "INC10", ..., "continuous" in the axis and geometry axis range are used as input signals. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals NC signals Related to .... Note for the reader: 4.4.2 IS "Machine function INC1 to continuous" in operating mode range (V3000 0002.0 to .6) IS "Machine function INC1,...,continuous" for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1001.0 to .6) for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1005.0 to .6) for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1009.0 to .6) IS "Machine function INC1,...,continuous" in axis range (V380x 0005.0 to .6) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 General signals from NC V2700 0000.1 EMERGENCY STOP active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Related to .... Signal(s) to NC (PLC ---> NC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The NC is in the EMERGENCY STOP state. IS "EMERGENCY STOP" (V2600 0000.1) IS "Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP" (V2600 0000.2) V2700 0001.0 Probe 1 is actuated Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from NCK (NCK PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Probe 1 is actuated V2700 0001.7 INCH dimension system Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 Signal state 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) to NC (PLC ---> NC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The NC works with the inch dimension system. The NC works with the metric dimension system. 802D sl Description of Functions: G2 Signal(s) valid from SW: Probe 1 is not actuated 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-355 Interface Signals 06/2007 NC signals V2700 0004.0 to .7 Minus cam signals 1-32 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from NCK (NCK---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal status 1 or edge transition 0 ---> 1 The switching edges of the minus cam signals 1-32 are created independently of the direction of traversing of the (rotary) axis and transferred to the PLC interface at the IPO clock. Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1 Linear axis: - The minus cam signal switches from 0 to 1 when the axis overtravels the minus cam in the negative axis direction. Modulo rotary axis: Signal status 0 or edge transition 1 ---> 0 - The minus cam signal changes the levels at each positive edge of the plus cam signal. Linear axis: - The minus cam signal switches from 1 to 0 when the axis overtravels the minus cam in the positive axis direction. Modulo rotary axis: - The minus cam signal changes the levels at each positive edge of the plus cam signal. V2700 0008.0 to .7 Plus cam signals 1-32 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from NCK (NCK---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal status 1 or edge transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1 The switching edges of the plus cam signals 1-32 are created independently of the direction of traversing of the (rotary) axis and transferred to the PLC interface at the IPO clock. Linear axis: - The plus cam signal switches from 0 to 1 when the axis overtravels the plus cam in the positive direction. Modulo rotary axis: - The plus cam signal switches from 0 to 1 when the axis overtravels the minus cam in the positive axis direction. The described behavior of the plus cam applies under the following condition: Plus cam - minus cam < 180 degrees If this condition is not fulfilled or the minus cam is greater than the plus cam, the behavior of the plus cam signal is inverted. The behavior of the minus cam signal remains unchanged. 4-356 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Mode signals Signal status 0 or edge transition 1 ---> 0 Linear axis: - The plus cam signal switches from 1 to 0 when the axis overtravels the plus cam in the negative direction. Modulo rotary axis: - The plus cam signal switches back from 1 to 0 when the axis overtravels the plus cam in the positive axis direction. The described behavior of the plus cam applies under the following condition: Plus cam - minus cam < 180 degrees If this condition is not fulfilled or the minus cam is greater than the plus cam, the behavior of the plus cam signal is inverted. The behavior of the minus cam signal remains unchanged. 4.5 Mode signals V3000 0000.0 AUTOMATIC mode Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: AUTOMATIC mode is selected by the PLC program. IS "Active mode AUTOMATIC" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3000 0000.1 MDA mode Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic MDA mode is selected by the PLC program. IS "Active mode MDA" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3000 0000.2 JOG mode Interface signal Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK) AUTOMATIC mode is not selected by the PLC program. if "Mode group changeover disable" signal Signal(s) valid from SW: MDA mode is not selected by the PLC program. if "Mode group changeover disable" signal (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-357 Interface Signals 06/2007 Mode signals Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-358 Signal(s) updated: cyclic JOG mode is selected by the PLC program. Signal(s) valid from SW: JOG mode is not selected by the PLC program. if "Mode group changeover disable" signal IS "Active mode JOG" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Mode signals V3000 0000.4 Mode group changeover disable Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The currently active mode (JOG, MDA or AUTOMATIC) cannot be changed. The mode can be changed. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3000 0000.7 Reset Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The channel must change to the "RESET" status. The current program is then in program status "aborted". All moving axes and spindles are decelerated to zero speed according to their acceleration ramp without contour violation. The initial settings are set (e.g. for G functions). The alarms are cleared if they are not POWER ON alarms. Channel status and program run are not affected by this signal. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: IS "Channel reset" IS "All channels in reset state" An alarm which cancels IS "802 ready" ensures that the channel is no longer in the Reset state. In order to switch to another operating mode, a "reset" must then be initiated. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3000 0001.2 Machine function REF Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Machine function REF is activated in JOG mode. Special cases, errors, ... ... Machine function REF is not activated. if JOG mode is not active. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-359 Interface Signals 06/2007 Mode signals V3000 0000.0 to .6 Machine function INC1, INC10, INC100, INC1000, INC10000, INCvar, continuous Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 -->1 Signal(s) to modes (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: This input range is only used if the "INC inputs in mode group range active" interface signal (V2600 0001.0) is set. The signals then apply to all axes and geometry axes. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 -->0 Related to .... IS "INC..." defines how many increments the axis traverses when the traversing key is pressed or the handwheel turned one detent position. JOG mode must be active. With "INCvar" the value in the general SD 41010: JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE applies. In "continuous mode" the associated axis can be traversed with the plus or minus traversing key according to how the traverse key is pressed. As soon as the selected machine function becomes active, this is signaled to the PLC interface (IS "Active machine function INC1; ..."). If several machine function signals (INC1, INC... or "Continuous jogging") are selected at the interface simultaneously, no machine function is activated by the control. Note: The input IS "INC..." or "continuous" for changing an active machine function must be active for at least one PLC cycle. A static application is not required. The machine function in question is not selected. No change to the active machine function is required. If an axis is currently traversing an increment, this movement is also aborted if this machine function is deselected or changed over. IS "INC inputs in mode group range active" (V2600 0001.0) IS "Machine function INC1, ..., continuous" for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1001.0 to .6) for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1005.0 to .6) for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1009.0 to .6) IS "Machine function INC1, ..., continuous" in axis range (V380x 0005.0 to .6) IS "Active machine function INC1, ..., continuous" for geometry axis1 (V3300 1001.0 to .6) for geometry axis 2 (V3300 1005.0 to .6) for geometry axis 3 (V3300 1005.0 to .6) Note for the reader: IS "Active machine function INC1, ..., continuous" in axis range (V390x 0005.0 to .6) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 V3100 0000.0 Active mode AUTOMATIC Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from NCK (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic AUTOMATIC mode is active. 4-360 Signal(s) valid from SW: AUTOMATIC mode is not active. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Mode signals V3100 0000.1 Active mode MDA Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from NCK (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic MDA mode is active. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3100 0000.2 Active mode JOG Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from NCK (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic JOG mode is active. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3100 0000.3 802 READY Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) from NCK (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: This signal is set after POWER ON when all voltages are present. The mode group is now ready and part programs can be processed and axes traversed in the channel. The mode group/channel is not ready. Possible causes of this are: - A serious axis or spindle alarm is active - Hardware fault - Mode group incorrectly configured (machine data) Special cases, errors, ... ... Note for the reader: Signal(s) valid from SW: MDA mode is not active. Signal(s) valid from SW: JOG mode is not active. If the mode group ready signal changes to the "0" state - the axis and spindle drives are decelerated with max. braking current to zero speed, - the signals from the PLC to the NCK are switched to the inactive state (initial setting). An alarm which cancels IS "802 READY" ensures that the channel is no longer in the Reset state. In order to switch to another operating mode, a "reset" must then be initiated. (V3000 0000.7) 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-361 Interface Signals 06/2007 Mode signals V3100 0001.2 Active machine function REF Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from NCK (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Machine function REF is active in JOG. 4-362 Signal(s) valid from SW: Machine function REF is not active. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals 4.6 Channel-specific signals 4.6.1 Signals to channel V3200 0000.4 Activate single block Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) Special cases, errors, ... ... Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: In the AUTOMATIC mode the program is processed in the single-block mode; in MDA only 1 block can be entered in any case. No effect A new program can first be tested in single block mode in order to monitor the individual program steps more exactly. * Intermediate blocks can be inserted if tool radius compensation (G41,G42) is selected. * In a series of G33 blocks single block is effective only if "dry run feedrate" is selected. References Note for the reader: * Pure calculation blocks are not processed in the single step in "Single block coarse" but only in "Single block fine". The preselection is made via softkey "Program control". IS"Single-block selected" IS "Program status stopped" Subsection NO TAG 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3200 000.5 Activate M1 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: M1 programmed in the part program leads to a programmed stop when processed in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode. Related to .... Note for the reader: M1 programmed in the part program does not lead to a programmed stop. IS "M01 selected" (V1700 0000.5) IS "M0/M1 active" (V3300 0000.5) 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-363 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals V3200 0000.6 Activate dry run feedrate Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Instead of the programmed feedrate (for G1, G2, G3, CIP, CT), the dry run feedrate defined in SD 42100: DRY_RUN_FEED is used if the dry run feedrate is larger than the programmed feedrate. This interface signal is evaluated on an NC start when the channel is in the "Reset" state. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) Related to .... When selected on the PLC, the "Activate dry run feedrate" interface signal is required to be set by the PLC user program. The programmed feedrate is used for traversing. Active after Reset. Testing a workpiece program with an increased feedrate. Note for the reader: IS "Dry run feedrate selected" (V1700 0000.6) SD 42100: DRY_RUN_FEED (Dry run feedrate) 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 V3200 0001.0 Activate referencing Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Channel-specific referencing is started with the "Activate referencing" interface signal. The control acknowledges a successful start with the iReferencing activei interface signal. Each machine axis assigned to the channel can be referenced with channel-specific referencing (this is achieved internally on the control by simulating the plus/minus travel keys). The axis-specific MD 34110: REFP_CYCLE_NR (axis sequence for channel-specific referencing) can be used to define the sequence in which the machine data are referenced. If all axes entered in MD: REFP_CYCLE_NR have reached their reference point, the "all axes referenced" interface signal (V3300 0004.2) is enabled. If the machine axes are to be referenced in a particular sequence, the following options are available: Application example(s) * up * the PLC must check the sequence when starting or define it itself. Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-364 * specific referencing function is used. "Referencing active" interface signal (V3300 0001.0) "All axes referenced" interface signal (V3300 0004.2) 802D sl Description of Functions: R1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals V3200 0001.7 Activate program test Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Axis disable is set internally for all axes (not spindle). Therefore the machine axes do not move when a part program block or a part program is being processed. The axis movements are simulated on the operator interface with changing axis position values. The axis position values for the display are generated from the calculated setpoints. The part program is processed in the normal way. Part program processing is not affected by the function program test Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: IS "Program test selected" IS "Program test active" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3200 0002.0 Skip block Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Blocks marked in the part program with an oblique (/) are skipped. If there is a series of skip blocks, this signal is only active if it is pending before decoding of the first block of the series, ideally before NC start. The marked part program blocks are not skipped. IS "Skip block selected" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-365 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals V3200 0003.0 Stroke disable Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK) Signal(s) updated: Signal status 1 or edge transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or edge transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) valid from SW release: 3 This signal is used to enable the punching strokes via the PLC. 1-signal: The stroke is disabled; no punching stroke must be initiated by the NC. 0-signal: Stroke enable is provided; if no enable signal is set, no punching stroke can be executed by the NC. V3200 0003.1 Stroke initiated manually Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK) Signal(s) updated: Signal status 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or Signal(s) valid from SW release: 3 This signal can be used to initiate a single stroke in the manual mode. 1-signal: A manual stroke is executed. 0-signal: No effect signal transition 1 ---> 0 V3200 0003.2 Stroke suppressed Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK) Signal(s) updated: Signal status 1 or edge transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) valid from SW release: 3 The signal merely prevents the stroke. The machine will nevertheless traverse. If the automatic path distribution is active, it also remains active. Merely the "Initiate stroke" signal is suppressed. The machine will traverse in the "stop and go" mode. The step length is defined by the path segmentation. 1-signal: The stroke suppression is active. 0-signal: The stroke suppression is not active. V3200 0003.3 Stroke does not run Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal status 1 or edge transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK) Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release: 3 The NC reacts to this signal with immediate motion stop. If a motion or another action is interrupted due to this signal, an alarm is issued. Signal status 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 4-366 Physically, the signal for the CNC is identically to the "Stroke active" signal, i.e. the system is switched such that the two signals are connected to the same NC input via an AND operation. 1-signal: Stroke does not run (corresponds to the "Stroke enable" signal) 0-signal: Stroke running (corresponds to the "Stroke enable" signal) (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals V3200 0003.4 Delayed stroke Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK) Signal(s) updated: Signal status 1 or edge transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or edge transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) valid from SW release: 3 This signal can be used to activate a "Delayed stroke". In respect of its function, this signal corresponds to a programming of PDELAYON. Any further PLC signals not complying with the standard are not evaluated by the NCK. Except for the manual stroke initiation, the evaluation of the signals is limited to PON active. 1-signal: Delayed stroke is active 0-signal: Delayed stroke is not active V3200 0003.5 Manual stroke initiation Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK) Signal(s) updated: Signal status 1 or edge transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or edge transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) valid from SW release: 6.4 -> PLC IS "Manual stroke initiation acknowledgment" (DB21, ... DBX38.1). 1-signal: Manual stroke initiation is active 0-signal: Manual stroke initiation is not active (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-367 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals VB3200 0004 Feedrate override Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-368 Gray coding for Feedrate override Switch Code position 1 00001 2 00011 3 00010 4 00110 5 00111 6 00101 7 00100 8 01100 9 01101 10 01111 11 01110 12 01010 13 01011 14 01001 15 01000 16 11000 17 11001 18 11011 19 11010 20 11110 21 11111 22 11101 23 11100 24 10100 25 10101 26 10111 27 10110 28 10010 29 10011 30 10001 31 10000 IS "Feedrate override active" (V3200 0006.7) 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 Signal(s) valid from SW: Feedrate override 0.0 0.01 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals VB3200 0005 Rapid traverse override Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Special cases, errors, ... ... Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic The feed disable is inactive when G33 is active. Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) valid from SW: Gray coding forRapid traverse override Switch Code Rapid traverse override position factor 1 00001 0.0 2 00011 0.01 3 00010 0.02 4 00110 0.04 5 00111 0.06 6 00101 0.08 7 00100 0.10 8 01100 0.20 9 01101 0.30 10 01111 0.40 11 01110 0.50 12 01010 0.60 13 01011 0.70 14 01001 0.75 15 01000 0.80 16 11000 0.85 17 11001 0.90 18 11011 0.95 19 11010 1.00 20 11110 1.00 21 11111 1.00 22 11101 1.00 23 11100 1.00 24 10100 1.00 25 10101 1.00 26 10111 1.00 27 10110 1.00 28 10010 1.00 29 10011 1.00 30 10001 1.00 31 10000 1.00 IS "Rapid traverse override active" (V3200 0006.6) 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-369 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals V3200 0006.0 Feed disable Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The signal is active on a channel in all operating modes. * The signal disables all axes interpolating relative to each other as long as G33 (thread) is not active. All axes are brought to a standstill with adherence to the path contour. When the feed disable is canceled (0 signal), the interrupted part program is continued. * The position control is retained, i.e. the following error is eliminated. * If a travel request is issued for an axis with an active "Feed disable", The pending travel request is executed immediately when the "Feed disable" is canceled. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Special cases, errors, ... ... Note for the reader: 4-370 If the axis is interpolating in relation to others, this also applies to these axes. * The feedrate is enabled for all axes on the channel. * If a travel request ("Travel command") exists for an axis or group of axes when the "Feed disable" is canceled, this is executed immediately. The feed disable is inactive when G33 is active. 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals V3200 0006.1 Read-in disable Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Data transfer of the next block into the interpolator is disabled. This signal is only active in modes AUTOMATIC and MDA. Data transfer of the next block into the interpolator is enabled. This signal is only active in modes AUTOMATIC and MDA. ,QDFDVHZKHUHDQDX[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQKDVWRKDYHEHHQH[HFXWHGEHIRUHWKHQH[WEORFNFDQEHSURFHVVHG HJIRUDWRROFKDQJH DXWRPDWLFEORFNFKDQJHPXVWEHLQKLELWHGZLWKUHDGLQGLVDEOH 17 1* ;0 1 17 7 0 5HDGLQJLQWREXIIHU 2XWSXWRIWKHDX[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQ 5HDGLQJLQWREXIIHU 'DWDWUDQVIHULQWRWKHLQWHUSRODWRU 5HDGLQGLVDEOHVLJQDO 'DWDWUDQVIHU &RQWHQWVRIWKHLQWHUSRODWRU 5HDGLQGLVDEOHIRUWRROFKDQJH 4XHU\SRLQWRIWKHUHDGLQHQDEOH 5HPRYHUHDGLQGLVDEOH Related to .... Note for the reader: IS "Program status running" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3200 0006.4 Program level abort Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: On each signal transition 0 -> 1 the current program level being processed (subroutine level) is immediately aborted. Processing of the part program continues one level higher after the exit point. No effect Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Special cases, errors, ... ... Note for the reader: The main program level cannot be aborted with this IS, only with IS "Reset". 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-371 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals V3200 0006.6 Rapid traverse override active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) to channel (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The rapid traverse override between 0 and a maximum of 100% entered in the PLC interface is channelspecific. The rapid traverse override entered in the PLC interface is ignored. If the rapid traverse override is not active, an override factor of 100% is used internally on the NC. Note: The 1st switch position of the gray-coded interface for the value represents an exception. In this case, this override factor is also used with "Rapid traverse override inactive" and 0% is issued as the override value for axes. The rapid traverse override is inactive if G33 is active. Special cases, errors, ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: IS "Rapid traverse override" (V3200 0005) 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 V3200 0006.7 Feedrate override active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The feedrate override between 0 and a maximum of 120% entered in the PLC interface is active for the path feedrate and therefore automatically for the related axes. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 In JOG mode, the feedrate override acts directly on the axes. The feedrate override entered in the PLC interface is ignored. If the feedrate override is not active, an override factor of 100% is used internally on the NC. Note: Special cases, errors, ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-372 The 1st switch position of the gray-coded interface for the value represents an exception. In this case, this override factor is also used with "Feedrate override inactive" and 0% is issued as the override value for axes (acts the same as "Feed disable"). The feedrate override is inactive if G33 is active. IS "Feedrate override" (V3200 0004) 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals V3200 0007.0 NC start disable Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic IS "NC Start" is ineffective This signal is used to suppress renewed program processing because, for example, there is no lubricant. IS "NC Start" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3200 0007.1 NC Start Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW status AUTOMATIC mode: The selected NC program is started or resumed. If data are transferred from the PLC to the NC in the "Program interrupted" state, the data are calculated immediately on NC Start. Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 IS "NC Start" is effective. MDA mode: The entered part program blocks are released for execution or continued. No effect Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: IS "NC Start disable" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3200 0007.2 NC Stop at block limit Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The current NC program is stopped after the current part program block has been processed. Otherwise as for IS "NC Stop". Note for the reader: No effect IS "NC Stop" IS "NC Stop axes plus spindles" IS "Program status stopped" IS "Channel status interrupted" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-373 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals V3200 0007.3 NC stop Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The current NC program is stopped immediately, the current block is not completed. Only the axes without contour violation are stopped. Distances to go are traversed only after a renewed start. The program status changes to "stopped", the channel status changes to "interrupted". No effect Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) 2Q1&VWDUWWKHSURJUDPLVFRQWLQXHGDWWKHSRLQWRILQWHUUXSWLRQ ,61&6WRS ,61&6WDUW 3URJUDPUXQQLQJ $[LVUXQQLQJ %ORFNSURFHVVHG Special cases, errors, ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-374 The signal NC stop must be active for at least one PLC cycle. IS "NC Stop at block limit" IS "NC Stop axes plus spindles" IS "Program status stopped" IS "Channel status interrupted" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals V3200 0007.4 NC Stop axes plus spindles Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: --go are not completed until a start signal is given. The axes and the spindle are stopped. They are brought to a controlled standstill, however. The program status changes to stopped, the channel status changes to interrupted. No effect Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Special cases, errors, ... ... Channel status Reset Program status aborted $OOD[HVDQGVSLQGOHVWKDWZHUHQRWFDXVHGWRPRYHE\DSURJUDPRUSURJUDPEORFN HJD[HVDUHPRYHGE\ SUHVVLQJWKHWUDYHONH\VRQWKHPDFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO DUHQRWGHFHOHUDWHGWR]HURVSHHGZLWK1&VWRS D[HVSOXVVSLQGOHV 7KHSURJUDPLVFRQWLQXHGDWWKHLQWHUUXSWHGSODFHZLWK1&6WDUW 7KHVLJQDO1&VWRSD[HVSOXVVSLQGOHVPXVWEHSHQGLQJIRUDWOHDVWRQH3/&F\FOH 6LJQDO1&6WRSD[HV 6LJQDO1&6WDUW 3URJUDPUXQQLQJ $[LVUXQQLQJ 6SLQGOHUXQQLQJ %ORFNSURFHVVHG Related to .... Note for the reader: IS "NC Stop at block limit" IS "NC Stop" IS "Program status stopped" IS "Channel status interrupted" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3200 0013.5 Deactivate workpiece counter Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The workpiece count monitoring is turned off with activated tool monitoring. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-375 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: No effect 802D sl Description of Functions: W1 V3200 1000.0 to .1 V3200 1004.0 to .1 V3200 1008.0 to .1 Activate handwheel (1 to 3) for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: These machine data determine whether this geometry axis is assigned to handwheel 1, 2, 3 or no handwheel. Only one handwheel can be assigned to an axis at any one time. If several "Activate handwheel" interface signals are set, priority "Handwheel 1" before "Handwheel 2" before "Handwheel 3" applies. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) Related to .... Note for the reader: V3200 1000.3 V3200 1004.3 V3200 1008.3 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Note:Three geometry axes can be traversed simultaneously with handwheels 1 to 3! Neither handwheel 1, 2 nor 3 is assigned to this geometry axis. The PLC user program can use this interface signal to disable the influence of turning the handwheel on the geometry axis. IS "Handwheel active" 1 to 3 for geometry axis 1: V3300 1000.0 to .2 for geometry axis 2: V3300 1004.0 to .2 for geometry axis 3: V3300 1008.0 to .2 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 Feed stopGeo-axes (axes in the WCS) Signal(s) to channel (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The signal is only active in JOG mode (axes traversed in the WCS). * The signal triggers a feed stop for the axis. Traversing axes are brought to a standstill under controlled braking (ramp stop). No alarm is output. * The position control is retained, i.e. the following error is eliminated. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: 4-376 * If a travel request is issued for an axis with an active "Feed stop", the request is retained. This pending travel request is executed immediately after the "Feed stop" is canceled. * The feedrate is enabled for the axis. * If a travel request ("Travel command") is active when the "Feed stop" is canceled, this is executed immediately. 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals V3200 1000.4 V3200 1004.4 V3200 1008.4 Traverse key disable Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The traverse keys plus and minus have no effect on the geometry axes in question. It is thus not possible to traverse the geometry axis in JOG with the traverse keys on the machine control panel. Signal state 0 Application example(s) Related to .... Note for the reader: for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 If the traverse key disable is activated during a traverse movement, the geometry axis is stopped. Traverse keys plus and minus are enabled. It is thus possible, depending on the operating mode, to disable manual traverse of the geometry axis in JOG mode with the traverse keys from the PLC user program. IS "Traverse key plus" and " ... minus" for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1000.7 and .6) for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1004.7 and .6) for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1008.7 and .6) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 V3200 1000.5 V3200 1004.5 V3200 1008.5 Rapid traverse override for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 If the PLC interface signal "Rapid traverse override" is set together with "Traverse key plus" and "Traverse key minus", the geometry axis in question traverses at rapid traverse set for JOG on the assigned machine axis (e.g.: X -> X1). The rapid traverse velocity is defined in MD 32010: JOG_VELO_RAPID. Rapid traverse override is active in the following JOG modes: * Continuous traversing * Incremental traversing Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: If rapid traverse override is active, the velocity can be modified with the rapid traverse override switch. The geometry axis traverses at the defined JOG velocity (SD: JOG_SET_VELO or MD: JOG_VELO). 802D sl Description of Functions: H1, V1 V3200 1000.7 and .6 V3200 1004.7 and .6 V3200 1008.7 and .6 Traverse keys plus and minus Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Signal(s) valid from SW: 4-377 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 The selected axis can be traversed in both directions in JOG mode with the traverse keys plus and minus. Incremental traversing With signal 1 the axis starts to traverse at the set increment. If the signal changes to the 0 state before the increment is traversed, the traversing movement is interrupted. When the signal state changes to 1 again the movement is continued. The axis can be stopped and started several times as described above until the increment has been completely traversed. Continuous traversal If no INC measure is selected, and "continuous" is, the axis travels for as long as the traverse key is pressed. If both traverse signals (plus and minus) are set at the same time, no movement occurs, or any current movement is aborted! The effect of the traverse keys can be disabled for every axis individually with the PLC interface signal "Traverse key disable". Notice! Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Special cases, errors, ... ... In contrast to machine axes, for geometry axes, only one geometry axis can be traversed at any one time using the traversing keys. Alarm 20062 is triggered if an attempt is made to traverse more than one axis with the traverse keys. No traverse Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDA The geometry axis cannot be traversed in JOG mode: * If it is already being traversed via the axis-specific PLC interface (as a machine axis). * If another geometry axis is already being traversed with the traverse keys. Related to .... Alarm 20062 "Axis already active" is output. IS "Traverse key plus" and "Traverse key minus" for the machine axes (V380x 0004.7 and .6) IS "Traverse key disable" Note for the reader: for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1000.4) for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1004.4) for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1008.4) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 V3200 1001.0 to .6 V3200 1005.0 to .6 V3200 1009.0 to .6 for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic 4-378 Signal(s) valid from SW: (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 This input range is only used if IS "INC inputs in mode group range active" (V2600 0001.0) is not set. The interface signals INC... define how many increments the geometry axis traverses when the traverse key is pressed or the handwheel is turned one detent position. JOG mode must be active. With "INCvar" the value in the general SD 41010: JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE applies. In mode "continuous" the associated geometry axis can be traversed with the plus or minus traversing key according to how the traverse key is pressed. As soon as the selected machine function becomes active, this is signaled to the PLC interface (interface signal "Active machine function INC1;..."). Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: 4.6.2 If several machine function signals (INC1, INC... or "Continuous jogging") are selected at the interface simultaneously, no machine function is activated by the control. Note: The input IS "INC..." or "continuous" for changing an active machine function must be active for at least one PLC cycle. A static application is not required. The machine function in question is not selected. No change to the active machine function is requested. If an axis is currently traversing an increment, this movement is also aborted if this machine function is deselected or changed over. IS "Active machine function INC1, ..." for geometry axis 1 (V3300 1001.0 ... .6) for geometry axis 2 (V3300 1005.0 ... .6) for geometry axis 3 (V3300 1005.0 ... .6) IS "INC inputs in the mode group area active" (V2600 0001.0) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 Signals from the channel V3300 0000.3 Action block active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Application example(s) Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Block search: Output with accumulated auxiliary function outputs in progress (see Subsection NO TAG) 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0000.4 Approach block active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Block search with calculation/on contour: Start block in progress (see Subsection NO TAG) (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-379 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals Application example(s) Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0000.5 M0/M1 active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The part program block has been processed, the auxiliary functions have been output and - M0 is stored in the working memory - M1 is stored in the working memory and IS "Activate M01" is active The program status changes to stopped. - With IS "NC Start" - On program abort as a result of Reset Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: IS "Activate M01" IS "M01 selected" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0000.6 Last action block active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Application example(s) Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Block search: Last block of the output with collected auxiliary function outputs in progress (see Subsection NO TAG) 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0001.0 Referencing active Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Channel-specific referencing is operational. Signal(s) valid from SW: * Channel-specific referencing has been completed * Axis-specific referencing running * No referencing active Spindles Signal irrelevant for ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: "Activate referencing" interface signal (V3200 0001.0) 802D sl Description of Functions: R1 V3300 0001.2 Revolutional feedrate active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from channel (NCK PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic 4-380 Signal(s) valid from SW: (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Application example(s) Related to .... Note for the reader: When programming G95 (revolutional feedrate) in the AUTOMATIC mode. 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 V3300 0001.4 Block search active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The Block search function is active. It was selected and started on the operator interface. The block search function makes it possible to jump to a certain block within a part program and to start processing the part program at this block. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0001.5 M2/M30 active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: NC block with M2 is completely processed. If traversing motions are also programmed in this block, the signal is not output until the target position is reached. The block search function is not active. Signal state 0 or - No program end or abort signal transition 1 ---> - Status after power-up of control system 0 - Start of an NC program 'DWDWUDQVIHUWR ZRUNLQJPHPRU\ %ORFNSURFHVVHG 1&EORFNZLWK0 0 0FKDQJHVLJQDO 3/&F\FOHWLPH ,600DFWLYH Application example(s) The PLC can detect the end of program processing with this signal and react appropriately. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-381 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals Special cases, errors, - The functions M2 and M30 have equal priority. Only M2 should be used. ... ... - IS "M2/M30 active" is applied statically at the end of a program. - Not suitable for automatic follow-on functions such as workpiece counting, bar feed, etc. M2 must be programmed in a separate block and the word M2 or the decoded M signal used for these functions. - No auxiliary functions leading to read-in stop may be written in the last block of a program. Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0001.6 Transformation active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 Edge change 1--->0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from NCK channel (NCK->PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0 The NC command TRANSMIT or TRACYL is programmed in the part program. The corresponding block has been processed by the NC and a transformation is now active. No transformation is active. 802D sl Description of Functions: M1 V3300 0001.7 Program test active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Program control "Program test" is active. Axis disable is set internally for all axes (not spindles). Therefore the machine axes do not move when a part program block or a part program is being processed. The axis movements are simulated on the operator interface with changing axis position values. The axis position values for the display are generated from the calculated setpoints. The part program is processed in the normal way. Program control Program test is not active. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: IS "Activate program test" IS "Program test selected" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0003.0 Program status running Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The part program has been started with IS "NC start" and is running. 4-382 - Program stopped by M00/M01 or NC Stop or mode change. - The block is executed in single-block mode. - End of program reached (M2) - Program abort by Reset - Current block cannot be processed (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals Special cases, errors, The IS "Program status running" does not change to 0 if workpiece machining is ... ... stopped by the following events: Note for the reader: - Output of feed disable or spindle disable - IS "Read-in disable" - Feed override to 0% - Response of the spindle and axis monitoring 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0003.2 Program status stopped Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The NC part program has been stopped by "NC stop", "NC stop axes plus spindles", "NC stop at block limit", programmed M0 or M1 or single block mode. Program status "stopped" is not active. Note for the reader: IS "NC Stop" IS "NC Stop axes plus spindles" IS "NC Stop at block limit" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0003.3 Program status interrupted Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: When changing from AUTOMATIC or MDA mode (when program has stopped) after JOG the program status switches to "interrupted". The program can be continued at the point of interruption in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode when "NC start" is operated. Program status interrupted is not active. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Special cases, errors, ... ... Note for the reader: IS "Program status interrupted" signifies that the part program can be continued after an NC start. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0003.4 Program status aborted Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The program has been selected but not started or the current program was aborted with Reset. Program status interrupted is not active. IS "Reset" 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-383 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals V3300 0003.5 Channel status active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic In this channel Signal(s) valid from SW: * a part program or block is currently being processed in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode or * at least one axis is being traversed in JOG mode. "Channel status interrupted" or "Channel status Reset" is active. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0003.6 Channel status interrupted Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The NC part program in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode can be stopped by "NC stop", "NC stop axes plus spindles", "NC stop at block limit", programmed M0 or M1 or single block mode. With NC start the part program or the interrupted traversing movement can be continued. "Channel status active" or "Channel status Reset" is active. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0003.7 Channel status rese Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The signal changes to 1 as soon as the channel goes into Reset status, i.e. no processing taking place. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 V3300 0004.2 All axes referenced Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal(s) from channel (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 All axes referenced. (Note for axes requiring referencing: MD 34110: REFP_CYCLE_NR, MD 20700: REFP_NC_START_LOCK ) One or more axes on the channel have not been referenced. 4-384 The signal changes to 0 if processing is taking place in the channel, e.g. execution of a part program or block search (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals Special cases, errors, ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: The spindles of the channel have no effect on this interface signal. "Referenced/synchronizing 1" interface signal (V390x 0000.4) 802D sl Description of Functions: R1 V3300 0004.3 All axes stationary Data block Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: All axes assigned to the channel are stationary with interpolator end. No other traversing movements are active. 802D sl Description of Functions: B1 V3300 0006.0 Stroke initiation active Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Signal status 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or Signal(s) valid from SW release: 3 This signal indicates an active stroke initiation. 1-signal: The stroke initiation is active. 0-signal: The stroke initiation is not active. signal transition 1 ---> 0 V3300 0006.1 Acknowledgment of manual stroke initiation Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Signal status 1 or Signal(s) valid from SW release: 3 This signal indicates whether a manual stroke was initiated. signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or 1-signal: A manual stroke was initiated. 0-signal: No manual stroke was initiated. signal transition 1 ---> 0 V3300 0008 V3300 0009 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal status 1 or edge transition --> 0 --->1 Signal status 0 or edge transition --> 1 ---> 0 Machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) preactivated Signal(s) from the channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclically The machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) is preactivated in the current block. (The preactivation was performed in the part program.) Thus, the protection zone can be activated or deactivated in the PLC user program using the interface signal DB21, ... DBX8.0 - DBX9.1 ("Activate machinerelated protection zone 1 (...10)"). The machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) is deactivated in the current block. (The deactivation was performed in the part program.) Thus, the protection zone can be deactivated or set inactive in the PLC user program using the interface signal DB21, ... DBX8.0 - DBX9.1 ("Activate machinerelated protection zone 1 (...10)"). (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-385 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals Related to .... DB21, ... DBX8.0 - DBX9.1 ("Activate machine-related protection zone 1 (...10)"). V3300 0010 V3300 0011 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal status 1 or edge transition --> 0 --> 1 Channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) preactivated V3300 0012 V3300 0013 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal status 1 or edge transition --> 0 --> 1 Machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) violated V3300 0014 V3300 0015 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal status 1 or edge transition --> 0 --> 1 Signal status 0 or edge transition --> 1 --> 0 Application example(s) Channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) violated Signal(s) from the channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclically The channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) is preactivated in the current block. (The preactivation was performed in the part program.) Thus, the protection zone can be activated or deactivated in the PLC user program using the interface signal DB21, ... DBX10.0 - DBX11.1 ("Activate channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10)"). Signal status 0 or The channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) is deactivated in the current block. edge transition --> 1 -- (The deactivation was performed in the part program.) Thus, the protection zone -> 0 can be deactivated or set inactive in the PLC user program using the interface signal DB21, ... DBX10.0 - DBX11.1 ("Activate channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10)"). Related to ... DB21, ... DBX10.0 - DBX11.1 ("Activate channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10)"). with .... Signal(s) from the channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclically The activated, machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) is violated in the current block or in the current JOG motion. The preactivated, machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) would be violated in the current block if it would be set active by the PLC. Signal status 0 or The activated, machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) is not violated in the edge transition --> 1 -- current block. The preactivated, machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) would -> 0 not be violated in the current block if it would be set active by the PLC. Application This interface signal (IS) can be used to check before swinging parts into the example(s) work space whether the tool or the workpiece is in the machine-related protection zone of the part to be swung in. 4-386 Signal(s) from the channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclically The activated, channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) is violated in the current block. The preactivated, channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) would be violated in the current block if it would be set active by the PLC. The activated, channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) is not violated in the current block. The preactivated, channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) would not be violated in the current block if it would be set active by the PLC. This interface signal (IS) can be used to check before swinging parts into the work space whether the tool or the workpiece is in the channel-specific protection zone of the part to be swung in. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Channel-specific signals V3300 1000.0 to .1 V3300 1004.0 to .1 V3300 1008.0 to .1 Handwheel active (1 to 2) for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: These PLC interface signals report whether this geometry axis is assigned to handwheel 1, 2 or 3 or to no handwheel. Only one handwheel can be assigned to an axis at any one time. If several "Activate handwheel" interface signals are set, priority "Handwheel 1" before "Handwheel 2" before "Handwheel 3" applies. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: If the assignment is active, the geometry axis can be traversed with the handwheel in JOG mode. Neither handwheel 1, 2 nor 3 is assigned to this geometry axis. IS "Activate handwheel" (V3200 1000.0 to .2, V3200 1004.0 to .2, V3200 1008.0 to .2) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 V3300 1000.7 and .6 V3300 1004.7 and .6 V3300 1008.7 and .6 Travel command plus and minus for geometry axis for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: A traverse movement of the axis is to be executed in one or the other direction. Depending on the mode selected, the command is triggered in different ways: * JOG mode: with the plus or minus traverse key * REF submode: with the traverse key that takes the axis to the reference point Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 * AUTO/MDA mode: the program block containing a coordinate value for the axis in question is executed. A travel command in the relevant axis direction has not been given or a traverse movement has been completed. JOG mode: * Cancelation of traverse key * While ending traversing with the handwheel. REF submode: * When the reference point is reached AUTO/MDA mode: * The program block has been executed (and the next block does not contain any coordinate values for the axis in question) * Abort with "RESET", etc. Application example(s) * IS "Axis disable" is active To release clamping of axes with clamping Note: If the clamping is not released until the travel command is given, these axes cannot be operated under continuous path control! (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-387 Interface Signals 06/2007 Channel-specific signals Related to .... Note for the reader: IS "Traverse key plus" and " ... minus" for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1000.7 and .6) for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1004.7 and .6) for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1008.7 and .6) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 Active machine function INC1, ..., continuous V3300 1001.0, ..., .6 V3300 1005.0, ..., .6 V3300 1009.0, ..., .6 for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The PLC interface receives a signal stating which JOG mode machine function is active for the geometry axes. The machine function in question is not active. IS "Machine function INC1, ..., continuous" Note for the reader: for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1001.0 ... .6) for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1005.0 ... .6) for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1009.0 ... .6) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 V3300 4001.1 Workpiece setpoint reached Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The required number of workpieces is reached. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: 4-388 According to setting in MD 27880: PART_COUNTER: Bit 1 = 0: when $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS equal to $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS Bit 1 = 1: when $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS equal to $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS The required number of workpieces is not reached. 802D sl Description of Functions: K1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals 4.7 Axis-/spindle-specific signals 6LJQDOVWRD[LV 9[ [ !D[LV [ !D[LV $[LV 6LJQDOVIURPD[LV 9[ [ !D[LV [ !D[LV $[LV $[LV &ODPSLQJLQSURJUHVV 9[ +DUGZDUHOLPLWVZLWFKSOXV 9[ +DUGZDUHOLPLWVZLWFKPLQXV 9[ $[LV PRQLWRULQJ IXQFWLRQV *HEHUJUHQ]IUHTXHQ] 3/4EHUVFKULWWHQ 9[ QGVRIWZDUHOLPLWVZLWFKSOXV 9[ QGVRIWZDUHOLPLWVZLWFKPLQXV 9[ PLC interface signals for axis monitoring functions 4.7.1 Transferred axis-specific M and S functions VD370x 0000 M function for spindle Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signals from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC), axis-specific Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Generally the M functions are output in V2500... channel-specific. In the V25001... range these only remain valid for one PLC cycle; in V25003... until a new function is output. In this IS "M function for spindle" selected spindle M functions are available to the PLC as a current integer value. * M3 > value: 3 * M4 > value: 4 Note for the reader: * M5 > value: 5 specific IS auxiliary function transfer from NC channel (V2500...) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 VD370x 0004 S function for spindle Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signals from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC), axis-specific Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Related to .... (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-389 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals Generally the S function is transferred to the PLC channel-specific in VD2500 4000 as a floating point value. In this IS iS function for spindlei the floating point value is output to the PLC on an axis-specific basis: * S.... as the spindle speed in rpm (programmed value) * S.... as the constant cutting speed in m/min or ft/min for G96 The following S functions are not output here: * S.... as the programmed Spindle speed limiting G25 * S.... as the programmed Spindle speed limiting G26 Related to .... Note for the reader: 4.7.2 * S.... as the dwell time in spindle revolutions specific 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 Signals to axis/spindle VB380x 0000 Feedrate override (axis-specific) Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) to axis (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic 4-390 Signal(s) valid from SW: (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 The axis-specific feedrate override is defined via the PLC in gray coding. Gray coding for axis-specific feedrate override Switch Code position Related to .... Note for the reader: 1 00001 2 00011 3 00010 4 00110 5 00111 6 00101 7 00100 8 01100 9 01101 10 01111 11 01110 12 01010 13 01011 14 01001 15 01000 16 11000 17 11001 18 11011 19 11010 20 11110 21 11111 22 11101 23 11100 24 10100 25 10101 26 10111 27 10110 28 10010 29 10011 30 10001 31 10000 IS "Override active" (V380x 0001.7) 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 Axial feedrate over ride factor 0.0 0.01 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 V380x 0001.1 Acknowledge fixed stop reached Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0 Meaning after the fixed stop has been reached IS "Fixed stop reached" = 1 The axis pushes against the fixed stop with the clamping torque The fixed stop monitoring window is activated A block change is performed. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-391 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals Signal state 0 Meaning after the fixed stop has been reached IS "Fixed stop reached" = 1 The axis pushes against the fixed stop with the clamping torque The fixed stop monitoring window is activated No block change is performed and channel alarm "Wait: Auxiliary function acknowledgment missing" is displayed. Edge change 1--->0 Meaning once the fixed stop has been reached: IS "Fixed stop reached" = 1 The function is aborted, the alarm "20094 axis %1 Function aborted" is displayed. Note for the reader: Meaning when function is deselected "FXS = 0" via part program: Torque limiting and monitoring of the fixed stop window are canceled. MD 37060: FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring of PLC acknowledgments for travel to fixed stop) = 0 or 1 (for values >1, however) MD 37060: FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring of PLC acknowledgments for travel to fixed stop) IS "Fixed stop reached" 802D sl Description of Functions: F1 V380x 0001.2 Sensor for fixed stop Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Fixed stop is reached. The signal is effective only if MD 37040: FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR is set to 1. 802D sl Description of Functions: F1 V380x 0001.7 Override active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Feedrate override active (for axes): IS irrelevant for .... Related to .... Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0 Fixed stop is not reached. Signal(s) valid from SW: * The axis-specific feedrate override between 0 and a maximum of 120% entered in the PLC interface is used. Spindle override active (for spindle): Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 * The spindle override of 50 to a maximum of 120% is used. The existing axis-specific feedrate override or spindle override is not active. If the feedrate override is inactive, 100% is used as the internal override factor. Note: coded interface for the value represents a special case. In this case, the override factor of the 1st switch position is also used with "Override inactive" and 0% is issued as the override value for axes (acts the same as "Feed disable"); accordingly 50%, is issued for the spindle. 4-392 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals Special cases, errors, ... ... * The spindle override is always accepted with 100% in the spindle "Oscillation mode". * The spindle override acts on the programmed values before the limits (e.g. G26) intervene. Related to .... Note for the reader: * The feedrate override is inactive if G33 is active. IS "Feedrate override" and IS "Spindle override" 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 V380x 0002.0 Cam activation Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC --> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal status 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1 The output of the minus and plus cam signals of an axis to the general PLC interface is activated. The activation comes immediately into effect after processing of the IS "Cam activation" in the NCK. The minus and plus cam signals of an axis are not output to the general PLC interface. IS "Minus cam signal 1-32" (V2700 0004.0 bis .7) IS "Plus cam signal 1-32" (V2700 0008.0 to .7) V380x 0002.2 Spindle reset/Delete distance-to-go Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Edge change 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Independent of MD 35040: SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET, spindle reset has the following effects for the different spindle modes: Open-loop control mode: - Spindle stops - Program continues running - Spindle continues to run with subsequent M and S programcommands Oscillation mode: - Oscillation is aborted - Axes continue to run - Program is continued with current gear stage - With a subsequent M value and a higher S value, IS "Setpoint speed limited" (V390x 2001.1) is set if necessary. Positioning mode: Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... - is stopped No effect MD 35040: SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (own spindle reset) IS "Reset" (V300 00000.7) IS "Delete distance-to-go" (V380x 0002.2) is another name for the same signal; however, it applies to each axis. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-393 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V380x 0002.3 Clamping in progress Data block Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: Clamping in progress The clamping monitoring function is activated. MD 36050: CLAMP_POS_TOL (clamping tolerance) 802D sl Description of Functions: A3 V380x 0003.1 Enable travel to fixed stop Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0 Meaning when "FXS" function is selected via part program, (IS "Activate travel to fixed stop" = 1): Signal state 0 Edge change 1--->0 IS irrelevant for .... Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-394 speed monitoring function takes over from the clamping monitoring function. Travel to fixed stop is enabled and the axis traverses from the start position at the programmed velocity to the programmed target position. Meaning when "FXS" function is selected via part program, (IS "Activate travel to fixed stop" = 1): Travel to fixed stop is disabled. The axis is at the start position with reduced torque. Channel alarm "Wait: Auxiliary function acknowledgment missing" is displayed. Meaning before the fixed stop has been reached IS "Fixed stop reached" = 0 Travel to fixed stop is aborted Alarm "20094: axis%1 Function aborted" is displayed Meaning once fixed stop has been reached IS "Fixed stop reached" = 1. Torque limiting and the monitoring of the fixed stop monitoring window are canceled. MD 37060: FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring of PLC acknowledgments for travel to fixed stop) = 0 or 2 MD 37060: FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring of PLC acknowledgments for travel to fixed stop) IS "Activate travel to fixed stop" 802D sl Description of Functions: F1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V380x 0003.6 Velocity/spindle speed limitation Data block Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Signal(s) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The NCK limits the velocity/spindle speed to the limit value set in MD 35160: SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT. No limiting active. Note for the reader: MD 35100: SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (max. spindle speed) SD 43220: SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 (prog. spindle speed limiting G26) SD 43230: SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (prog. spindle speed limiting G96) 802D sl Description of Functions: A3 V380x 0004.0 to .2 Activate handwheel (1 to 3) Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: This PLC interface signal defines whether this machine axis is assigned to handwheel 1, 2, 3 or no handwheel. Only one handwheel can be assigned to an axis at any one time. If several "Activate handwheel" interface signals are set, priority "Handwheel 1" before "Handwheel 2" before "Handwheel 3" applies. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) Related to .... Note for the reader: If the assignment is active, the machine axis can be traversed with the handwheel in JOG mode. Neither handwheel 1, 2 nor 3 is assigned to this geometry axis. The PLC user program can use this interface signal to disable the influence of turning the handwheel on the axis. IS "Handwheel active" 1 to 3 (V390x 0004.0 to .2) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-395 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals V380x 0004.3 Feed stop/Spindle stop (axis-specific) Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic The signal is active in all modes. Signal(s) valid from SW: Feed stop: * The signal triggers a feed stop for the axis. Traversing axes are brought to a standstill under controlled braking (ramp stop). No alarm is output. * The signal triggers a feed stop for all path axes interpolating relative to each other when the "Feed stop" is activated for any one of these axes. In this case, all the axes are brought to a stop with adherence to the path contour. When the feed stop signal is canceled, execution of the interrupted part program is resumed. * The position control is retained, i.e. the following error is eliminated. * If a travel request is issued for an axis with an active "Feed stop", the request is retained. This pending travel request is executed immediately when "Feed stop" is canceled. If the axis is interpolating in relation to others, this also applies to these axes. Spindle stop: * The spindle is brought to a standstill along the acceleration characteristic. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 * In positioning mode, activation of the "Spindle stop" signal interrupts the positioning process. The above response applies with respect to individual axes. Feed stop: * The feedrate is enabled for the axis. * If a travel request ("Travel command") is active when the "Feed stop" is canceled, this is executed immediately. Spindle stop: * The speed is enabled for the spindle. Application example(s) * The spindle is accelerated to the previous speed setpoint with the acceleration characteristic or, in positioning mode, positioning is resumed. Feed stop: * The traversing motion in the machine axes is not started when "Feed stop" is active, if, for example, certain operating states that do not permit axis motion (e.g. door not closed) prevail. Spindle stop: * Change a tool Special cases, errors, ... ... Note for the reader: 4-396 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V380x 0004.4 Traverse key disable Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The traverse keys plus and minus have no effect on the machine axes in question. It is thus not possible to traverse the machine axis in JOG with the traverse keys on the machine control panel. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) If the traverse key disable is activated during a traverse movement, the machine axis is stopped. Traverse keys plus and minus are enabled. Related to .... Note for the reader: It is thus possible, depending on the operating mode, to disable manual traverse of the machine axis in JOG mode with the traverse keys from the PLC user program. IS "Traverse key plus" and "Traverse key minus" (V380x 0004.7 and .6) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 V380x 0004.5 Rapid traverse override Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: If interface signal "Rapid traverse override" is set together with "Traverse key plus"and "Traverse key minus", the machine axis in question traverses at rapid traverse. The rapid traverse velocity is defined in MD 32010: JOG_VELO_RAPID. Rapid traverse override is active in the following JOG modes: * Continuous jogging * Incremental jogging Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... If rapid traverse override is active, the velocity can be modified with the axisspecific feedrate override switch. The machine axis traverses at the defined JOG velocity (SD 41110: JOG_SET_VELO or SD 41130, or MD 32020: JOG_VELO). * Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDA Related to .... * Reference point approach (JOG mode) IS "Traverse key plus" and "Traverse key minus" (V380x 0004.7 and .6) Note for the reader: specific "Feedrate override" (VB380x 0000) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-397 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals V380x 0004.7 and .6 Plus and minus traverse keys Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The selected axis can be traversed in both directions in JOG mode with the traverse keys plus and minus. Incremental traversing With signal 1 the axis starts to traverse at the set increment. If the signal changes to the 0 state before the increment is traversed, the traversing movement is interrupted. When signal state 1 occurs again, the traverse motion is restarted. The traversing motion of the axis can be stopped and restarted multiple times as described above until the increment has been fully traversed. Continuous traversing If no INC measure is selected but "continuous" is, the axis travels for as long as the traverse key is actuated. If both traverse signals (plus and minus) are set at the same time there is no movement or a current movement is aborted. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Application example(s) Special cases, ...... Related to .... The effect of the traverse keys can be disabled for every axis individually with the PLC interface signal "Traverse key disable". No traverse Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDA specific PLC interface (as a geometry axis). Alarm 20062 is signaled. Indexing axes IS "Traverse key plus" and " ... minus" for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1000.7 and .6) for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1004.7 and .6) for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1008.7 and .6) Note for the reader: 4-398 IS "Traverse key disable" (V380x 0004.4 ) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V380x 0005.0 to .6 Machine functions INC1, INC10, INC100, INC1000, INC10000, INCvar, continuous Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: This input range is only used if IS "INC inputs in mode group range active" (V2600 0001.0) is not set. The interface signals "INC..." define how many increments the machine axis traverses when the traverse key is pressed or the handwheel is turned one detent position. JOG must be active. With "INCvar" the value in the general SD 41010: JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE applies. In "continuous" mode the associated axis can be traversed with the plus or minus traversing key according to how the traverse key is pressed. As soon as the selected machine function becomes active, this is signaled to the PLC interface (IS "Active machine function INC1..."). If several machine function signals (INC1, INC... or "Continuous jogging") are selected at the interface simultaneously, no machine function is activated by the control. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note: The input IS "INC..." or "continuous" for changing an active machine function must be active for at least one PLC cycle. A static application is not required. The machine function in question is not selected. No change to the active machine function is requested. Note for the reader: If an axis is currently traversing an increment, this movement is also aborted if this machine function is deselected or changed over. IS "Active machine function INC1, ..." (V390x 0005.0 ... .6) IS "INC inputs in the mode group area active" (V2600 0001.0) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 V380x 1000.1 and .0 Hardware limit switches plus and minus Data block Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC ---> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: A switch can be mounted at each end of the travel range of a machine axis which will cause a signal "Hardware limit switch plus or minus" to be signaled to the NC via the PLC if it is approached. If the signal is recognized as set, alarm 021614 "Hardware limit switch + or -" is output and the axis is decelerated immediately. The braking mode is defined in MD 36600: BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE (deceleration behavior on hardware limit switch). Normal condition, hardware limit switch not triggered. Related to .... Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: MD 36600: BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE (deceleration behavior on hardware limit switch) 802D sl Description of Functions: A3 V380x1000.3 or .2 2nd software limit switch plus or minus Data block Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC ---> NCK) (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-399 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2nd software limit switch for the plus or minus direction is active. 1st software limit switch for the plus or minus direction is not active. The 2nd software limit switches (plus and minus) can be activated in addition to the 1st software limit switches (plus and minus) via this interface signal. The position is defined by MD 36130: POS_LIMIT_PLUS2, MD 36120: POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 (2nd software limit switch plus, 2nd software limit switch minus). 1st software limit switch for the plus or minus direction is active. 2nd software limit switch for the plus or minus direction is not active. Note for the reader: MD 36110: POS_LIMIT_PLUS, MD 36130: POS_LIMIT_PLUS2, MD 36100: POS_LIMIT_MINUS, MD 36120: POS_LIMIT_MINUS2, (software limit switch plus, software limit switch minus) 802D sl Description of Functions: A3 V380x1000.7 Reference point approach delay Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The machine axis is positioned at the reference cam. 4-400 The machine axis is positioned in front of the reference cam. A reference cam of appropriate length (to the end of the traversing range) has been used to prevent the machine axis from being positioned behind the referencing cam. 802D sl Description of Functions: R1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V380x 2000.0 to .2 Actual gear stage A to C Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 (leveloperated) Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: When the new gear is engaged, the IS "Actual gear stage A to C" and "Gear changed" are enabled by the PLC user. This informs the NCK that the correct gear stage has been successfully engaged. The gear change is complete (spindle oscillation mode is deselected), the spindle accelerates in the new gear stage to the last programmed spindle speed and the next block in the part program can be executed. The actual gear stage is specified in coded format (ABC values). A parameter set is used for each of the 5 gear stages and is assigned as follows: Parameter set no. 0 1 VDI code CBA 000 001 2 3 4 5 Data in data set contents Data for axis mode Servo gain factor Monitoring functions Data for 1st gear stage M40 speed Min/max speed Acceleration Data for 2nd gear stage etc. Data for 3rd gear stage Data for 4th gear stage Data for 5th gear stage Note for the reader: 010 011 100 101 110 111 If the PLC user reports back to the NCK with a different actual gear stage than issued by the NCK as the set gear stage, the gear change is still treated as having been successfully completed and the actual gear stage A to C is activated. IS "Set gear stage A" to "...C" (V390x 2000.0 to .2) IS "Change gear" (V390x 2000.3) IS "Gear changed" (V380x 2000.3) IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) Parameter sets (MD) for gear stages. 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V380x 2000.3 Gear changed Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: When the new gear is engaged, the IS "Actual gear stage A to C" and "Gear changed" are enabled by the PLC user. This informs the NCK that the correct gear stage has been successfully engaged. The gear stage change is complete (spindle oscillation mode is deselected), the spindle accelerates in the new gear stage to the last programmed spindle speed and the next block in the part program can be executed. The IS "Change gear" is reset by the NCK, which causes the PLC user to reset the IS "Gear changed". No effect Special cases, errors, ... ... Related to .... Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... All spindle modes except oscillation mode (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-401 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals Special cases, errors, ... ... Note for the reader: If the PLC user reports back to the NCK with a different actual gear stage than issued by the NCK as the set gear stage, the gear change is still treated as having been successfully completed and the actual gear stage A to C is activated. IS "Actual gear stage A" to C" (V380x 2000.0 to .2) IS "Set gear stage A" to "...C" (V390x 2000.0 to .2) IS "Change gear" (V390x 2000.3) IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V380x 2001.0 Feedrate override for spindle valid (instead of spindle override) Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Signal(s) from axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The "Feedrate override" value (VB380x 0000) is used for the spindle instead of the "Spindle override" value. Related to .... The "Spindle override" value is used. Note for the reader: IS Spindle override" (VB380x 2003) IS Feedrate override" (V380x 0000) IS Override active" (V380x 0001.7) 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 V380x 2001.4 Resynchronize spindle during positioning 1 Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Application example(s) Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The spindle must be resynchronized during positioning. No effect Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-402 All spindle modes except for positioning mode The spindle has an indirect measuring system and slipping may occur between the motor and the clamp. If the signal=1 when the positioning process is started, the old reference is deleted and the zero mark searched for again before the end position is approached. "Referenced/synchronizing 1" interface signal (V390x 0000.4) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V380x 2001.6 Invert M3/M4 Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The direction of rotation of the spindle motor changes with the following functions: * M3 * M4 * M5 Note for the reader: * SPOS from movement; not active for SPOS from standstill. The machine has a selector switch for a vertical and horizontal spindle. The mechanical design incorporates one gear wheel more on the horizontal spindle than on the vertical spindle. The direction of rotation must therefore be changed on the vertical spindle if the spindle is always to rotate clockwise with M3. 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V380x 2002.4 Oscillation via PLC Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: If the IS "Oscillation via PLC" is enabled, the IS "Oscillation speed" effects output of a speed only in conjunction with the IS "Direction of rotation setpoint counterclockwise and clockwise". The oscillation, i.e. the continuous change of the direction of rotation, is performed by the PLC user with the IS "Direction of rotation setpoint counter-clockwise and clockwise" (oscillation via PLC). If the IS "Oscillation via PLC" is not enabled, the IS "Oscillation speed" triggers automatic oscillation on the NCK. The two times for the directions of rotation are entered in MD 35440: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (oscillation time for M3 direction) SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (oscillation time for M3 direction) and MD 35450: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW (oscillation time for M4 direction). If the new gear stage cannot be engaged in spite of several attempts by the NCK, the system can be switched to oscillation via PLC. Both of the times can then be altered by the PLC user. This assures a reliable change of the gear stage, even with unfavorable gear wheel positions. MD 35440: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (oscillation time for direction M3) MD 35450: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW (oscillation time for M4 direction) IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) IS "Set direction of rotation counterclockwise" (V380x 2002.7) IS "Set direction of rotation clockwise" (V380x 2002.6) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 Application example(s) Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) Related to .... Note for the reader: (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-403 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals V380x 2002.5 Oscillation speed Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 If the gear stage must be changed (IS "Change gear" (V390x 2000.3) is enabled), the spindle changes to oscillation mode. The spindle decelerates to a standstill with different acceleration levels, according to the point when the IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) was enabled: 1. The IS "Oscillation speed" is enabled before the IS "Change gear" is enabled by the NCK. The spindle is brought to a standstill with the acceleration during oscillation (MD: SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL). Once the spindle is stationary, oscillation is immediately initiated. 2. The IS "Oscillation speed" is enabled after the IS "Change gear" is enabled by the NCK and when the spindle is stationary. The position controller is disabled. The spindle decelerates with the deceleration rate in speed controlled mode. After the IS "Oscillation speed"is set, the spindle starts to oscillate with the oscillation acceleration (MD:SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL). If the IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4) is not enabled, the IS "Oscillation speed" triggers automatic oscillation on the NCK. The two times for the directions of rotation are entered in MD: in SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (oscillation time for M3 direction) and SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW (oscillation time for M4 direction). Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Application example(s) Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-404 If the IS "Oscillation via PLC" is enabled, the IS "Oscillation speed" effects output of a speed only in conjunction with the IS "Direction of rotation setpoint counterclockwise and clockwise". The oscillation, i.e. the continuous change of the direction of rotation, is performed by the PLC user with the IS "Direction of rotation setpoint counter-clockwise and clockwise" (oscillation via PLC). The spindle does not oscillate. All spindle modes except oscillation mode The oscillation speed is used to facilitate the engagement of a new gear stage. IS "Oscillation via the PLC" (V380x 2002.4) IS "Set direction of rotation counterclockwise" (V380x 2002.7) IS "Set direction of rotation clockwise" (V380x 2002.6) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V380x 2002.7 / .6 Setpoint direction of rotation, counter-clockwise/setpoint direction of rotation, clockwise Interface signal Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 When the IS "Oscillation via PLC" is enabled, the two IS "Direction of rotation setpoint counterclockwise" and "Direction of rotation setpoint clockwise" can be used to set the direction of rotation for the oscillation speed. The times for the oscillation movement of the spindle motor are defined by enabling the IS "Direction of rotation setpoint counterclockwise and clockwise" for a corresponding length of time. All spindle modes except oscillation mode Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Application example(s) Special cases, errors, ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: See IS "Oscillation via PLC" * If both of the IS are enabled simultaneously, no oscillation speed is output. * If no IS are set, then an oscillation speed is not output. IS "Oscillation via the PLC" (V380x 2002.4) IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-405 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals VB380x 2003 Spindle override Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) to spindle (PLC NCK) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The spindle override is defined via the PLC in gray coding. The override value determines the percentage of the programmed speed setpoint that is issued to the spindle. Gray coding for spindle override SchalterCode einstellung Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-406 Spindelkorrekturfaktor 1 00001 0.5 2 00011 0.55 3 00010 0.60 4 00110 0.65 5 00111 0.70 6 00101 0.75 7 00100 0.80 8 01100 0.85 9 01101 0.90 10 01111 0.95 11 01110 1.00 12 01010 1.05 13 01011 1.10 14 01001 1.10 15 01000 1.15 16 11000 1.20 17 11001 1.20 18 11011 1.20 19 11010 1.20 20 11110 1.20 21 11111 1.20 22 11101 1.20 23 11100 1.20 24 10100 1.20 25 10101 1.20 26 10111 1.20 27 10110 1.20 28 10010 1.20 29 10011 1.20 30 10001 1.20 31 10000 1.20 IS "Override active" (V380x 0001.7) IS "Feedrate override for spindle valid" (V380x 2001.0) 802D sl Description of Functions: V1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals 4.7.3 Signals from axis/spindle V390x 0000.0 Spindle/no axis Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The machine axis is operated as a spindle in the following spindle modes: * Control mode * Oscillation mode * Positioning mode * Thread drilling (tapping) without compensating chuck (rigid tapping) The IS to axis (V380x 1000 to V380x 1003) and from axis (V390x 1000 to V390x 1003) are invalid. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 The IS to spindle (V380x 2000 to V380x 2003) and from spindle (V380x 2000 to V380x 2003) are valid. The machine axis is operated as an axis The IS to axis (V380x 1000 to V380x 1003) and from axis (V390x 1000 to V390x 1003) are valid. Note for the reader: The IS to spindle (V380x 2000 to V380x 2003) and from spindle (V380x 2000 to V380x 2003) are invalid. If a spindle is sometimes also used as a rotary axis on a machine tool (turning machine with spindle/C axis or milling machine with spindle/rotary axis for rigid tapping), the "Spindle/no axis" signal can be used to determine whether the machine axis is in axis mode or spindle mode. 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V390x 0000.2 Encoder limit frequency exceeded 1 Data block Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The axis velocity defined in MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT (encoder limit frequency) has been exceeded. The reference point for the position measuring system concerned has been lost (IS: Referenced/synchronized is in signal state 0). Proper position closed loop control is no longer possible. The spindles continue to run with speed control. The axes are brought to a standstill with rapid stop (with open position control loop) along a speed setpoint ramp. The axis velocity defined in MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT is no longer exceeded. For the edge change 1 -->, the encoder frequency must have dropped below the setting in MD 36302: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW (% value of MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT). 802D sl Description of Functions: A3 Application examples Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-407 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x 0000.4 Referenced/synchronizing 1 Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Axes: Signal(s) valid from SW: When, during a reference point approach, the machine axis has reached the reference point (incremental measurement systems) or target point (linear measuring system with distance-coded reference marks), the machine axis is deemed to have been referenced and the "referenced/synchronizing 1" interface signal (depending on which position measurement system is active during referencing) is enabled. Spindles: A spindle is synchronized (zero mark crossed or BERO responded) after Power On after one spindle revolution at the latest. The machine axis/spindle with position measurement system 1 is not referenced/synchronizing. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: "Position measuring system 1" interface signal (V380x 0000.5) 802D sl Description of Functions: R1, S1 V390x 0000.6 Position reached with exact stop coarse Data block Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The axis is in the appropriate exact stop and no interpolator is active for the axis and * The control system is in the Reset mode (Reset key or end of program). * The axis was last programmed as a positioning spindle. * The path movement was stopped with NC Stop. * The spindle is in position-controlled mode and is stationary. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 * The axis is switched from speed-controlled to position-controlled mode with IS "Position measuring system". The axis is not in the appropriate exact stop or the interpolator is active for the axis or * The path movement was stopped with NC Stop. * The spindle is in the speed-controlled mode. * "Parking mode" is active for the axis. * The axis is switched from the position-controlled to the speed-controlled mode with using the IS "Position measuring system". Signal irrelevant for ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-408 MD 36000: STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (exact stop coarse) 802D sl Description of Functions: B1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x 0000.7 Position reached with exact stop fine Data block Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: See IS "Position reached with exact stop coarse" V390x 0002.3 Measurement active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic The "Measuring" function is active. See IS "Position reached with exact stop coarse" MD 36010: STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine) 802D sl Description of Functions: B1 Signal(s) valid from SW: This displays the current measurement status of the axis (measuring block with this axis is running). The "Measuring" function is not active. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5 V390x 0002.4 Activate travel to fixed end stop Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK ! PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic The "Travel to fixed stop function" is active. V390x 0002.5 Fixed stop reached Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK ! PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0 The fixed stop was reached after selection of the "FXS" function. Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0 The "Travel to fixed stop function" is not active. 802D sl Description of Functions: F1 The fixed stop has still not been reached after selection of the "FXS" function. 802D sl Description of Functions: F1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-409 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x 0004.0 to .2 Handwheel active (1 to 3) Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 These PLC interface signals provide feedback whether the machine axis is assigned to handwheel 1, 2, 3 or no handwheel. Only one handwheel can be assigned to an axis at any one time. If several "Activate handwheel" interface signals are set, priority "Handwheel 1" before "Handwheel 2" before "Handwheel 3" applies. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... If the assignment is active, the machine axis can be traversed with the handwheel in JOG mode. Neither handwheel 1, 2 nor 3 is assigned to this geometry axis. IS "Activate handwheel" (V380x 0004.0 to .2) Note for the reader: IS "Handwheel selected" from HMI (V1900 0003, ff) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 V390x 0004.7 and .6 Plus and minus traverse keys Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: A traverse movement of the axis is to be executed in one or the other direction. Depending on the mode selected, the command is triggered in different ways: * JOG mode: with the plus or minus traverse key * REF submode: with the traverse key that takes the axis to the reference point Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 * AUT/MDA mode: the program block containing a coordinate value for the axis in question is executed. A travel command in the relevant axis direction has not been given or a traverse movement has been completed. JOG mode: * Cancelation of traverse key. * While ending traversing with the handwheel. * REF submode: When the reference point is reached AUT/MDA mode: * The program block has been executed (and the next block does not contain any coordinate values for the axis in question) * Abort with "RESET", etc. Application example(s) Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-410 * IS "Axis disable" is active To release clamping of axes with clamping (e.g. on a rotary table). Note: If the clamping is not released until the travel command is given, these axes cannot be operated under continuous path control! IS "Traverse key plus" and "Traverse key minus" (V380x 0004.7 and .6) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x 0005.0, ..., .6 Active machine function INC1, ..., continuous Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1 The PLC interface receives a signal stating which JOG mode machine function is active for the machine axes. V390x 2000.0 to .2 Set gear stage A to C Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic A gear stage can be defined as follows: The machine function in question is not active. IS "Machine function INC1,...,continuous" (V380x 0005.0, ..., .6) 802D sl Description of Functions: H1 Signal(s) valid from SW: * Permanent definition in the part program (M41 to M45) * Automatic definition by the programmed spindle speed (M40) M41 to M45: * The gear stage can be permanently defined in the part program with M41 to M45. If the M41 to M45 commands select a gear stage which is not the same as the current (actual) gear stage, the IS "Change gear" and the IS "Set gear stage A to C" are enabled. M40: * M40 in the part program causes the gear stage to be selected automatically by the control. The control checks which gear stage is possible for the programmed spindle speed (S function). If a gear stage is identified that is not equal to the current (actual) gear stage, the "Change gear" and "Set gear stage A" to "...C" interface signals are set. The set gear stage is output in coded format: Signal irrelevant for ... ... Related to .... Note for the reader: 1st gear stage 0 0 0 (C B A) 1st gear stage 001 2nd gear stage 010 3rd gear stage 011 4th gear stage 100 5th gear stage 101 Invalid value 110 Invalid value 111 Other spindle modes except oscillation mode IS "Change gear" (V390x 2000.3) IS "Actual gear stage A" to "...C" (V380x 2000.0 to .2) IS "Gear changed" (V380x 2000.3) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-411 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x 2000.3 Change gear stage Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic A gear stage can be defined as follows: Signal(s) valid from SW: * Permanent definition in the part program (M41 to M45) * Automatic definition by the programmed spindle speed (M40) M41 to M45: * The gear stage can be permanently defined in the part program with M41 to M45. If the M41 to M45 commands select a gear stage which is not the same as the current (actual) gear stage, the IS "Change gear" and the IS "Set gear stage A to C" are enabled. M40: * M40 in the part program causes the gear stage to be selected automatically by the control. The control checks which gear stage is possible for the programmed spindle speed (S function). If a gear stage is identified that is not equal to the current (actual) gear stage, the "Change gear" and "Set gear stage A" to "...C" interface signals are set. Note for the reader: * While the signal = 1, the text "Wait for gear stage change" is displayed in the channel operating message". The IS "Change gear" is only enabled when a new gear stage is selected that is not equal to the current actual gear stage. IS "Set gear stage A" to C"(V390x 2000.0 to .2) IS "Actual gear stage A" to "...C" (V380x 2000.0 to .2) IS "Gear changed" (V380x 2000.3) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V390x 2001.0 Speed limit exceeded Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: If the actual speed exceeds the maximum spindle speed MD 35100: SPIND_VELO_ LIMIT by more than the spindle speed tolerance MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL the IS "Speed limit exceeded" is enabled and alarm 22050 "Maximum speed reached" is output. All axes and spindles of the channel are brought to a standstill. MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL (spindle speed tolerance) MD 35100: SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (maximum spindle speed) Alarm 22050 "Maximum speed reached" 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 Special cases, errors, ... ... Related to .... Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-412 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x 2001.1 Setpoint speed limited (programmed speed too high) Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: If a spindle speed (rev/min) or a constant cutting speed (m/min or ft/min) is programmed, the value is exceeded one of the following limits: * Max. speed of specified gear stage * Maximum spindle speed * Speed limited by the PLC interface signal * Progr. Spindle speed limiting G26 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) * Progr. Spindle speed limiting for G96 The spindle speed is limited to the maximum limit. If a spindle speed (1/min) or a constant cutting speed (m/min) or ft/min) is programmed, none of the limit values have been exceeded. Note for the reader: The IS "Setpoint speed limited" can be used to detect that the programmed speed cannot be achieved. The PLC user can recognize this condition as not permissible and block path feed, or he can block the path feed or the entire channel. IS "Spindle in set range" is processed. 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V390x 2001.2 Setpoint speed increased (programmed speed too low) Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: If a spindle speed (rev/min) or a constant cutting speed (m/min or ft/min) is programmed, the value is below one of the following limits: * Minimum speed of the specified gear stage * Min. spindle speed * Speed limited by the PLC * Progr. Spindle speed limiting G25 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Application example(s) Note for the reader: * Progr. spindle speed limit for G96 The spindle speed is limited to the minimum limit. If a spindle speed (1/min) or a constant cutting speed (m/min or ft/min) is programmed, the value has not fallen below any of the limits. The IS "Setpoint speed increased" can be used to detect that the programmed speed cannot be achieved. The PLC user can recognize this condition as not permissible and block path feed, or he can block the path feed or the entire channel. IS "Spindle in set range" is processed. 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-413 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x 2001.5 Spindle in setpoint range Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The IS "Spindle in setpoint range" reports whether the programmed, and possibly limited spindle speed has been reached. Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Application example(s) In the spindle "control mode", the speed setpoint (programmed speed + spindle override including limits) is compared with the actual speed. If the actual speed deviates from the set speed by less than the spindle speed tolerance in MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, the IS "Spindle in setpoint range" is enabled. The IS "Spindle in setpoint range" reports whether the spindle is still in the acceleration or braking phase. In the spindle control mode, the speed setpoint (programmed speed * spindle override) is compared with the actual value. If the actual speed deviates from the set speed by more than the spindle speed tolerance in SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, the IS "Spindle in setpoint range" is reset. all spindle modes except for speed mode (control mode). The path feed must generally be disabled when the spindle is in the acceleration phase (programmed speed setpoint not yet reached). This can be performed as follows: * The IS "Spindle in setpoint range" is evaluated and the IS "Feed disable" (V3200 0006.0) is enabled. Related to .... Note for the reader: * MD 35500: SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START (feed enable with spindle in setpoint range) is enabled and the NCK then internally evaluates whether the spindle is in the setpoint range. The path feed is only enabled if the spindle is within the setpoint range. The positioning axes are never stopped by this function. MD 35500: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL (spindle speed tolerance) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V390x 2001.7 Actual direction of rotation clockwise Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal state 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal irrelevant for ... ... Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: When the spindle is rotating, "Actual direction of rotation clockwise" = 1 signals that the direction of rotation is CLOCKWISE. The actual direction of rotation is derived from the spindle position measurement encoder. When the spindle is rotating, "Actual direction of rotation clockwise" = 0 signals that the direction of rotation is COUNTERCLOCKWISE. Related to .... Note for the reader: 4-414 * Spindle stationary, IS "Axis/spindle stationary" = 1 (at standstill it is not possible to evaluate a direction of rotation) * Spindles without a position measuring encoder IS "Spindle stationary" (V390x 0001.4) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x 2002.0 Constant cutting rate active Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Related to .... Note for the reader: Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: For programming G96 S... the constant cutting rate function is carried out. The S word is now the cutting value. 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V390x 2002.3 Rigid tapping active (no compensation) Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The spindle is running in the rigid tapping function [no compensating chuck] (thread interpolation G331/G332). Application example(s) The spindle speed is also programmed with S.... in rev/min for rigid tapping, however the direction of rotation is stored in the sign for the pitch. There is no specific interface signals such as: IS "Spindle reset" IS "Synchronize spindle" IS "Invert M3/M4" IS "Spindle in setpoint range" IS "Programmable speed too high" Certain functions should not be used during rigid tapping (no compensating chuck), such as: * Reset IS "Controller enable" (V380x 0002.1) * IS "Set feed stop" (V380x 0004.3) * Reset * When activating the EMERGENCY STOP during rigid tapping, it should be remembered that the tool and workpiece are locked together. Related to .... Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V390x 2002.5 Active spindle positioning mode Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Related to .... Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: When programming SPOS=..... the spindle is in positioning mode. Note for the reader: IS "Active spindle mode control mode" (V390x 2002.7) IS "Active spindle mode oscillation mode" (V390x 2002.6) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-415 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x 2002.6 Active spindle mode oscillation mode Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The spindle is in oscillation mode if a new gear stage was defined using the automatic gear stage selection (M40) or M41 to M45 (IS "Change gear" is enabled). The IS "Change gear" is only enabled when a new gear stage is selected that is not equal to the current actual gear stage. IS "Active spindle mode control mode" (V390x 2002.7) IS "Active spindle mode positioning mode" (V390x 2002.5) IS "Change gear" (V390x 2000.3) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V390x 2002.7 Active spindle control mode Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Related to .... Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC) Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: The spindle is in control mode with the following functions: Spindle direction of rotation input M3/M4 or spindle stop M5 Related to .... Note for the reader: IS "Active spindle mode oscillation mode" (V390x 2002.6) IS "Active spindle mode positioning mode" (V390x 2002.5) 802D sl Description of Functions: S1 V390x5004.2 Reciprocation reversal active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from axis/spindle Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release: 7.2 cyclically The braking phase after reciprocation reversal from external (DB31, ...DBX28.0) is active. Signal status 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or No braking after reciprocation reversal from external is active. signal transition 1 ---> 0 V390x5004.3 Reciprocation cannot be started. Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from axis/spindle Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1 cyclically The reciprocating axis cannot be started; faulty programming. This state can also occur if the traversing motion has already been performed. Signal status 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 4-416 The reciprocating motion can be started. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x5004.4 Error during the reciprocating motion Interface signal Edge evaluation: Signal(s) Signal status 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 The reciprocating motion was canceled. V390x5004.5 Sparking-out active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from axis/spindle Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal status 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... The axis performs sparking-out strokes. DBX100.7 V390x5004.6 Reciprocating motion active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from axis/spindle Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal status 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Signal not relevant with ...... Related to .... Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1 The reciprocating motion is performed without errors. Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1 The axis is currently not performing any sparking-out strokes. Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1 The axis performs a reciprocating motion between 2 reversal points. The axis is currently not reciprocating. DBX100.7 = 0 DBX100.7 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-417 Interface Signals 06/2007 Axis-/spindle-specific signals V390x5004.7 Reciprocation active Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal status 1 or Signal(s) from axis/spindle Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1 cyclically The axis is currently traversed as a reciprocating axis. signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or The axis is a positioning axis. signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... DBX100.5, DBX100.6 V390x5008.0 to .5 Active infeed axes Interface signal Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) from axis/spindle Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal status 1 or signal transition 0 ---> 1 Signal status 0 or signal transition 1 ---> 0 Related to .... 4-418 Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1 The axis that issues the signal is currently the reciprocating axis and reports its active infeed axes (104.0 axis 1 is infeed axis, 104.1 axis 2 is infeed axis, etc.) in this field. The appropriate axis is not an infeed axis. DBX100.7 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 06/2007 Interface Signals Tool management functions from NC channel 4.8 Tool management functions from NC channel V5300 0000.0 Tool prewarning limit reached Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Job controlled Signal(s) valid from SW: by NCK The prewarning limit for a tool to be monitored was reached. The T number is provided in VD5300 1000. No prewarning limit reached 802D sl Description of Functions: W1 V5300 0000.1 Tool limit value reached Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Job controlled Signal(s) valid from SW: by NCK The limit for a tool to be monitored was reached. The T number is provided in VD5300 1004. Limit value reached 802D sl Description of Functions: W1 VD5300 1000 T number for tool prewarning limit Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal state 1/ value Signal state 0 Note for the reader: Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Job controlled Signal(s) valid from SW: by NCK The T number for which the tool prewarning limit is set is provided. No tool number reported 802D sl Description of Functions: W1 VD5300 1004 T number for tool limit value Interface signal Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC) Signal(s) updated: Job controlled Signal(s) valid from SW: by NCK The T number for which the tool limit value is set is provided. No tool number reported 802D sl Description of Functions: W1 Signal state 1/ value Signal state 1/ value Signal state 1/ value Signal state 0 Note for the reader: (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 4-419 Interface Signals 06/2007 Tool management functions from NC channel 4-420 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 5 PLC User Interface 5.1 Adressranges Operand identifiers Description Area V Data V0.0 to V79999999.7 (see below) T Timers T0 to T39 C Counters C0 to C31 I Figure: digital inputs I0.0 to I17.7 Q Figure: digital outputs Q0.0 to Q11.7 M Flag M0.0 to M383.7 SM Special flag SM0.0 to SM 0.6 (see below) O ACCU (logic) AC0, AC1 (UDword) O ACCU (arithmetic) AC2, AC3 (Dword) Structure of V-range addresses: Type identifier Range No. (DB no.) (channel and axis No.) Subarea Offset addressing symbolic (8-digit) 10 00 0 000 (10-79) (00-99) (0-9) (000-999) (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-421 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Adressranges Special flag - SM bit definition (read-only): SM bits Description SM0.0 Flag with defined ONE signal SM0.1 Initial setting: first PLC cycle '1', following cycles '0' SM0.2 Buffered data lost - only valid in first PLC cycle ('0' data ok, '1' data lost) SM0.3 Power On: first PLC cycle '1', following cycles '0' SM 0.4 60 s cycle (alternating '0' for 30 s, then '1' for 30 s) SM 0.5 1 s cycle (alternating '0' for 0.5 s, then '1' for 0.5 s SM 0.6 PLC cycle (alternating one cycle '0', then one cycle '1') Note All empty fields in the user interface are "Reserved for Siemens" and must not be written in or evaluated! Fields marked with "0" always receive the value "logical 0". References to the description of the interface signals refer to the corresponding chapters of the description of functions and are specified by [F "Chapter number"]. Variable access rights: [r] labels the range "read only" allowed [r/w] labels the range "read/ write" allowed additionally data format specification: 1: BIT 8: BYTE 16: INT/WORD 32: DINT/DWORD/REAL Without data format specification: all named data formats are readable and writable. 5-422 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface User data 5.2 User data 5.2.1 User data 1 1000 Data 1 [r/w] Data Block Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 User data 1000 0000 up to User data 1000 0011 5.2.2 User data 2 1100 Data 2 [r/w] Data Block Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 User data 1100 0000 up to User data 1100 0007 5.2.3 Signals from MCP (connected to the MCPA module) 1000 Data 1 [r/w] Data block Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1000 1000 Key 8 Key 7 Key 6 Key 5 Key 4 Key 3 Key 2 Key 1 JOG Var. INC User key 6 User key 5 User key 4 User key 3 User key 2 User key 1 1000 1001 Key 16 Key 15 Key14 Key 13 Key 12 Key 11 Key 10 Key 9 4th axis - Spindle CCW Spindle STOP Spindle CW mode Single block mode LOG REF 1000 1002 Key 24 Key 23 Key 22 Key 21 Key 20 Key 19 Key 18 Key 18 4th axis + 1st axis - 2nd axis - 3rd axis + Rapid traverse override 3rd axis - 2nd axis + 1st axis + Key 27 Key 26 Key 25 START STOP RESET 1000 1003 1000 1004 Feedrate override switch E D 1000 1005 E (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition C B A B A Spindle override switch D C 5-423 PLC User Interface 06/2007 User data 5.2.4 Signals to MCP (connected to the MCPA module) 1000 Data 1 [r/w] Data block Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 1100 1000 5.2.5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1 Reading/writing NC data: Job [F20.6] 1200 NC data l/s [r/w] Data Block Byte Bit 5 LED 6 PLC interface -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 1200 0000 1200 0001 Bit 0 Start Bit 1 Bit 0 Number of variables 1200 ... 1207 NC data l/s [r/w] Data Block PLC interface -----> NCK Byte Bit 1 Write variable Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 120x1000 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Variable index 120x1001 Area number 120x1002 Line index for the NCK variable x (WORD) 120x1004 Column index for the NCK variable x (WORD) 120x1006 120x1008 5.2.6 Writing: Data to NCK variable x (data type of the variables: 1...4 bytes) Read/write NC data: Result [F20.6] 1200 NC data l/s [r/w] Data Block Byte 1200 2000 NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Error in job Request completed 1200 2001 1200 2002 5-424 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Retentive data area 1200 ... 1207 NC data l/s [r/w] Data Block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 120x3000 Bit 0 Invalid variable 120x3001 Access result 120x3002 120x3004 Reading: Data from NCK variable x (data type of the variables: 1...4 bytes) Access result: 5.3 0 3 5 No error Illegal access to object Invalid address 10 Object does not exist Retentive data area 1400 Retentive data [r/w] Data Block Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 User data 1400 0000 up to User data 1400 0127 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-425 PLC User Interface 06/2007 User alarm 5.4 User alarm Note: Information on PLC alarms, including configuring user alarms, can be found in: References: Operating Instructions", Chapter "PLC alarms" 5.4.1 User alarm: Activation 1600 Activating alarm [r/w] Data Block Byte PLC interface -----> HMI Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 700002 700001 700000 700010 700009 700008 700018 700017 700016 700026 700025 700024 700034 700033 700032 700042 700041 700040 700050 700049 700048 700058 700057 700056 Activation of alarm no. 1600 0000 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 Activation of alarm no. 1600 0001 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 Activation of alarm no. 1600 0002 700023 700022 700021 700020 700019 Activation of alarm no. 1600 0003 700031 700030 700029 700028 700027 Activation of alarm no. 1600 0004 700039 700038 700037 700036 700035 Activation of alarm no. 1600 0005 700047 700046 700045 700044 700043 Activation of alarm no. 1600 0006 700055 700054 700053 700052 700051 Activation of alarm no. 1600 0007 5.4.2 700063 700062 700061 700060 700059 Variable for alarm 1600 Variable for alarm [r32/w32] Data Block PLC interface -----> HMI Start byte 1600 1000 Variable for alarm 700000 (4 bytes) 1600 1004 Variable for alarm 700001 (4 bytes) 1600 1008 Variable for alarm 700002 (4 bytes) ... ... 1600 1244 Variable for alarm 700061 (4 bytes) 1600 1248 Variable for alarm 700062 (4 bytes) 1600 1252 Variable for alarm 700063 (4 bytes) 5-426 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Signals from/to HMI 5.4.3 Active alarm reaction 1600 Active alarm reaction [r] Data Block Byte PLC interface -----> HMI Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 1600 2000 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 PLC STOP EMERGE NCY STOP Feed disable on all axes READ-in disable NC start disable 1600 2001 1600 2002 1600 2003 5.5 Signals from/to HMI 5.5.1 Program control signals from HMI (retentive area) 1700 HMI signals [r] Data Block Byte HMI interface -----> PLC Bit 7 1700 0000 Bit 6 Bit 5 Test run feedrate selected M01 selected Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Skip block 2 selected Skip block 1 selected Skip block 0 selected Skip block 9 selected Skip block 8 selected Bit 1 Bit 0 [F-K1] [F-K1] 1700 0001 Program test selected Feedrate override for rapid traverse selected [F-K1] [[F-K1] [FV1] 1700 0002 Skip block 7 selected 1700 0003 Measuring in JOG active Skip block 6 selected Skip block 5 selected Skip block 4 selected Skip block 3 selected [F-K1] [F-M5] 5.5.2 1700 Data Block Byte Program selection from PLC (retentive area) HMI signals [r/w] PLC interface -----> HMI Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 1700 1000 Program selection from PLC: Program number [F-A2] 1700 1001 Command job from PLC: Command [F-A2] 1700 1002 to 1700 1003 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-427 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Signals from/to HMI 5.5.3 Checkback signal Program selection from HMI (retentive area) 1700 HMI signals [r] Data Block Byte HMI interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 1 Bit 0 1700 2000 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Error Program selection [F-A2] Program selected [F-A2] 1700 2001 Error Command execution [F-A2] Execute command [F-A2] 1700 2002 to 1700 2003 5.5.4 Signals from HMI 1800 HMI signals [r] Data Block Byte 1800 0000 HMI interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Start measuring in JOG Bit 4 Bit 3 Mode group changeove r disable [F-M5] Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 JOG mode MDA mode AUTO mode [F-M5] [F-M5] [[F-M5] [F-M5] 1800 0001 5.5.5 Machine function REF [F-M5] Signals from PLC 1800 Signals from PLC [r] Data Block PLC interface Byte Bit 7 1800 1000 MCPA exists Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 up with saved data [F-A2] up with default values [F-A2] 1800 1001 1800 1002 1800 1003 5-428 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Signals from/to HMI 5.5.6 1900 Data Block Byte Signals from operator panel (retentive area) HMI signals [r/w] HMI interface -----> PLC Bit 7 1900 0000 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Simulation active [F-K1] 1900 0001 1900 0002 1900 0003 5.5.7 1900 Data Block Byte General selection/status signals from HMI (retentive area) HMI signals [r] HMI interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1900 1000 1900 1001 1900 1002 Axis number for handwheel 1 1900 1003 Machine axis [F-H1] C B A [F-H1] [F-H1] [F-H1] Axis number for handwheel 2 1900 1004 Machine axis [F-H1] C B A [F-H1] [F-H1]] [F-H1] 1900 1005 1900 1006 1900 1007 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-429 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Signals from/to HMI 5.5.8 General selection/status signals to HMI (retentive area) 1900 Signals to operator panel [r/w] Data Block Byte 1900 5000 PLC interface -----> HMI Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 OP key disable [F-A2] 1900 5001 Update tool list [F-W1] 1900 5002 Enable tool measuring in JOG [F-M5] 1900 5003 1900 5004 ... 1900 5007 5-430 T number for tool measuring in JOG (DINT) [F-M5] (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel 5.6 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel 2500 Auxiliary functions from NCK channel[r] Data Block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 M fcts. 5 M fcts. 4 M fcts. 3 M fcts. 2 M fcts. 1 Change Change Change Change Change [F-H2] [F-H2] [F-H2] [F-H2] [F-H2] 2500 0000 up to 2500 0003 2500 0004 2500 0005 2500 0006 S fcts. 1 change [F-H2] 2500 0007 2500 0008 T function 1 change [F-H2] 2500 0009 2500 0010 D function 1 change [F-H2] 2500 0011 2500 0012 H fcts. 3 change [F-H2] H fcts. 2 change [F-H2] H fcts. 1 change [F-H2] 2500 0013 up to 2500 0019 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-431 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel 5.6.1 Decoded M signals: (M0-M99) 2500 M functions from NCK channel[r] Data Block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 M2 M1 M0 M10 M9 M8 M18 M17 M16 M98 M97 M96 Bit 1 Bit 0 Dynamic M functions [F-H2] 2500 1000 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 Dynamic M functions [F-H2] 2500 1001 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 Dynamic M functions [F-H2] 2500 1002 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 ... Dynamic M functions [F-H2] 2500 1012 M99 2500 1013 up to 2500 1015 Remarks: The signals are output for the duration of a PLC cycle. 5.6.2 Transferred T functions 2500 T functions from NCK channel[r] Data Block Start byte 2500 2000 NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 T function 1 (DINT) [F-H2] 2500 2004 to 2500 2007 5-432 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel 5.6.3 Transferred M functions 2500 M functions from NCK channel[r] Data Block Start byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 2500 3000 M function 1 (DINT) [F-H2] 2500 3004 Extended address of M function 1 (byte) 2500 3008 M function 2 (DINT) [F-H2] 2500 3012 Extended address of M function 2 (byte) 2500 3016 M function 3 (DINT) [F-H2] 2500 3020 Extended address of M function 3 (byte) 2500 3024 M function 4 (DINT) [F-H2] 2500 3028 Extended address of M function 4 (byte) 2500 3032 M function 5 (DINT) [F-H2] 2500 3036 Extended address of M function 5 (byte) 5.6.4 S functions from NCK channel[r] Data Block NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 2500 4000 S function 1 (REAL) [F-H2] 2500 4004 Extended address of S function 1 (byte) 2500 4008 S function 2 (REAL) [F-H2] 2500 4012 Extended address of S function 2 (byte) 5.6.5 Bit 0 D functions from NCK channel[r] Data Block 2500 5000 Bit 1 Transferred D functions 2500 Start byte Bit 0 Transferred S functions 2500 Start byte Bit 1 NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 D function 1 (DINT) [F-H2] 2500 5004 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-433 PLC User Interface 06/2007 NCK signals 5.6.6 Transferred H functions 2500 H functions from NCK channel[r] Data Block Start byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 2500 6000 H function 1 (REAL) [F-H2] 2500 6004 Extended address for H function 1 (INT) [F-H2] 2500 6008 H function 2 (REAL) 2500 6012 Extended address for H function 2 (INT) [F-H2] 2500 6016 H function 3 (REAL) [F-H2] 2500 6020 Extended address for H function 3 (INT) [F-H2] 5.7 NCK signals 5.7.1 General signals to NCK 2600 Data Block Byte Bit 1 Bit 0 General signals to NCK [r/w] PLC interface -----> NCK Bit 7 2600 0000 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Protection level [F-A2] Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Acknowled ge EMERGE NCY STOP Braking at contour in case of EMERGE NCY STOP EMERGE NCY STOP [F-N2] [F-N2] 4 5 6 2600 0001 7 Request axis distancesto-go actual values INC inputs in mode group range active 1) [F-H1] 2600 0002 2600 0003 Remarks: 1) see operating mode signals 5-434 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface NCK signals 5.7.2 General signals from NCK 2700 General signals from NCK [r] Data Block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 2700 0000 2700 0001 Bit 1 Bit 0 EMERGE NCY STOP active [F-N2] INCH dimensio n system Probe 2 actuated Probe 1 actuated [F-M5] [F-M5] [F-G2] 2700 0002 Drive ready [F-A2] 2700 0003 Air temperat ure alarm [F-A2] 2700 0004 Drives in cyclical operation [F-A2] NCK alarm is active [F-A2] Software cam MINUS 7 Software cam MINUS 6 Software cam MINUS 5 Software cam MINUS 4 Software cam MINUS 3 Software cam MINUS 2 Software cam MINUS 1 Software cam MINUS 0 Software cam PLUS 7 Software cam PLUS 6 Software cam PLUS 5 Software cam PLUS 4 Software cam PLUS 3 Software cam PLUS 2 Software cam PLUS 1 Software cam PLUS 0 2700 0005 2700 0006 2700 0007 2700 0008 2700 0009 2700 0010 2700 0011 2700 0012 Modification counter for motions of handwheel 1 2700 0013 Modification counter for motions of handwheel 2 2700 0014 2700 0015 Modification counter, inch/metricunit system (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-435 PLC User Interface 06/2007 NCK signals 5.7.3 Signals to fast inputs and outputs 2800 Signals to fast inputs and outputs [r/w] Data block Byte Interface PLC -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 2800 0000 Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 2800 0001 Input 7 Input 6 Output 7 Output 6 2800 0004 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input 5 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9 Output 10 Output 9 Output 10 Output 9 Output 10 Output 9 Input 4 Input 5 Input 4 Disable digital NCK outputs Output 8 2800 0005 Output 5 Output 4 Overwrite screenform for digital NCK outputs Output 8 Output 7 2800 0006 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Value from the PLC for the digital NCK outputs Output 8 Output 7 2800 0007 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Setpoint screenform for the NCK outputs Output 8 2800 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Signals to fast inputs and outputs [r/w] Data block Interface PLC -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 2800 1000 Bit 4 Bit 3 Disable external digital NCK inputs Input 16 2800 1001 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Values from the PLC for the external NCK inputs Input 16 Input 15 2800 1008 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Disable external digital NCK outputs Output 16 Output 15 Output 16 Output 15 Output 16 Output 15 Output 16 Output 15 2800 1009 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs 2800 1010 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs 2800 1011 5-436 Bit 3 Values from the PLC for the NCK inputs Input 8 Byte Bit 4 Disable digital NCK inputs Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Setpoint screenform for the external digital NCK outputs Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface NCK signals 5.7.4 Signal from fast inputs and outputs 2900 Signals from fast inputs and outputs [r/w] Data block Byte Interface PLC -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 2800 0000 Input 8 Input 7 2900 0001 2900 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input 10 Input 9 Output 10 Output 9 Signals from fast inputs and outputs [r/w] Data block Interface PLC -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 2900 0000 Bit 4 Bit 3 Actual values of the digital NCK inputs Input 8 Input 7 2900 0004 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Setpoints of the digital NCK outputs Output 8 2900 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Signals to fast inputs and outputs [r/w] Data block Byte Bit 3 Setpoints of the digital NCK outputs Output 8 Byte Bit 4 Actual values of the digital NCK inputss Interface PLC -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 2900 1000 Bit 4 Bit 3 Actual values of the external digital NCK inputs Input 16 2900 1004 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 NCK setpoint for the external digital NCK outputs Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition Output 12 Output 11 5-437 PLC User Interface 06/2007 NCK signals 5.7.5 3000 Data Block Byte 3000 0000 Operating mode signals Operating mode signals to NCK [r/w] PLC interface -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Reset Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 [F-K1] Bit 1 Bit 0 Operating mode Mode group changeov er disable [F-K1] JOG MDI AUTOM. [F-K1] [F-K1] [F-K1] 3000 0001 Machine function REF Teach In [F-K1] Machine function 1) 3000 0002 Continuou s traversal INCvar INC10 000 [F-H1] INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1 3000 0003 Remarks: Machine functionin order to use machine function signals in VB3000 0002, signal "INC inputs in mode group range active" (V2600 0001.0) must be set to "1" Machine function INC10 000 is not supported by all machine control panels. 3100 Data Block Byte Operating mode signals to NCK [r] PLC interface -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 3100 0000 Bit 1 Bit 0 Active mode 802- JOG MDI AUTOM. READY [F-K1] [F-K1] [F-K1] [F-K1] 3000 0001 Active machine function REF Teach In [F-K1] 3000 0002 Continuou s traversing active var. INC active 10 000 INC active 1000 INC active 100 INC active 10 INC active 1 INC active 3000 0003 5-438 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Channel Signals 5.8 Channel Signals 5.8.1 Signals to NC channel Control signals to NC channel 3200 Signals to NCK channel [r/w] Data Block Byte PLC interface -----> NCK Bit 7 3200 0000 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Activate dry run feed M01 Activate Single block 4) DRF Activate [F-K1] Activate Forward travel Activate Reverse travel Activate [F-V1] 3200 0001 Activate program test 3200 0002 Activate "Skip block 7" Bit 0 [F-K1] Enable protection zones Activate referencin g Activate "Skip block 1" Activate "Skip block 0" [F-R1] [F-K1] Activate "Skip block 6" Activate "Skip block 5" Activate "Skip block 4" Activate "Skip block 3" Activate "Skip block 2" [F-K1] Nibbling and punching 3200 0003 Stroke initiated manually 2 Stroke does not run Stroke suppresse d Stroke initiated manually Stroke disable C B O Feedrate override2) [F-V1] 3200 0004 H G F E D Rapid traverse override3) [F-V1] 3200 0005 3200 0006 Delayed stroke H G F E D C B O Feedrate override1) active Rapid traverse override active Limited path velocity Program level abort Delete number of subroutine cycles Delete distance to-go [F-A2] Read-in disable Feedrate disable [F-K1] [F-V1] Suppress Start Lock NC stop axes plus spindle NC stop NC Stop at block limit NC Start NC Start disable [F-K1] [F-K1] [F-K1] Area 2 Area 1 Area 10 Area 9 Area 2 Area 1 Area 10 Area 9 [F-V1] [F-K1] [F-V1] 3200 0007 [F-K1] [F-K1] 3200 0008 Activate machine-related protection zone Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 3200 0009 Activate machine-related protection zone 3200 0010 Activate channel-specific protection zone Area 8 3200 0011 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Activate channel-specific protection zone 3200 0012 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-439 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Channel Signals 3200 0013 Deactivate workpiece counter [F-W1] Do not disable tool [F-W1] 3200 0014 Activate contour handwheel (bit-/binary-coded) Activate associated M01 3200 0015 Activate "Skip block 9" Neg. direction for sim. contour handwheel Sim. contour handwheel ON Handwhee l2 Handwhee l1 Activate "Skip block 8" Remarks: 1)+ Feedrate override activeEven if the feedrate override is not active, (=100%) the 0% position still functions. 2)+ Feedrate override31 positions (Gray code) 3) + Rapid override31 positions (Gray code) 4) 's Guide") 5-440 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Channel Signals Control signals to geometry axes (axes in WCS) 3200 Signals to NCK channel [r/w] Data Block Byte PLC interface -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Geometry axis 1 (axis 1 in WCS) 3200 1000 Traversing keys Rapid traverse override Traversing key lock Feedrate stop [F-H1] [F-H1] Activate handwheel [F-H1] + - 2 1 [F-H1] [F-H1] [F-H1] [F-H1] INC10 INC1 Geometry axis 1 (axis 1 in WCS) Machine function 1) [F-H1] 3200 1001 Continuo us traversal INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 [ 3200 1002 3200 1003 Geometry axis 2 (axis 2 in WCS) 3200 1004 Traversing keys Rapid traverse override Traversing key lock [F-H1] Activate handwheel Feedrate stop [F-H1] [F-H1] + - 2 1 [F-H1] [F-H1] [F-H1] [F-H1] INC10 INC1 Geometry axis 2 (axis 2 in WCS) Machine function 1) [F-H1] 3200 1005 Continuo us traversal INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 3200 1006 3200 1007 Geometry axis 3 (axis 3 in WCS) 3200 1008 Traversing keys Rapid traverse override Traversing key lock Feedrate stop [F-H1] [F-H1] Activate handwheel [F-H1] + - 2 1 [F-H1] [F-H1] [F-H1] [F-H1] INC10 INC1 Geometry axis 3 (axis 3 in WCS) Machine function 1) [F-H1] 3200 1009 Continuo us traversal INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 3200 1010 3200 1011 Remarks:1) Machine function specification of machine function in VB3200 1001, VB3200 1005, VB3200 1009, only if signal "INC inputs in mode group range active" (V2600 0001.0) is not set. Machine function INC10 000 is not supported by all machine control panels. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-441 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Channel Signals 5.8.2 Signals from NC channel Status signals from NC channel 3300 Signals from NCK channel [r] Data Block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 3300 0000 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Last action block active M0/M1 active Approach block active Action block active Forward travel active Reverse travel active [F-K1] [F-K1] Program execution from ext. active Block search active Handwhe el override active [F-K1] [F-K1] 3300 0001 Program test active [F-K1] Transfor m. active [F-M1] M2 / M30 active [F-K1] Rev. feedrate active Referencin g active [F-R1] [F-V1] [F-K1] 3300 0002 Channel status 3300 0003 Program status Reset - active Aborted - Stopped Running [F-K1] upted [F-K1] [F-K1] upted [F-K1] [F-K1] [F-K1] 3300 0004 NCK alarm with processing stop present specific NCK alarm is active [F-A2] [F-A2] [F-K1] all axes stationary [F-B1] all axes reference d Stop request [F-R1] 3300 0005 Contour handwheel active (bit-/binary-coded) 3300 0006 Handwhee l2 Handwheel 1 Acknowl. of manual stroke initiation Stroke initiation Nibbling and punching 3300 0007 Protection zones no longer guaranteed 3300 0008 Machine-related protection zones preactivated Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 3300 0009 Machine-related protection zones preactivated 3300 0010 Channel-specific protection zones preactivated Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 3300 0011 Channel-specific protection zones preactivated 3300 0012 Machine-related protection zones violated Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 3300 0013 Machine-related protection zones violated 3300 0014 Channel-specific protection zones violated Area 7 3300 0015 5-442 Start request Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1 Area 10 Area 9 Area 2 Area 1 Area 10 Area 9 Area 2 Area 1 Area 10 Area 9 Area 2 Area 1 Channel-specific protection zones violated (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Channel Signals Area 10 Area 9 Bit 1 Bit 0 Status signals to geometry axes (axes in WCS) 3300 Signals from NCK channel [r] Data Block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Geometry axis 1 (axis 1 in WCS) 3300 1000 Motion command plus minus [F-H1] [F-H1] Travel request plus 3300 1001 Handwheel active minus 2 1 [F-H1] [F-H1] INC10 INC1 Active machine function [F-H1] Continuou s traversal INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 3300 1002 3300 1003 Geometry axis 2 (axis 2 in WCS) 3300 1004 Motion command plus minus [F-H1] [F-H1] Travel request plus Handwheel active minus 3300 1005 2 1 [F-H1] [F-H1] INC10 INC1 Active machine function [F-H1] Continuou s traversal INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 3300 1006 3300 1007 Geometry axis 3 (axis 3 in WCS) 3300 1008 Motion command plus minus [F-H1] [F-H1] Travel request plus 3300 1009 Handwheel active minus 2 1 [F-H1] [F-H1] INC100 INC10 INC1 Bit 2 Bit 1 Active machine function [F-H1] Continuou s traversal INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 3300 1010 3300 1011 Further status signals from the NC channel 3300 Signals from NCK channel [r] Data Block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 3300 4000 Bit 0 G00 active 3300 4001 Travel request for drive test present Workpiece setpoint reached [F-K1] External language mode active [F-A2] 3300 4002 3300 4003 DELAY FST SUPPRE SS DELAY FST (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-443 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Channel Signals G functions from NC channel 3500 Signals from NCK channel [r] Data Block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 3500 0000 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Active G function of group 1 3500 0001 Active G function of group 2 3500 00.. Active G function of group ... 3500 0063 Active G function of group 64 Note: With SINUMERIK 802D, G group 2 is transferred in VB3500 0001 with values 0: - no group 2 G command is active, 1: G4, 2: G63, 3: G74, 4: G75, 11: G147, 12: G247, 13: G347, 14: G148, 15: G248, 16: G348 (other values: not available in SINUMERIK 802D) Other settings are possible with MD 22510: see Section 21.3 When the NC program terminates or is aborted, the last status of the groups is retained. The meaning of the G commands is explained in References: "Operation and Programming", Section "Overview of instructions" Note: synchronous connection between the active NC block and the applied G codes at any given time. The connection does not exist, for instance, if temporally short blocks are used with continuous path mode (G64). 5-444 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Axis/spindle signals 5.9 Axis/spindle signals 5.9.1 Transferred M/S functions, axis-specific 3700 ... 3704 M/S functions [r] Data block PLC interface -----> NCK Start byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 370x 0000 M function for spindle (DINT) [F-S1] 370x 0004 S function for spindle (REAL) [F-S1] 5.9.2 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 A Signals to axis/spindle Common signals to axis/spindle 3800 ... 3804 Signals to axis/spindle [r/w] Data block Byte PLC interface -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Feedrate override [F-V1] 380x 0000 H 380x 0001 Override active G [F-V1] F E D C B Position measuring system 1 [F-A2] Follow-up mode [F-A2] Axis/spindl e disable [F-A2] Sensor for fixed stop [F-F1] Acknowled ge fixed stop reached [F-F1] Clamping in progress Distancetogo/spindle reset Controller enable [F-A2] 380x 0002 [F-A3] Cam activation [F-S1] 380x 0003 Axis/spindl e enable program test Enable approach to fixed stop [F-F1] Velocity/ spindle speed limiting [F-A3] Traversing keys 380x 0004 plus minus [F-H1] [F-H1] Rapid traverse override Traversing key lock [F-H1] [F-H1] Feedrate stop Activate handwheel Spindle stop [F-V1] 2 1 [F-H1] [F-H1] INC10 INC1 Machine function1) [F-H1] 380x 0005 Continuo us traversal INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 380x 0006 up to 380x 0011 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-445 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Axis/spindle signals Remarks: 1) Machine functionSpecification of machine function in VB380x 0005, only if signal "INC inputs in modegroup range active" (V2600 0001.0) is not set. Machine function INC10 000 is not supported by all machine control panels. Signals to axis 3800 ... 3804 Signals to axis [r/w] Data block PLC interface -----> NCK Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Delay. Ref. pt. approach Bit 4 Modulo Limit Enabled Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 2nd software limit switch Bit 0 Hardware limit switch [F-R1] 380x 1000 (axis) plus minus plus minus [F-A3] [F-A3] [F-A3] [F-A3] Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 380x 1001 up to 380x 1003 Signals to spindle 3800 ... 3804 Signals to spindle [r/w] Data block Byte PLC interface -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Clear S value Spindle: No speed monitoring when switching the gear stage; resynchro nize 2 Spindle: Resynchro nize 2 Spindle: Resynchro nize 1 Gear changed [F-S1] 380x 2000 (Spindle) Invert M3/M4 380x 2001 (spindle) Actual gear stage C B A [F-S1] [F-S1] [F-S1] Feedrate override valid for spindle Resynchro nize spindle during positioning 1 [F-S1] [F-V1] [F-S1] Setpoint direction of rotation 380x 2002 Left Right (Spindle) [F-S1] [F-S1] H G Oscillation speed Oscillation via PLC [F-S1] [F-S1] 380x 2003 (Spindle) 5-446 Spindle override [F-V1] F E D C B A (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Axis/spindle signals Signals to PLC axis 3800 ... 3805 Signals to PLC axis [r/w] Data block Interface PLC -----> NCK Byte Bit 7 380x 3000 Start positioning axis Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Traversing dimension: Inch (not metric) G function: Shortest path (DC) G function: increment al (IC) G function: Abs. pos. direction (ACP) G function: Abs. neg. direction (ACN) 380x 3001 380x 3002 380x 3003 Indexing position 380x 3004 Position (REAL, with indexing axis: DWORD) 380x 3005 380x 3006 380x 3007 380x 3008 Feedrate (REAL), if = 0, value is taken from machine data POS_AX_VELO 380x 3009 380x 3010 380x 3011 Signals to drive 3800 ... 3805 Signals to axis/spindle [r/w] Data block Byte PLC interface -----> NCK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 380x 4000 380x 4001 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Speed setpoint smoothing Pulse enable [F-A2] Speed controller integrato r disable Parameter set selection [F-A2] [F-A2] C B A 380x 4002 380x 4003 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-447 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Axis/spindle signals Signals to technology functions 3800 ... 3805 Signals to axis/spindle [r/w] Data block Interface PLC -----> NCK Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 380x 5003 Stop HIAxMove Stop Corr Stop DEPBCS Stop DEPMCS Resume HIAxMove Resume Corr Resume DEPBCS Resume DEPMCS 380x 5004 PLC controls axis AxStop, stop Stop at next reversal point Change reversal point Set reversal point AxResum e AxReset OscillAxEx t Reversal Positionin g the spindle Automatic gear stage change Specified direction of rotation CCW Specified direction of rotation CW Spindle STOP Bit 2 Bit 1 380x 5000 380x 5001 380x 5002 (grinding) (reciprocat ing) 380x 5005 (grinding) 380x 5006 (spindle) 5.9.3 Signals from axis/spindle General signals from axis/spindle 3900 ... 3905 Signals from axis/spindle [r] Data block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Position reached Bit 4 Bit 3 Reference d/synchro nized 1 Encoder limit frequency exceeded 1 [F-R1] Bit 0 Spindle/ no axis [F-S1] [F-A3] 390x 0000 with exact stop, fine [F-B1] with exact stop, coarse [F-B1] 390x 0001 Current controller active [F-A2] Speed control loop active Position controller active [F-A2] [F-A2] 390x 0002 Power Fixed stop limited Axis/spindl e stationary (n < nmin) Follow up mode active [F-A2] [F-A2] Fixed stop reached [F-F1] Activate travel to fixed stop [F-F1] Measurem ent active Cam active [F-M5] 390x 0003 Motion command Travel request Handwheel active 5-448 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Axis/spindle signals 390x 0004 plus minus [F-H1] [F-H1] plus minus 2 1 [F-H1] [F-H1] Active machine function [F-F1] 390x 0005 390x 0006 up to 390x 0011 Continuo us INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 PLC axis assigned firmly Signals from axis 3900 ... 3905 Signals from axis [r] Data block NCK interface -----> PLC Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 390x 1000 Bit 4 Modulo Limit Enabled active 390x 1001 390x 1002 Rotary axis in position Indexing axis in position Positionin g axis Path axis Lubricatio n pulse [F-A2] 390x 1003 Signals from spindle 3900 ... 3905 Signals from spindle [r] Data block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Gearbox Bit 1 Bit 0 Set gear stage changeov er [F-S1] 390x 2000 C B A (Spindle) [F-S1] [F-S1] [F-S1] Setpoint speed increased Setpoint speed limited Speed limit exceeded [F-S1] [F-S1] [F-S1] SUG active Const. cutting velocity active 390x 2001 (Spindle) Actual direction of rotation clockwise Speed monitorin g Spindle In the setpoint range Supporting range limit violated Geometry monitoring [F-S1] [F-S1] Active spindle mode Rigid tapping [F-S1] [F-S1] 390x 2002 (Spindle) 390x 2003 Control mode Oscillatio n mode [F-S1] [F-S1] Positionin g mode [F-S1] Spindle in position (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-449 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Axis/spindle signals Signals from PLC axis 3900 ... 3905 Signals from spindle [r] Data block Interface NCK -----> PLC Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 390x 3000 Positionin g axis active Position reached Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Error during traversing Axis cannot be started Bit 1 Bit 0 390x 3001 390x 3002 390x 3003 Error number Signals from drive 3900 ... 3905 Signals from axis/spindle [r] Data block Byte NCK interface -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Pulses enabled Speed controller integrato r disabled Drive ready Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 390x 4000 390x 4001 [F-A2] Active parameter set [F-A2] [F-A2] [F-A2] C 390x 4002 nact = nset [F-A2] nact<nx nact<nmin Md<Mdx [F-A2] [F-A2] [F-A2] Ramp-up completed B A Temperature prewarning [F-A2] Heat sink Motor [F-A2] [F-A2] 390x 4003 Uzk<Uzkx 5-450 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Axis/spindle signals Signals from technology functions 3900 ... 3905 Signals from axis/spindle [r] Data block Byte Interface NCK -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 ESR reaction initiated Accelerat ion warning threshold reached Velocity warning threshold reached Overlaid movement Max. accelerat ion reached Max. velocity reached Synchroni zation running Axis accelerate d Reciproc ating motion active Sparkingout active Error during the reciprocati ng motion Reciprocat ion cannot be started. Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Axis 2 Axis 1 390x 5000 390x 5001 390x 5002 390x 5003 390x 5004 (grinding) (reciprocat ing) Reciprocat ion active OscillAxEx t Reversal active 390x 5005 390x 5006 390x 5007 390x 5008 Active additional axis Axis 6 Axis 5 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition Axis 4 Axis 3 5-451 PLC User Interface 06/2007 PLC machine data 5.10 PLC machine data 5.10.1 INT values (MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT) 4500 Signals from NCK [r16] Data block NCK interface -----> PLC Start byte 4500 0000 4500 0002 4500 0004 up to 4500 0062 5.10.2 Int values (WORD/ 2 Byte) Int values (WORD/ 2 Byte) Int values (WORD/ 2 Byte) Int values (WORD/ 2 Byte) HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX) 4500 Signals from NCK [r8] Data block NCK interface -----> PLC Byte 4500 1000 Hex value (BYTE) 4500 1001 Hex value (BYTE) up to 4500 1031 Hex value (BYTE) 5.10.3 FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT) 4500 Signals from NCK [r32] Data block NCK interface -----> PLC Start byte 4500 2000 Float value (REAL/ 4 Byte) 4500 2004 Float value (REAL/ 4 Byte) up to 4500 2028 Float value (REAL/ 4 Byte) User alarm: 5-452 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PLC User Interface Reading and writing PLC variables Configuration (MD 14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM) 4500 Signals from NCK [r8] Data block NCK interface -----> PLC Byte 4500 3000 Alarm reaction/ deletion criterion Alarm 700000 4500 3001 Alarm reaction/ deletion criterion Alarm 700001 up to 4500 3031 Alarm reaction/ deletion criterion Alarm 700031 Note: Information on PLC alarms, including configuring user alarms, can be found in: References: Up Guide", Section "PLC alarms" 5.11 Reading and writing PLC variables 4900 PLC variables [r/w] Data block PLC interface Byte 4900 0000 Offset[0] 4900 0001 Offset[1] up to 4900 1021 ... 4900 1022 Offset[1022] 4900 1023 Offset[1023] Note: The application programmers of NCK and PLC themselves are responsible for the organization of this data area. Data type, position offset and meaning of the variables must be agreed. The memory range limits per data type must be observed (1, 2 or 4 byte types). Further information can be found in: References: "Operation and Programming", Section "Reading and writing PLC variables" (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 5-453 PLC User Interface 06/2007 Tool management functions from NC channel 5.12 Tool management functions from NC channel Change signals for tool management functions 5300 Tool management functions [r] Data block Byte NCK interface NCK PLC -----> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 5300 0000 Bit 1 Bit 0 Tool limit value reached Tool warning limit reached [F-W1] [F-W1] Transferred tool management functions 5300 Tool management functions [r32] Data block NCK interface -----> PLC Byte 5300 1000 T number for tool warning limit (DINT) [F-W1] 5300 1004 T number for tool limit value (DINT) [F-W1] Axis actual values and distances-to-go 5700 ... 5704 Signals from axis/spindle [r32] Data block NCK interface -----> PLC Byte 570x 0000 Axis actual value (REAL) 570x 0004 Axis distance-to-go (REAL) Note: Axis actual values and distances-to-go can each be requested separately: - V2600 0001.1 Request for axis actual values - V2600 0001.2 Request for axis distances-to-go Once the respective request has been set, these values are provided by NCK for all axes. 5-454 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition SINAMICS Parameter 6 For the SINAMICS parameters, please refer to the documentation SINAMICS S, Lists Manuali. LH1, SINAMICS_S, Parameter Manual (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007Edition 6-455 SINAMICS Parameter 6-456 06/2007 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 Index I Index Number 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200 ... 1207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3700 ... 3704 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3800 ... 3804 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3800 ... 3805 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3900 ... 3905 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5700 ... 5704 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-423 5-423 5-424 5-424 5-425 5-426 5-427 5-428 5-429 5-431 5-434 5-435 5-436 5-437 5-438 5-438 5-439 5-442 5-444 5-445 5-445 5-447 5-448 5-452 5-453 5-454 5-454 A ABSBLOCK_FUNCTION_MASK MD 27100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-199 ACCEL_ORI MD 21170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129 ACCESS_EXEC_CMA MD 11161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 ACCESS_EXEC_CST MD 11160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 ACCESS_EXEC_CUS MD 11162 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 ACCESS_WRITE_CMA MD 11166 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 ACCESS_WRITE_CST MD 11165 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 ACCESS_WRITE_CUS MD 11167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 ACCESS_WRITE_MACCESS MD 11171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition ACCESS_WRITE_SACCESS MD 11170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 ACCESS_WRITE_UACCESS MD 11172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE MD 20610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120 APPROACH_FEED MD 42120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-316 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION MD 22020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP MD 22000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131 AUXFU_ASSIGN_SPEC MD 22035 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE MD 22010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE MD 22030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132 AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE MD 22254 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135 AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE MD 22256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135 AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN MD 11100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 AUXFU_PREDEF_EXTENSION MD 22060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134 AUXFU_PREDEF_GROUP MD 22040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133 AUXFU_PREDEF_TYPE MD 22050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134 AUXFU_PREDEF_VALUE MD 22070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME MD 36610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-281 AX_MOTION_DIR MD 32100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-231 AX_VELO_LIMIT MD 36200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-277 AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_NCU MD 30554 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-223 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB MD 20080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB MD 20050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB MD 10000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED I-457 06/2007 Index MD 20070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101 AXCT_SWWIDTH MD 41700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-313 AXES_SCALE_ENABLE MD 22914 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138 AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK MD 30465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-220 Active alarm reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-427 Adressranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-421 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel 4-351 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel 5-431 Axis/spindle signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-445 Axis-/spindle-specific signals . . . . . . . 4-389 B BACKLASH MD 32450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS MD 31123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BERO_DELAY_TIME_PLUS MD 31122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE MD 36600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-237 2-230 2-229 2-281 C CC_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_MASK MD 10420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 CC_VDI_IN_DATA MD 10400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 CC_VDI_OUT_DATA MD 10410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 CEC_TABLE_ENABLE MD 41300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-301 CEC_TABLE_WEIGHT MD 41310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-302 CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST MD 21000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126 CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR MD 21010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127 CLAMP_POS_TOL MD 36050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-274 COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1 MD 41600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-311 COMPAR_THRESHOLD_2 MD 41601 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-312 COMPRESS_CONTUR_TOL MD 42475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-322 COMPRESS_VELO_TOL MD 20172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109 CONE_ANGLE MD 42995 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-331 CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME MD 20500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118 I-458 CONTOUR_TOL MD 36400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-280 CONTROL_UNIT_LOGIC_ADDRESS MD 13120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_CRIT MD 42526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-328 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_END MD 42522 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-327 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_OVR MD 42524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-328 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_START MD 42520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-327 CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE MD 42470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-321 CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON MD 291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON MD 292 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 290 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS MD 289 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 CTRLOUT_LIMIT MD 36210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-278 CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR MD 30110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-213 CTRLOUT_NR MD 30120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-213 CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR MD 30100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212 CTRLOUT_TYPE MD 30130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-213 CUTCOM_ACT_DEACT_CTRL MD 42494 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-323 CUTCOM_CLSD_CONT MD 42496 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-325 CUTCOM_DECEL_LIMIT MD 42528 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-329 CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE MD 42490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-323 Channel Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-439 Channel-specific signals . . . . . . . . . . 4-363 Checkback signal Program selection from HMI (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-428 Cyclic signal exchange . . . . . . . . . . . 4-343 D D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME MD 11717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 DEFAULT_FEED MD 42110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-316 DEFAULT_ROT_FACTOR_R MD 42150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-317 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 MD 43120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-331 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_P MD 42140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-317 DEFAULT_VALUES_MEM_MASK MD 11270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 DISPLAY_IS_MODULO MD 30320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-219 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION MD 203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH MD 204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_SPINDLE MD 205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 DPIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_IN MD 10500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 DPIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_OUT MD 10510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 DPIO_RANGE_ATTRIBUTE_IN MD 10502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 DPIO_RANGE_ATTRIBUTE_OUT MD 10512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 DPIO_RANGE_LENGTH_IN MD 10501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 DPIO_RANGE_LENGTH_OUT MD 10511 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 DRIFT_LIMIT MD 36710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-282 DRIFT_VALUE MD 36720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-283 DRILL_VELO_LIMIT MD 35550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-271 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM MD 31050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-227 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA MD 31060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-227 DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_DENOM MD 31064 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-228 DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA MD 31066 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-228 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM MD 31070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-229 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA MD 31080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-229 DRIVE_FUNCTION_MASK MD 13070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 DRIVE_TELEGRAM_TYPE MD 13060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 DRIVE_TYPE_DP MD 13080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 DRY_RUN_FEED MD 42100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-315 DRY_RUN_FEED_MODE MD 42101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-315 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition Index DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK MD 32320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-234 Decoded M signals (M0-M99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-432 E ENC_ABS_BUFFERING MD 30270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO MD 34220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_ACTVAL_SMOOTH_TIME MD 34990 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_CHANGE_TOL MD 36500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_COMP_ENABLE MD 32700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_FEEDBACK_POL MD 32110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_FREQ_LIMIT MD 36300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW MD 36302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST MD 31010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_INPUT_NR MD 30230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_IS_DIRECT MD 31040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_IS_DIRECT2 MD 31044 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_IS_LINEAR MD 31000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_MODULE_NR MD 30220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_REFP_MODE MD 34200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_REFP_STATE MD 34210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_RESOL MD 31020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_SEGMENT_NR MD 30210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_TYPE MD 30240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENC_ZERO_MONITORING MD 36310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPS_TLIFT_TANG_STEP MD 37400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME MD 32810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXACT_POS_MODE MD 20550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXACT_POS_MODE_G0_TO_G1 MD 20552 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-217 2-254 2-255 2-280 2-244 2-232 2-278 2-278 2-225 2-216 2-226 2-226 2-225 2-215 2-253 2-253 2-225 2-215 2-216 2-279 2-294 2-244 2-119 2-119 I-459 Index EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO MD 10888 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_DIST MD 42162 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-318 EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_ON MD 10812 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9 MD 42160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-317 EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_ON MD 22920 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139 EXTERN_FLOATINGPOINT_PROG MD 10884 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 EXTERN_FUNCTION_MASK MD 20734 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124 EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE MD 10816 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME MD 10817 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 EXTERN_G0_LINEAR_MODE MD 20732 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124 EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_MODE MD 20156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108 EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES MD 20154 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107 EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM MD 10886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 EXTERN_INTERRUPT_BITS_M96 MD 10808 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 EXTERN_INTERRUPT_NUM_ASUP MD 10818 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 EXTERN_INTERRUPT_NUM_RETRAC MD 10820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT MD 10806 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE MD 10814 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME MD 10815 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT MD 10804 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 EXTERN_MEAS_G31_P_SIGNAL MD 10810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 EXTERN_PARALLEL_GEOAX MD 22930 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139 EXTERN_REF_POSITION_G30_1 MD 43340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-335 EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR MD 20095 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104 EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE MD 10890 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 F F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET MD 22410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137 I-460 06/2007 Read/write NC data Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-424 Reading/writing NC data Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-424 FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS MD 10350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS MD 10360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE MD 32630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-242 FIRST_LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 FIX_POINT_POS MD 30600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-224 FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK MD 37060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-287 FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK MD 37050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-287 FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR MD 37040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-286 FIXED_STOP_CONTROL MD 37002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-284 FIXED_STOP_MODE MD 37000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-283 FIXED_STOP_SWITCH MD 43500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-336 FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD MD 37030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-286 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE MD 43510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-337 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF MD 37010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-284 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_FACTOR MD 37014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-285 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_RAMP_TIME MD 37012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-285 FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF MD 37020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-285 FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-452 FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG MD 42440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-320 FRAME_SUPPRESS_MODE MD 24020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140 FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE MD 32510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-238 FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX MD 32520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-239 FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN MD 32530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-240 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE MD 32500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-238 FRICT_COMP_MODE MD 32490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-237 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 FRICT_COMP_TIME MD 32540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-241 G G0_LINEAR_MODE MD 20730 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123 G53_TOOLCORR MD 10760 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 GANTRY_ACT_POS_TOL_ERROR MD 37135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292 GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE MD 37100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-288 GANTRY_BREAK_UP MD 37140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292 GANTRY_FUNCTION_MASK MD 37150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-293 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR MD 37120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-290 GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF MD 37130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-291 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING MD 37110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-289 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE MD 35010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-256 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION MD 35012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-256 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO MD 35110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-260 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT MD 35130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-262 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 MD 35112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-260 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO MD 35120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-261 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT MD 35140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-263 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 MD 35122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-261 GEAR_STEP_PC_MAX_VELO_LIMIT MD 35135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-263 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL MD 35210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-266 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL2 MD 35212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-266 GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL MD 35200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-265 GEAR_STEP_USED_IN_AXISMODE MD 35014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-257 General selection/status signals from HMI . 4-348 General selection/status signals from HMI (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-429 General selection/status signals to HMI (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-430 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition Index General signals from NCK . . . . . . . . . 5-435 General signals to NC . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-354 General signals to NCK . . . . . . . . . . . 5-434 H HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND MD 20624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121 HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH MD 11320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 HANDWH_REVERSE MD 11310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE MD 11346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX) 5-452 HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE MD 30505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-223 HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN MD 10366 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT MD 10368 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 HW_SERIAL_NUMBER MD 18030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 I INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB MD 30500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-221 INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR MD 30502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-222 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1 MD 10900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2 MD 10920 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR MD 30501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-222 INDEX_AX_OFFSET MD 30503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-223 INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1 MD 10910 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2 MD 10930 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 INFO_FREE_MEM_DPR MD 18070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 INT values (MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT) . 5-452 INT_INCR_PER_DEG MD 10210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 INT_INCR_PER_MM MD 10200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 IS_LOCAL_LINK_AXIS MD 30560 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-224 IS_ROT_AX MD 30300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-218 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL MD 42502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-326 I-461 06/2007 Index IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK MD 42512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IS_UNIPOLAR_OUTPUT MD 30134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-327 2-214 4-343 4-343 J JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE MD 32420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-235 JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK MD 32430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-235 JOG_MODE_MASK MD 10735 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO MD 41130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-300 JOG_SET_VELO MD 41110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-300 JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO MD 41200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-300 JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE MD 41010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-299 JOG_VELO MD 32020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-231 JOG_VELO_ORI MD 21155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129 JOG_VELO_RAPID MD 32010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-230 JOG_VELO_RAPID_ORI MD 21150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129 L LANG_SUB_NAME MD 15700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 LANG_SUB_PATH MD 15702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 LEADSCREW_PITCH MD 31030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-226 LOOKAH_FREQUENCY MD 32440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-236 LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE MD 20450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117 LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR MD 20460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118 LUBRICATION_DIST MD 33050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-245 M M_NO_FCT_CYCLE MD 10715 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME MD 10716 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR MD 10718 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 M_NO_FCT_EOP I-462 MD 10714 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 M_NO_FCT_STOPRE MD 10713 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 M19_SPOS MD 43240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-334 M19_SPOSMODE MD 43250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-334 MAX_AX_ACCEL MD 32300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-234 MAX_AX_JERK MD 32431 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-235 MAX_AX_VELO MD 32000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-230 MAX_BLOCKS_IN_IPOBUFFER MD 42990 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-331 MEAS_PROBE_DELAY_TIME MD 13220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE MD 13200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 MEAS_SAVE_POS_LENGTH2 MD 373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 MEAS_TOOL_CHANGE MD 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 MIN_CURV_RADIUS MD 42471 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-322 MINTIME_BETWEEN_STROKES MD 42404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-319 MM_ABSBLOCK MD 28400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211 MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF MD 28402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211 MM_CC_MD_MEM_SIZE MD 18238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 MM_CYC_DATA_MEM_SIZE MD 18237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS MD 38000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-296 MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM MD 10880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 MM_EXTERN_GCODE_SYSTEM MD 10881 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE MD 18800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM MD 18150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT MD 28085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-206 MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES MD 18079 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES MD 18078 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 MM_MAXNUM_3D_COLLISION MD 18896 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 MM_MAXNUM_3D_INTRERFACE_IN MD 18897 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM MD 18892 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS MD 18890 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_GROUPS MD 18894 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_ELEMENTS MD 28090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-207 MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_USER_MEM MD 28100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-207 MM_NUM_CC_HEAP_MEM MD 28105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-207 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM MD 18090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM MD 18092 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87 MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM MD 18200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM MD 18202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC MD 18077 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN MD 18130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK MD 18120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 MM_NUM_LINKVAR_ELEMENTS MD 28160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-208 MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE MD 18076 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE MD 18084 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION MD 18086 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE MD 28210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN MD 28200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-208 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CONTOUR MD 28212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK MD 18190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93 MM_NUM_SAFE_SYNC_ELEMENTS MD 28251 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210 MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS MD 28250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210 MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS MD 18075 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK MD 18080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition Index MD 18074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM MD 18091 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM MD 18093 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87 MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM MD 18099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89 MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM MD 18095 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88 MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM MD 18097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89 MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM MD 18201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM MD 18203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 MM_TYPE_CCS_MON_PARAM MD 18209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE MD 18102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 MMC_INFO_CUT_SPEED MD 27206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202 MMC_INFO_CUT_SPEED_STATUS MD 27207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202 MMC_INFO_NO_UNIT MD 27200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200 MMC_INFO_NO_UNIT_STATUS MD 27201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200 MMC_INFO_POSN_LIN MD 27202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200 MMC_INFO_POSN_LIN_STATUS MD 27203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-201 MMC_INFO_REV_FEED MD 27208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202 MMC_INFO_REV_FEED_STATUS MD 27209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203 MMC_INFO_VELO_LIN MD 27204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-201 MMC_INFO_VELO_LIN_STATUS MD 27205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-201 N NC signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-354 NC_USER_EXTERN_GCODES_TAB MD 10882 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 NCK signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-434 NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME MD 26018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-198 NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE MD 26008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-195 NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK MD 26006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-194 NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK MD 26004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-194 NIBBLE_SIGNAL_CHECK I-463 Index MD 26020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-199 NIBPUNCH_PRE_START_TIME MD 42402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-319 NUM_ENCS MD 30200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-214 O OEM_AXIS_INFO MD 37800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-296 OEM_CHAN_INFO MD 27400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203 OEM_GLOBAL_INFO MD 17400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1 MD 21120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127 ORIAX_TURN_TAB_2 MD 21130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128 OSCILL_CTRL_MASK MD 43770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-340 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1 MD 43720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-338 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2 MD 43730 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-339 OSCILL_END_POS MD 43760 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-340 OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE MD 43780 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-341 OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES MD 43750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-339 OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 MD 43700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-337 OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2 MD 43710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-338 OSCILL_START_POS MD 43790 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-342 OSCILL_VELO MD 43740 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-339 OVR_RAPID_FACTOR MD 42122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-317 Operating mode signals . . . . . . . . . . . 5-438 P PART_COUNTER MD 27880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-204 PART_COUNTER_MCODE MD 27882 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-206 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM MD 32432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-236 PLC User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-421 PLC machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-452 PLC_IPO_TIME_RATIO MD 10074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 POS_LIMIT_MINUS MD 36100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-275 POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 I-464 06/2007 MD 36120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-276 POS_LIMIT_PLUS MD 36110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-276 POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 MD 36130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-277 POSCTRL_CONFIG MD 32230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-234 POSCTRL_CYCLE_DIAGNOSIS MD 10063 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 POSCTRL_GAIN MD 32200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-232 POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE MD 32220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-233 POSCTRL_INTEGR_TIME MD 32210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-233 POSITIONING_TIME MD 36020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-273 PROCESSTIMER_MODE MD 27860 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-204 PROFIBUS_CTRL_CONFIG MD 37610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-295 PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER MD 11240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 PROFIBUS_SDB_SELECT MD 11241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 PROFIBUS_SHUTDOWN_TYPE MD 11250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 PROFIBUS_TORQUE_RED_RESOL MD 37620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-295 PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT MD 20107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105 PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK MD 20106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105 PROG_EVENT_MASK MD 20108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106 PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB MD 10710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 PROT_AREA_3D_TYPE_NAME_TAB MD 18898 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100 PROTAREA_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE MD 10618 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 PUNCH_DWELLTIME MD 42400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-318 PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE MD 26016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197 PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING MD 26014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197 PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION MD 26012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196 PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTIN MD 26000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192 PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTOUT MD 26002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-193 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK MD 26010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196 Program control signals from HMI (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-427 Program selection from PLC (retentive area) 5-427 Program-control signals from HMI . . . 4-344 R REBOOT_DELAY_TIME MD 10088 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE MD 34120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-252 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS MD 34010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-246 REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE MD 34000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-245 REFP_CAM_MARKER_DIST MD 34093 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-250 REFP_CAM_SHIFT MD 34092 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-250 REFP_CYCLE_NR MD 34110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-251 REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST MD 34030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-247 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST MD 34060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-248 REFP_MOVE_DIST MD 34080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-249 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR MD 34090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-249 REFP_NC_START_LOCK MD 20700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE MD 34050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-248 REFP_SET_POS MD 34100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-251 REFP_VELO_POS MD 34070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-249 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM MD 34020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-246 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER MD 34040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-247 ROT_IS_MODULO MD 30310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-218 Reading and writing PLC variables . . 5-453 Retentive data area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-425 S S_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET MD 22400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC MD 10240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL MD 42500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-325 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition Index SD_MAX_PATH_JERK MD 42510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-326 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME MD 36620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-282 SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT MD 30350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-220 SINAMICS_ALARM_MASK MD 13150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 SINGLEBLOCK2_STOPRE MD 42200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-318 SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL MD 42465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-321 SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET MD 35040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-258 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX MD 35000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-255 SPIND_CONSTCUT_S MD 43202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-332 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND MD 20090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK MD 35030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-258 SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE MD 35020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-257 SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL MD 35150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-264 SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT MD 35160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-265 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 MD 43220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-333 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS MD 43230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-334 SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 MD 43210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-333 SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START MD 35500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-270 SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL MD 35410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-268 SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO MD 35400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-268 SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR MD 35430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-269 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW MD 35450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-270 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW MD 35440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-269 SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO MD 35300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-266 SPIND_POSIT_DELAY_TIME MD 35310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-267 SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR MD 35350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-267 SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR I-465 06/2007 Index MD 20094 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 SPIND_S MD 43200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-331 SPIND_SPEED_TYPE MD 43206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-332 SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START MD 35510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-271 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT MD 35100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-259 STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME MD 36040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-274 STANDSTILL_POS_TOL MD 36030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-273 STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL MD 36060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-275 STIFFNESS_CONTROL_CONFIG MD 32642 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-243 STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE MD 32640 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-243 STIFFNESS_DELAY_TIME MD 32644 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-244 STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE MD 42480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-322 STOP_LIMIT_COARSE MD 36000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-272 STOP_LIMIT_FINE MD 36010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-272 SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_1 MD 10470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB MD 10450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME MD 10460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_1 MD 41500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-302 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_2 MD 41502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-303 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_3 MD 41504 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-304 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_4 MD 41506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-305 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1 MD 41520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-306 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_2 MD 41522 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-307 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_3 MD 41524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-309 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_4 MD 41526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-310 SW_CAM_MODE MD 10485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME MD 10461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_1 MD 41501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-303 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_2 MD 41503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-304 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_3 MD 41505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-305 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_4 MD 41507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-306 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1 MD 41521 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-307 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_2 MD 41523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-308 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_3 MD 41525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-309 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_4 MD 41527 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-311 SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK MD 10480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Signal from fast inputs and outputs . . 5-437 Signals from HMI . . . . . . . . . . . 4-346, 5-428 Signals from MCP (connected to the MCPA module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-423 Signals from NC channel . . . . . . . . . . 5-442 Signals from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-428 Signals from axis/spindle . . . . . 4-407, 5-448 Signals from operator panel (retentive area) 5-429 Signals from the channel . . . . . . . . . . 4-379 Signals from/to HMI . . . . . . . . . 4-344, 5-427 Signals to MCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-424 Signals to NC channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-439 Signals to axis/spindle . . . . . . . 4-390, 5-445 Signals to channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-363 Signals to fast inputs and outputs . . . 5-436 I-466 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition T T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE MD 10719 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME MD 10717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 TANG_OFFSET MD 37402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-294 TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG MD 42444 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-320 TECHNOLOGY_MODE MD 27800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203 THREAD_RAMP_DISP MD 42010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-314 THREAD_START_ANGLE MD 42000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-314 TOFF_ACCEL MD 21196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131 TOFF_MODE MD 21190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130 06/2007 TOFF_VELO MD 21194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE MD 22550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137 TOOL_CORR_MODE_G43G44 MD 20380 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116 TOOL_CORR_MULTIPLE_AXES MD 20384 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116 TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER MD 17530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST MD 42940 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-329 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE MD 42950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-330 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK MD 20310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110 TOOL_OFFSET_DRF_ON MD 20396 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117 TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG MD 42442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-320 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK MD 20360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK MD 20320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114 TRAANG_ANGLE_1 MD 24700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177 TRAANG_ANGLE_2 MD 24750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179 TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1 MD 24710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178 TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2 MD 24760 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180 TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_1 MD 24721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179 TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2 MD 24771 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181 TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 MD 24720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178 TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_2 MD 24770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180 TRACON_CHAIN_1 MD 24995 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190 TRACON_CHAIN_2 MD 24996 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191 TRACON_CHAIN_3 MD 24997 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192 TRACON_CHAIN_4 MD 24998 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 MD 24820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_2 MD 24870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185 TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_1 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition Index MD 24808 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_2 MD 24858 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 MD 24805 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 MD 24855 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 MD 24800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 MD 24850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 MD 24810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 MD 24860 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 MD 24110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_AXES_IN_10 MD 24482 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 MD 24210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_AXES_IN_3 MD 24310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_AXES_IN_4 MD 24410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_AXES_IN_5 MD 24432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_AXES_IN_6 MD 24442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_AXES_IN_7 MD 24452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_AXES_IN_8 MD 24462 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_AXES_IN_9 MD 24472 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE MD 22534 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 MD 24120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_10 MD 24484 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 MD 24220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_3 MD 24320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_4 MD 24420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_5 MD 24434 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_6 MD 24444 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_7 MD 24454 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182 2-184 2-182 2-184 2-181 2-184 2-183 2-185 2-141 2-156 2-143 2-144 2-146 2-148 2-149 2-151 2-153 2-154 2-137 2-141 2-156 2-143 2-145 2-146 2-148 2-150 2-151 I-467 06/2007 Index TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_8 MD 24464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_9 MD 24474 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_1 MD 24130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_10 MD 24486 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_2 MD 24230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_3 MD 24330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_4 MD 24426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_5 MD 24436 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_6 MD 24446 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_7 MD 24456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_8 MD 24466 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_9 MD 24476 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_MODE_MASK MD 20144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_RESET_VALUE MD 20140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_TYPE_1 MD 24100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_TYPE_10 MD 24480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_TYPE_2 MD 24200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_TYPE_3 MD 24300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_TYPE_4 MD 24400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_TYPE_5 MD 24430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_TYPE_6 MD 24440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_TYPE_7 MD 24450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_TYPE_8 MD 24460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO_TYPE_9 MD 24470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_AXIS1_1 MD 24570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_AXIS1_2 MD 24670 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_AXIS2_1 I-468 2-153 2-155 2-142 2-156 2-143 2-145 2-147 2-148 2-150 2-152 2-153 2-155 2-107 2-106 2-140 2-155 2-142 2-144 2-146 2-147 2-149 2-151 2-152 2-154 2-164 2-174 MD 24572 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_AXIS2_2 MD 24672 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_AXIS3_1 MD 24573 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_AXIS3_2 MD 24673 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_1 MD 24574 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_2 MD 24674 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1 MD 24550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_2 MD 24650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1 MD 24560 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2 MD 24660 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_1 MD 24558 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_2 MD 24658 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1 MD 24530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_2 MD 24630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_1 MD 24564 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_2 MD 24664 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_1 MD 24566 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_2 MD 24666 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 MD 24585 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 MD 24685 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1 MD 24500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2 MD 24600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1 MD 24540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2 MD 24640 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_POLE_TOL_1 MD 24542 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_POLE_TOL_2 MD 24642 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 MD 24510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164 2-175 2-165 2-175 2-165 2-175 2-160 2-171 2-161 2-172 2-161 2-172 2-158 2-169 2-163 2-173 2-163 2-174 2-167 2-177 2-157 2-167 2-159 2-170 2-160 2-171 2-157 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 MD 24610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168 TRAFO5_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR_1 MD 24590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167 TRAFO5_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR_2 MD 24690 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177 TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 MD 24520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158 TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 MD 24620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168 TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_1 MD 24582 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166 TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_2 MD 24682 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176 TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 MD 24562 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162 TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 MD 24662 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173 TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_1 MD 24580 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166 TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_2 MD 24680 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176 TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_1 MD 24576 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165 TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_2 MD 24676 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176 TRAFO6_JOINT_OFFSET_2_3_1 MD 24561 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162 TRAFO6_JOINT_OFFSET_2_3_2 MD 24661 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 MD 24920 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2 MD 24970 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189 TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1 MD 24911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187 TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_2 MD 24961 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 MD 24905 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 MD 24955 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 MD 24900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 MD 24950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 MD 24910 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 MD 24960 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188 Tool management functions from NC channel 4-419, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-454 Transferred D functions . . . . . . . . . . . 5-433 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition Index Transferred H functions . . . . . . . . . . . 5-434 Transferred M functions . . . . . . . . . . . 5-433 Transferred M/S functions, axis-specific . 5445 Transferred S functions . . . . . . . . . . . 5-433 Transferred T functions . . . . . . . . . . . 5-432 Transferred axis-specific M and S functions 4-389 U UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY MD 11210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 USER_DATA_FLOAT MD 14514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 USER_DATA_HEX MD 14512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 USER_DATA_INT MD 14510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM MD 14516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 User alarm Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-426 Configuration (MD 14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM) . . . . . 5-452 User data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-423 User data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-423 User data2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-423 V V1700 0000.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1700 0000.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1700 0001.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1700 0001.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1700 0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1700 0003.0 to .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1700 0003.7 *** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1800 0000.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1800 0000.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1800 0000.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1800 0000.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1800 0000.6 *** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1800 0001.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1900 0000.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1900 0003.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1900 0004.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1900 1003.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1900 1004.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1900 5001.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V1900 5002.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2500 0004. 0 to .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2500 0006.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2500 0008.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2500 0010.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2500 0012.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2600 0000.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-344 4-344 4-344 4-345 4-345 4-345 4-345 4-346 4-346 4-346 4-346 4-347 4-347 4-347 4-348 4-348 4-348 4-348 4-350 4-350 4-351 4-351 4-351 4-351 4-351 4-354 I-469 06/2007 Index V2600 0000.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2600 0001.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2700 0000.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2700 0001.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2700 0001.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2700 0004.0 to .7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2700 0008.0 to .7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3000 0000.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3000 0000.0 to .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3000 0000.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3000 0000.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3000 0000.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3000 0000.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3000 0001.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3100 0000.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3100 0000.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3100 0000.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3100 0000.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3100 0001.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 000.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0000.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0000.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0001.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0001.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0002.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0003.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0003.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0003.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0003.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0003.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0003.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0006.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0006.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0006.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0006.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0006.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0007.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0007.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0007.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0007.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0007.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 0013.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1000.0 to .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1000.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1000.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1000.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1000.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1001.0 to .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1004.0 to .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1004.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1004.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1004.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1004.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-470 4-354 4-354 4-355 4-355 4-355 4-356 4-356 4-357 4-360 4-357 4-357 4-359 4-359 4-359 4-360 4-361 4-361 4-361 4-362 4-363 4-363 4-364 4-364 4-365 4-365 4-366 4-366 4-366 4-366 4-367 4-367 4-370 4-371 4-371 4-372 4-372 4-373 4-373 4-373 4-374 4-375 4-375 4-376 4-376 4-377 4-377 4-377 4-378 4-376 4-376 4-377 4-377 4-377 V3200 1005.0 to .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1008.0 to .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1008.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1008.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1008.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1008.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3200 1009.0 to .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0000.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0000.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0000.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0000.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0001.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0001.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0001.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0001.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0001.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0001.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0003.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0003.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0003.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0003.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0003.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0003.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0003.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0004.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0004.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0006.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0006.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 0015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 1000.0 to .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 1000.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 1001.0, ..., .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 1004.0 to .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 1004.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 1005.0, ..., .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 1008.0 to .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 1008.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 1009.0, ..., .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3300 4001.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0001.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0001.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0001.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0002.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0002.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0002.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0003.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-378 4-376 4-376 4-377 4-377 4-377 4-378 4-379 4-379 4-380 4-380 4-380 4-380 4-381 4-381 4-382 4-382 4-382 4-383 4-383 4-383 4-384 4-384 4-384 4-384 4-385 4-385 4-385 4-385 4-385 4-386 4-386 4-386 4-386 4-386 4-386 4-387 4-387 4-388 4-387 4-387 4-388 4-387 4-387 4-388 4-388 4-391 4-392 4-392 4-393 4-393 4-394 4-394 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 06/2007 V380x 0003.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0004.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0004.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0004.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0004.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0004.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 0005.0 to .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 1000.1 and .0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 2000.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 2000.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 2001.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 2001.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 2001.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 2002.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 2002.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x 2002.7 / .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x1000.3 or .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V380x1000.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0000.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0000.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0000.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0000.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0000.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0002.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0002.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0002.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0004.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0004.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 0005.0, ..., .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2000.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2000.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2001.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2001.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2001.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2001.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2001.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2002.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2002.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2002.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2002.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x 2002.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x5004.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x5004.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x5004.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V390x5004.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V5300 0000.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V5300 0000.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VB2500 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VB2500 1012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VB2500 3004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VB2500 3012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index 4-395 4-395 4-396 4-397 4-397 4-398 4-399 4-399 4-401 4-401 4-402 4-402 4-403 4-403 4-404 4-405 4-399 4-400 4-407 4-407 4-408 4-408 4-409 4-409 4-409 4-409 4-410 4-410 4-411 4-411 4-412 4-412 4-413 4-413 4-414 4-414 4-415 4-415 4-415 4-416 4-416 4-416 4-416 4-417 4-417 4-419 4-419 4-351 4-351 4-352 4-352 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition VB2500 3020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VB2500 3028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VB2500 3036 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VB2500 4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VB2500 4012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VB3200 0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-368 VB3200 0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-369 VB380x 0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-390 VB380x 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-406 VD1900 5004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-350 VD2500 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-351 VD2500 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VD2500 3008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VD2500 3016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VD2500 3024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VD2500 3032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VD2500 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VD2500 4008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VD2500 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-352 VD2500 6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-353 VD2500 6008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-353 VD2500 6016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-353 VD370x 0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-389 VD370x 0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-389 VD5300 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-419 VD5300 1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-419 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT MD 32610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-242 VERSION_INFO MD 18040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 VW2500 6004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-353 VW2500 6012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-353 VW2500 6020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-353 Variable for alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-426 W WAB_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE MD 20204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE MD 22910 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS MD 43430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS MD 43420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE MD 43410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE MD 43400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS MD 21020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109 2-138 3-336 3-336 3-335 3-335 2-127 I-471 Index 06/2007 I-472 (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition To Suggestions Siemens AG Corrections A&D MC MS1 For publication/manual: Postfach 3180 SINUMERIK 802D sl D-91050 Erlangen Parameter Manuals (Tel. +49 (0) 180 5050 - 222 [hotline] Fax +49 (0) 9131 98 - 63315 [documentation] Manufacturer Documentation E-mail: motioncontrol.docu@siemens.com) From: Order No.: 6FC5397-5CP10-1BA0 Name: Ausgabe 06/2007 Company/Dept. Should you come across any printingerrors when reading this publica- Address Zip code: City : Telephon : / Telefax : / Telefax : Suggestions and/or corrections (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007 tion, please notify us on this sheet. Suggestions for improvement are also welcome. (c) Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007